diff options
author | Nicolas Dechesne <nicolas.dechesne@linaro.org> | 2020-12-03 22:38:43 +0100 |
---|---|---|
committer | Richard Purdie <richard.purdie@linuxfoundation.org> | 2020-12-09 12:21:27 +0000 |
commit | b70318797c598db4cfda28226ac4c535235c9d1b (patch) | |
tree | 4f9c7f2cebb12356270779fbeb6b2f44f68622f0 /documentation/ref-manual/ref-variables.rst | |
parent | 79fecb25e15178ad1a0f56233a2d514340c14ab5 (diff) | |
download | poky-b70318797c598db4cfda28226ac4c535235c9d1b.tar.gz |
ref-manual: remove 'ref' from filenames
All filenames duplicate the 'manual name', which is not needed, and
make all references longer than they should. Rename all files to be as
consise as possible, and fix all references
(From yocto-docs rev: bb7e4783f45a5f67e6e4b39968f3512f43738833)
Signed-off-by: Nicolas Dechesne <nicolas.dechesne@linaro.org>
Signed-off-by: Richard Purdie <richard.purdie@linuxfoundation.org>
Diffstat (limited to 'documentation/ref-manual/ref-variables.rst')
-rw-r--r-- | documentation/ref-manual/ref-variables.rst | 8807 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 8807 deletions
diff --git a/documentation/ref-manual/ref-variables.rst b/documentation/ref-manual/ref-variables.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 865d17c1fc..0000000000 --- a/documentation/ref-manual/ref-variables.rst +++ /dev/null | |||
@@ -1,8807 +0,0 @@ | |||
1 | .. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK | ||
2 | |||
3 | ****************** | ||
4 | Variables Glossary | ||
5 | ****************** | ||
6 | |||
7 | This chapter lists common variables used in the OpenEmbedded build | ||
8 | system and gives an overview of their function and contents. | ||
9 | |||
10 | :term:`A <ABIEXTENSION>` :term:`B` :term:`C <CACHE>` | ||
11 | :term:`D` :term:`E <EFI_PROVIDER>` :term:`F <FEATURE_PACKAGES>` | ||
12 | :term:`G <GCCPIE>` :term:`H <HOMEPAGE>` :term:`I <ICECC_DISABLED>` | ||
13 | :term:`K <KARCH>` :term:`L <LABELS>` :term:`M <MACHINE>` | ||
14 | :term:`N <NATIVELSBSTRING>` :term:`O <OBJCOPY>` :term:`P` | ||
15 | :term:`R <RANLIB>` :term:`S` :term:`T` | ||
16 | :term:`U <UBOOT_CONFIG>` :term:`V <VOLATILE_LOG_DIR>` | ||
17 | :term:`W <WARN_QA>` :term:`X <XSERVER>` | ||
18 | |||
19 | .. glossary:: | ||
20 | |||
21 | :term:`ABIEXTENSION` | ||
22 | Extension to the Application Binary Interface (ABI) field of the GNU | ||
23 | canonical architecture name (e.g. "eabi"). | ||
24 | |||
25 | ABI extensions are set in the machine include files. For example, the | ||
26 | ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc`` file sets the | ||
27 | following extension: | ||
28 | :: | ||
29 | |||
30 | ABIEXTENSION = "eabi" | ||
31 | |||
32 | :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY` | ||
33 | Specifies whether to produce an output package even if it is empty. | ||
34 | By default, BitBake does not produce empty packages. This default | ||
35 | behavior can cause issues when there is an | ||
36 | :term:`RDEPENDS` or some other hard runtime | ||
37 | requirement on the existence of the package. | ||
38 | |||
39 | Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in | ||
40 | conjunction with a package name override, as in: | ||
41 | :: | ||
42 | |||
43 | ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN} = "1" | ||
44 | ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-dev = "1" | ||
45 | ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-staticdev = "1" | ||
46 | |||
47 | :term:`ALTERNATIVE` | ||
48 | Lists commands in a package that need an alternative binary naming | ||
49 | scheme. Sometimes the same command is provided in multiple packages. | ||
50 | When this occurs, the OpenEmbedded build system needs to use the | ||
51 | alternatives system to create a different binary naming scheme so the | ||
52 | commands can co-exist. | ||
53 | |||
54 | To use the variable, list out the package's commands that also exist | ||
55 | as part of another package. For example, if the ``busybox`` package | ||
56 | has four commands that also exist as part of another package, you | ||
57 | identify them as follows: | ||
58 | :: | ||
59 | |||
60 | ALTERNATIVE_busybox = "sh sed test bracket" | ||
61 | |||
62 | For more information on the alternatives system, see the | ||
63 | ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" | ||
64 | section. | ||
65 | |||
66 | :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME` | ||
67 | Used by the alternatives system to map duplicated commands to actual | ||
68 | locations. For example, if the ``bracket`` command provided by the | ||
69 | ``busybox`` package is duplicated through another package, you must | ||
70 | use the ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` variable to specify the actual | ||
71 | location: | ||
72 | :: | ||
73 | |||
74 | ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME[bracket] = "/usr/bin/[" | ||
75 | |||
76 | In this example, the binary for the ``bracket`` command (i.e. ``[``) | ||
77 | from the ``busybox`` package resides in ``/usr/bin/``. | ||
78 | |||
79 | .. note:: | ||
80 | |||
81 | If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` is not defined, it defaults to ``${bindir}/name``. | ||
82 | |||
83 | For more information on the alternatives system, see the | ||
84 | ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" | ||
85 | section. | ||
86 | |||
87 | :term:`ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY` | ||
88 | Used by the alternatives system to create default priorities for | ||
89 | duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single | ||
90 | default regardless of the command name or package, a default for | ||
91 | specific duplicated commands regardless of the package, or a default | ||
92 | for specific commands tied to particular packages. Here are the | ||
93 | available syntax forms: | ||
94 | :: | ||
95 | |||
96 | ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY = "priority" | ||
97 | ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY[name] = "priority" | ||
98 | ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY_pkg[name] = "priority" | ||
99 | |||
100 | For more information on the alternatives system, see the | ||
101 | ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" | ||
102 | section. | ||
103 | |||
104 | :term:`ALTERNATIVE_TARGET` | ||
105 | Used by the alternatives system to create default link locations for | ||
106 | duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single | ||
107 | default location for all duplicated commands regardless of the | ||
108 | command name or package, a default for specific duplicated commands | ||
109 | regardless of the package, or a default for specific commands tied to | ||
110 | particular packages. Here are the available syntax forms: | ||
111 | :: | ||
112 | |||
113 | ALTERNATIVE_TARGET = "target" | ||
114 | ALTERNATIVE_TARGET[name] = "target" | ||
115 | ALTERNATIVE_TARGET_pkg[name] = "target" | ||
116 | |||
117 | .. note:: | ||
118 | |||
119 | If ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` is not defined, it inherits the value | ||
120 | from the :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME` variable. | ||
121 | |||
122 | If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` and ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` are the | ||
123 | same, the target for ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` has "``.{BPN}``" | ||
124 | appended to it. | ||
125 | |||
126 | Finally, if the file referenced has not been renamed, the | ||
127 | alternatives system will rename it to avoid the need to rename | ||
128 | alternative files in the :ref:`ref-tasks-install` | ||
129 | task while retaining support for the command if necessary. | ||
130 | |||
131 | For more information on the alternatives system, see the | ||
132 | ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`" | ||
133 | section. | ||
134 | |||
135 | :term:`ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES` | ||
136 | When inheriting the | ||
137 | :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` | ||
138 | class, this variable identifies a list of distribution features where | ||
139 | at least one must be enabled in the current configuration in order | ||
140 | for the OpenEmbedded build system to build the recipe. In other words, | ||
141 | if none of the features listed in ``ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES`` | ||
142 | appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then | ||
143 | the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build | ||
144 | the recipe then an error will be triggered. | ||
145 | |||
146 | |||
147 | :term:`APPEND` | ||
148 | An override list of append strings for each target specified with | ||
149 | :term:`LABELS`. | ||
150 | |||
151 | See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more | ||
152 | information on how this variable is used. | ||
153 | |||
154 | :term:`AR` | ||
155 | The minimal command and arguments used to run ``ar``. | ||
156 | |||
157 | :term:`ARCHIVER_MODE` | ||
158 | When used with the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class, | ||
159 | determines the type of information used to create a released archive. | ||
160 | You can use this variable to create archives of patched source, | ||
161 | original source, configured source, and so forth by employing the | ||
162 | following variable flags (varflags): | ||
163 | :: | ||
164 | |||
165 | ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "original" # Uses original (unpacked) source files. | ||
166 | ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "patched" # Uses patched source files. This is the default. | ||
167 | ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "configured" # Uses configured source files. | ||
168 | ARCHIVER_MODE[diff] = "1" # Uses patches between do_unpack and do_patch. | ||
169 | ARCHIVER_MODE[diff-exclude] ?= "file file ..." # Lists files and directories to exclude from diff. | ||
170 | ARCHIVER_MODE[dumpdata] = "1" # Uses environment data. | ||
171 | ARCHIVER_MODE[recipe] = "1" # Uses recipe and include files. | ||
172 | ARCHIVER_MODE[srpm] = "1" # Uses RPM package files. | ||
173 | |||
174 | For information on how the variable works, see the | ||
175 | ``meta/classes/archiver.bbclass`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`. | ||
176 | |||
177 | :term:`AS` | ||
178 | Minimal command and arguments needed to run the assembler. | ||
179 | |||
180 | :term:`ASSUME_PROVIDED` | ||
181 | Lists recipe names (:term:`PN` values) BitBake does not | ||
182 | attempt to build. Instead, BitBake assumes these recipes have already | ||
183 | been built. | ||
184 | |||
185 | In OpenEmbedded-Core, ``ASSUME_PROVIDED`` mostly specifies native | ||
186 | tools that should not be built. An example is ``git-native``, which | ||
187 | when specified, allows for the Git binary from the host to be used | ||
188 | rather than building ``git-native``. | ||
189 | |||
190 | :term:`ASSUME_SHLIBS` | ||
191 | Provides additional ``shlibs`` provider mapping information, which | ||
192 | adds to or overwrites the information provided automatically by the | ||
193 | system. Separate multiple entries using spaces. | ||
194 | |||
195 | As an example, use the following form to add an ``shlib`` provider of | ||
196 | shlibname in packagename with the optional version: | ||
197 | :: | ||
198 | |||
199 | shlibname:packagename[_version] | ||
200 | |||
201 | Here is an example that adds a shared library named ``libEGL.so.1`` | ||
202 | as being provided by the ``libegl-implementation`` package: | ||
203 | :: | ||
204 | |||
205 | ASSUME_SHLIBS = "libEGL.so.1:libegl-implementation" | ||
206 | |||
207 | :term:`AUTHOR` | ||
208 | The email address used to contact the original author or authors in | ||
209 | order to send patches and forward bugs. | ||
210 | |||
211 | :term:`AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS` | ||
212 | When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, | ||
213 | which is the default behavior, ``AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS`` specifies which | ||
214 | packages should be checked for libraries and renamed according to | ||
215 | Debian library package naming. | ||
216 | |||
217 | The default value is "${PACKAGES}", which causes the debian class to | ||
218 | act on all packages that are explicitly generated by the recipe. | ||
219 | |||
220 | :term:`AUTO_SYSLINUXMENU` | ||
221 | Enables creating an automatic menu for the syslinux bootloader. You | ||
222 | must set this variable in your recipe. The | ||
223 | :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks this variable. | ||
224 | |||
225 | :term:`AUTOREV` | ||
226 | When ``SRCREV`` is set to the value of this variable, it specifies to | ||
227 | use the latest source revision in the repository. Here is an example: | ||
228 | :: | ||
229 | |||
230 | SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}" | ||
231 | |||
232 | If you use the previous statement to retrieve the latest version of | ||
233 | software, you need to be sure :term:`PV` contains | ||
234 | ``${``\ :term:`SRCPV`\ ``}``. For example, suppose you | ||
235 | have a kernel recipe that inherits the | ||
236 | :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class and you use the previous | ||
237 | statement. In this example, ``${SRCPV}`` does not automatically get | ||
238 | into ``PV``. Consequently, you need to change ``PV`` in your recipe | ||
239 | so that it does contain ``${SRCPV}``. | ||
240 | |||
241 | For more information see the | ||
242 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`" | ||
243 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
244 | |||
245 | :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES` | ||
246 | List of licenses found in the directories specified by | ||
247 | :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR` and | ||
248 | :term:`LICENSE_PATH`. | ||
249 | |||
250 | .. note:: | ||
251 | |||
252 | It is assumed that all changes to ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` and | ||
253 | ``LICENSE_PATH`` have been done before ``AVAILABLE_LICENSES`` | ||
254 | is defined (in :ref:`ref-classes-license`). | ||
255 | |||
256 | :term:`AVAILTUNES` | ||
257 | The list of defined CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) | ||
258 | tunings (i.e. "tunes") available for use by the OpenEmbedded build | ||
259 | system. | ||
260 | |||
261 | The list simply presents the tunes that are available. Not all tunes | ||
262 | may be compatible with a particular machine configuration, or with | ||
263 | each other in a | ||
264 | :ref:`Multilib <dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image>` | ||
265 | configuration. | ||
266 | |||
267 | To add a tune to the list, be sure to append it with spaces using the | ||
268 | "+=" BitBake operator. Do not simply replace the list by using the | ||
269 | "=" operator. See the | ||
270 | ":ref:`Basic Syntax <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:basic syntax>`" section in the BitBake | ||
271 | User Manual for more information. | ||
272 | |||
273 | :term:`B` | ||
274 | The directory within the :term:`Build Directory` in | ||
275 | which the OpenEmbedded build system places generated objects during a | ||
276 | recipe's build process. By default, this directory is the same as the | ||
277 | :term:`S` directory, which is defined as: | ||
278 | :: | ||
279 | |||
280 | S = "${WORKDIR}/${BP}" | ||
281 | |||
282 | You can separate the (``S``) directory and the directory pointed to | ||
283 | by the ``B`` variable. Most Autotools-based recipes support | ||
284 | separating these directories. The build system defaults to using | ||
285 | separate directories for ``gcc`` and some kernel recipes. | ||
286 | |||
287 | :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` | ||
288 | Lists "recommended-only" packages to not install. Recommended-only | ||
289 | packages are packages installed only through the | ||
290 | :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable. You can prevent any | ||
291 | of these "recommended" packages from being installed by listing them | ||
292 | with the ``BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable: | ||
293 | :: | ||
294 | |||
295 | BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS = "package_name package_name package_name ..." | ||
296 | |||
297 | You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you | ||
298 | can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name | ||
299 | override: | ||
300 | :: | ||
301 | |||
302 | BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "package_name" | ||
303 | |||
304 | It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages | ||
305 | using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them | ||
306 | (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS` | ||
307 | variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and | ||
308 | will install the packages to avoid dependency errors. | ||
309 | |||
310 | Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM | ||
311 | packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. | ||
312 | |||
313 | See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the | ||
314 | :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for related | ||
315 | information. | ||
316 | |||
317 | :term:`BASE_LIB` | ||
318 | The library directory name for the CPU or Application Binary | ||
319 | Interface (ABI) tune. The ``BASE_LIB`` applies only in the Multilib | ||
320 | context. See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image`" | ||
321 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information | ||
322 | on Multilib. | ||
323 | |||
324 | The ``BASE_LIB`` variable is defined in the machine include files in | ||
325 | the :term:`Source Directory`. If Multilib is not | ||
326 | being used, the value defaults to "lib". | ||
327 | |||
328 | :term:`BASE_WORKDIR` | ||
329 | Points to the base of the work directory for all recipes. The default | ||
330 | value is "${TMPDIR}/work". | ||
331 | |||
332 | :term:`BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS` | ||
333 | Specifies a space-delimited list of hosts that the fetcher is allowed | ||
334 | to use to obtain the required source code. Following are | ||
335 | considerations surrounding this variable: | ||
336 | |||
337 | - This host list is only used if ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` is either not set | ||
338 | or set to "0". | ||
339 | |||
340 | - Limited support for wildcard matching against the beginning of | ||
341 | host names exists. For example, the following setting matches | ||
342 | ``git.gnu.org``, ``ftp.gnu.org``, and ``foo.git.gnu.org``. | ||
343 | :: | ||
344 | |||
345 | BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS = "*.gnu.org" | ||
346 | |||
347 | .. note:: | ||
348 | |||
349 | The use of the "``*``" character only works at the beginning of | ||
350 | a host name and it must be isolated from the remainder of the | ||
351 | host name. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other | ||
352 | location of the name or combined with the front part of the | ||
353 | name. | ||
354 | |||
355 | For example, ``*.foo.bar`` is supported, while ``*aa.foo.bar`` | ||
356 | is not. | ||
357 | |||
358 | - Mirrors not in the host list are skipped and logged in debug. | ||
359 | |||
360 | - Attempts to access networks not in the host list cause a failure. | ||
361 | |||
362 | Using ``BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS`` in conjunction with | ||
363 | :term:`PREMIRRORS` is very useful. Adding the host | ||
364 | you want to use to ``PREMIRRORS`` results in the source code being | ||
365 | fetched from an allowed location and avoids raising an error when a | ||
366 | host that is not allowed is in a :term:`SRC_URI` | ||
367 | statement. This is because the fetcher does not attempt to use the | ||
368 | host listed in ``SRC_URI`` after a successful fetch from the | ||
369 | ``PREMIRRORS`` occurs. | ||
370 | |||
371 | :term:`BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY` | ||
372 | Defines how BitBake handles situations where an append file | ||
373 | (``.bbappend``) has no corresponding recipe file (``.bb``). This | ||
374 | condition often occurs when layers get out of sync (e.g. ``oe-core`` | ||
375 | bumps a recipe version and the old recipe no longer exists and the | ||
376 | other layer has not been updated to the new version of the recipe | ||
377 | yet). | ||
378 | |||
379 | The default fatal behavior is safest because it is the sane reaction | ||
380 | given something is out of sync. It is important to realize when your | ||
381 | changes are no longer being applied. | ||
382 | |||
383 | You can change the default behavior by setting this variable to "1", | ||
384 | "yes", or "true" in your ``local.conf`` file, which is located in the | ||
385 | :term:`Build Directory`: Here is an example: | ||
386 | :: | ||
387 | |||
388 | BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY = "1" | ||
389 | |||
390 | :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS` | ||
391 | Monitors disk space and available inodes during the build and allows | ||
392 | you to control the build based on these parameters. | ||
393 | |||
394 | Disk space monitoring is disabled by default. To enable monitoring, | ||
395 | add the ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` variable to your ``conf/local.conf`` file | ||
396 | found in the :term:`Build Directory`. Use the | ||
397 | following form: | ||
398 | |||
399 | .. code-block:: none | ||
400 | |||
401 | BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "action,dir,threshold [...]" | ||
402 | |||
403 | where: | ||
404 | |||
405 | action is: | ||
406 | ABORT: Immediately abort the build when | ||
407 | a threshold is broken. | ||
408 | STOPTASKS: Stop the build after the currently | ||
409 | executing tasks have finished when | ||
410 | a threshold is broken. | ||
411 | WARN: Issue a warning but continue the | ||
412 | build when a threshold is broken. | ||
413 | Subsequent warnings are issued as | ||
414 | defined by the BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL | ||
415 | variable, which must be defined in | ||
416 | the conf/local.conf file. | ||
417 | |||
418 | dir is: | ||
419 | Any directory you choose. You can specify one or | ||
420 | more directories to monitor by separating the | ||
421 | groupings with a space. If two directories are | ||
422 | on the same device, only the first directory | ||
423 | is monitored. | ||
424 | |||
425 | threshold is: | ||
426 | Either the minimum available disk space, | ||
427 | the minimum number of free inodes, or | ||
428 | both. You must specify at least one. To | ||
429 | omit one or the other, simply omit the value. | ||
430 | Specify the threshold using G, M, K for Gbytes, | ||
431 | Mbytes, and Kbytes, respectively. If you do | ||
432 | not specify G, M, or K, Kbytes is assumed by | ||
433 | default. Do not use GB, MB, or KB. | ||
434 | |||
435 | Here are some examples: | ||
436 | :: | ||
437 | |||
438 | BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},1G,100K WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K" | ||
439 | BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "STOPTASKS,${TMPDIR},1G" | ||
440 | BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},,100K" | ||
441 | |||
442 | The first example works only if you also provide the | ||
443 | :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL` | ||
444 | variable in the ``conf/local.conf``. This example causes the build | ||
445 | system to immediately abort when either the disk space in | ||
446 | ``${TMPDIR}`` drops below 1 Gbyte or the available free inodes drops | ||
447 | below 100 Kbytes. Because two directories are provided with the | ||
448 | variable, the build system also issue a warning when the disk space | ||
449 | in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}`` directory drops below 1 Gbyte or the number | ||
450 | of free inodes drops below 100 Kbytes. Subsequent warnings are issued | ||
451 | during intervals as defined by the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` | ||
452 | variable. | ||
453 | |||
454 | The second example stops the build after all currently executing | ||
455 | tasks complete when the minimum disk space in the ``${TMPDIR}`` | ||
456 | directory drops below 1 Gbyte. No disk monitoring occurs for the free | ||
457 | inodes in this case. | ||
458 | |||
459 | The final example immediately aborts the build when the number of | ||
460 | free inodes in the ``${TMPDIR}`` directory drops below 100 Kbytes. No | ||
461 | disk space monitoring for the directory itself occurs in this case. | ||
462 | |||
463 | :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL` | ||
464 | Defines the disk space and free inode warning intervals. To set these | ||
465 | intervals, define the variable in your ``conf/local.conf`` file in | ||
466 | the :term:`Build Directory`. | ||
467 | |||
468 | If you are going to use the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable, you | ||
469 | must also use the :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS` | ||
470 | variable and define its action as "WARN". During the build, | ||
471 | subsequent warnings are issued each time disk space or number of free | ||
472 | inodes further reduces by the respective interval. | ||
473 | |||
474 | If you do not provide a ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable and you | ||
475 | do use ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` with the "WARN" action, the disk | ||
476 | monitoring interval defaults to the following: | ||
477 | :: | ||
478 | |||
479 | BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K" | ||
480 | |||
481 | When specifying the variable in your configuration file, use the | ||
482 | following form: | ||
483 | |||
484 | .. code-block:: none | ||
485 | |||
486 | BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "disk_space_interval,disk_inode_interval" | ||
487 | |||
488 | where: | ||
489 | |||
490 | disk_space_interval is: | ||
491 | An interval of memory expressed in either | ||
492 | G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes, | ||
493 | respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB. | ||
494 | |||
495 | disk_inode_interval is: | ||
496 | An interval of free inodes expressed in either | ||
497 | G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes, | ||
498 | respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB. | ||
499 | |||
500 | Here is an example: | ||
501 | :: | ||
502 | |||
503 | BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K" | ||
504 | BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K" | ||
505 | |||
506 | These variables cause the | ||
507 | OpenEmbedded build system to issue subsequent warnings each time the | ||
508 | available disk space further reduces by 50 Mbytes or the number of | ||
509 | free inodes further reduces by 5 Kbytes in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}`` | ||
510 | directory. Subsequent warnings based on the interval occur each time | ||
511 | a respective interval is reached beyond the initial warning (i.e. 1 | ||
512 | Gbytes and 100 Kbytes). | ||
513 | |||
514 | :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS` | ||
515 | Causes tarballs of the source control repositories (e.g. Git | ||
516 | repositories), including metadata, to be placed in the | ||
517 | :term:`DL_DIR` directory. | ||
518 | |||
519 | For performance reasons, creating and placing tarballs of these | ||
520 | repositories is not the default action by the OpenEmbedded build | ||
521 | system. | ||
522 | :: | ||
523 | |||
524 | BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1" | ||
525 | |||
526 | Set this variable in your | ||
527 | ``local.conf`` file in the :term:`Build Directory`. | ||
528 | |||
529 | Once you have the tarballs containing your source files, you can | ||
530 | clean up your ``DL_DIR`` directory by deleting any Git or other | ||
531 | source control work directories. | ||
532 | |||
533 | :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS` | ||
534 | The maximum number of tasks BitBake should run in parallel at any one | ||
535 | time. The OpenEmbedded build system automatically configures this | ||
536 | variable to be equal to the number of cores on the build system. For | ||
537 | example, a system with a dual core processor that also uses | ||
538 | hyper-threading causes the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable to default | ||
539 | to "4". | ||
540 | |||
541 | For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to | ||
542 | override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds. | ||
543 | However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical | ||
544 | CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable | ||
545 | is not set higher than "20". | ||
546 | |||
547 | For more information on speeding up builds, see the | ||
548 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`" | ||
549 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
550 | |||
551 | :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT` | ||
552 | Specifies the time (in seconds) after which to unload the BitBake | ||
553 | server due to inactivity. Set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to determine how | ||
554 | long the BitBake server stays resident between invocations. | ||
555 | |||
556 | For example, the following statement in your ``local.conf`` file | ||
557 | instructs the server to be unloaded after 20 seconds of inactivity: | ||
558 | :: | ||
559 | |||
560 | BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT = "20" | ||
561 | |||
562 | If you want the server to never be unloaded, | ||
563 | set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to "-1". | ||
564 | |||
565 | :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` | ||
566 | Allows you to extend a recipe so that it builds variants of the | ||
567 | software. Common variants for recipes exist such as "natives" like | ||
568 | ``quilt-native``, which is a copy of Quilt built to run on the build | ||
569 | system; "crosses" such as ``gcc-cross``, which is a compiler built to | ||
570 | run on the build machine but produces binaries that run on the target | ||
571 | :term:`MACHINE`; "nativesdk", which targets the SDK | ||
572 | machine instead of ``MACHINE``; and "mulitlibs" in the form | ||
573 | "``multilib:``\ multilib_name". | ||
574 | |||
575 | To build a different variant of the recipe with a minimal amount of | ||
576 | code, it usually is as simple as adding the following to your recipe: | ||
577 | :: | ||
578 | |||
579 | BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "native nativesdk" | ||
580 | BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "multilib:multilib_name" | ||
581 | |||
582 | .. note:: | ||
583 | |||
584 | Internally, the ``BBCLASSEXTEND`` mechanism generates recipe | ||
585 | variants by rewriting variable values and applying overrides such | ||
586 | as ``_class-native``. For example, to generate a native version of | ||
587 | a recipe, a :term:`DEPENDS` on "foo" is rewritten | ||
588 | to a ``DEPENDS`` on "foo-native". | ||
589 | |||
590 | Even when using ``BBCLASSEXTEND``, the recipe is only parsed once. | ||
591 | Parsing once adds some limitations. For example, it is not | ||
592 | possible to include a different file depending on the variant, | ||
593 | since ``include`` statements are processed when the recipe is | ||
594 | parsed. | ||
595 | |||
596 | :term:`BBFILE_COLLECTIONS` | ||
597 | Lists the names of configured layers. These names are used to find | ||
598 | the other ``BBFILE_*`` variables. Typically, each layer will append | ||
599 | its name to this variable in its ``conf/layer.conf`` file. | ||
600 | |||
601 | :term:`BBFILE_PATTERN` | ||
602 | Variable that expands to match files from | ||
603 | :term:`BBFILES` in a particular layer. This variable | ||
604 | is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the | ||
605 | name of the specific layer (e.g. ``BBFILE_PATTERN_emenlow``). | ||
606 | |||
607 | :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` | ||
608 | Assigns the priority for recipe files in each layer. | ||
609 | |||
610 | This variable is useful in situations where the same recipe appears | ||
611 | in more than one layer. Setting this variable allows you to | ||
612 | prioritize a layer against other layers that contain the same recipe | ||
613 | - effectively letting you control the precedence for the multiple | ||
614 | layers. The precedence established through this variable stands | ||
615 | regardless of a recipe's version (:term:`PV` variable). For | ||
616 | example, a layer that has a recipe with a higher ``PV`` value but for | ||
617 | which the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` is set to have a lower precedence still | ||
618 | has a lower precedence. | ||
619 | |||
620 | A larger value for the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable results in a | ||
621 | higher precedence. For example, the value 6 has a higher precedence | ||
622 | than the value 5. If not specified, the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable | ||
623 | is set based on layer dependencies (see the ``LAYERDEPENDS`` variable | ||
624 | for more information. The default priority, if unspecified for a | ||
625 | layer with no dependencies, is the lowest defined priority + 1 (or 1 | ||
626 | if no priorities are defined). | ||
627 | |||
628 | .. tip:: | ||
629 | |||
630 | You can use the command ``bitbake-layers show-layers`` | ||
631 | to list all configured layers along with their priorities. | ||
632 | |||
633 | :term:`BBFILES` | ||
634 | A space-separated list of recipe files BitBake uses to build | ||
635 | software. | ||
636 | |||
637 | When specifying recipe files, you can pattern match using Python's | ||
638 | `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_ syntax. | ||
639 | For details on the syntax, see the documentation by following the | ||
640 | previous link. | ||
641 | |||
642 | :term:`BBFILES_DYNAMIC` | ||
643 | Activates content when identified layers are present. You identify | ||
644 | the layers by the collections that the layers define. | ||
645 | |||
646 | Use the ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC`` variable to avoid ``.bbappend`` files | ||
647 | whose corresponding ``.bb`` file is in a layer that attempts to | ||
648 | modify other layers through ``.bbappend`` but does not want to | ||
649 | introduce a hard dependency on those other layers. | ||
650 | |||
651 | Use the following form for ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC``: | ||
652 | collection_name:filename_pattern The following example identifies two | ||
653 | collection names and two filename patterns: | ||
654 | :: | ||
655 | |||
656 | BBFILES_DYNAMIC += " \ | ||
657 | clang-layer:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/meta-clang/*/*/*.bbappend \ | ||
658 | core:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend \ | ||
659 | " | ||
660 | |||
661 | This next example shows an error message that occurs because invalid | ||
662 | entries are found, which cause parsing to abort: | ||
663 | |||
664 | .. code-block:: none | ||
665 | |||
666 | ERROR: BBFILES_DYNAMIC entries must be of the form <collection name>:<filename pattern>, not: | ||
667 | /work/my-layer/bbappends/meta-security-isafw/*/*/*.bbappend | ||
668 | /work/my-layer/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend | ||
669 | |||
670 | :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS` | ||
671 | Variable that controls how BitBake displays logs on build failure. | ||
672 | |||
673 | :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES` | ||
674 | If :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS` is set, specifies the | ||
675 | maximum number of lines from the task log file to print when | ||
676 | reporting a failed task. If you do not set ``BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES``, | ||
677 | the entire log is printed. | ||
678 | |||
679 | :term:`BBLAYERS` | ||
680 | Lists the layers to enable during the build. This variable is defined | ||
681 | in the ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file in the :term:`Build Directory`. | ||
682 | Here is an example: | ||
683 | :: | ||
684 | |||
685 | BBLAYERS = " \ | ||
686 | /home/scottrif/poky/meta \ | ||
687 | /home/scottrif/poky/meta-poky \ | ||
688 | /home/scottrif/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \ | ||
689 | /home/scottrif/poky/meta-mykernel \ | ||
690 | " | ||
691 | |||
692 | This example enables four layers, one of which is a custom, | ||
693 | user-defined layer named ``meta-mykernel``. | ||
694 | |||
695 | :term:`BBMASK` | ||
696 | Prevents BitBake from processing recipes and recipe append files. | ||
697 | |||
698 | You can use the ``BBMASK`` variable to "hide" these ``.bb`` and | ||
699 | ``.bbappend`` files. BitBake ignores any recipe or recipe append | ||
700 | files that match any of the expressions. It is as if BitBake does not | ||
701 | see them at all. Consequently, matching files are not parsed or | ||
702 | otherwise used by BitBake. | ||
703 | |||
704 | The values you provide are passed to Python's regular expression | ||
705 | compiler. Consequently, the syntax follows Python's Regular | ||
706 | Expression (re) syntax. The expressions are compared against the full | ||
707 | paths to the files. For complete syntax information, see Python's | ||
708 | documentation at https://docs.python.org/3/library/re.html#regular-expression-syntax. | ||
709 | |||
710 | The following example uses a complete regular expression to tell | ||
711 | BitBake to ignore all recipe and recipe append files in the | ||
712 | ``meta-ti/recipes-misc/`` directory: | ||
713 | :: | ||
714 | |||
715 | BBMASK = "meta-ti/recipes-misc/" | ||
716 | |||
717 | If you want to mask out multiple directories or recipes, you can | ||
718 | specify multiple regular expression fragments. This next example | ||
719 | masks out multiple directories and individual recipes: :: | ||
720 | |||
721 | BBMASK += "/meta-ti/recipes-misc/ meta-ti/recipes-ti/packagegroup/" | ||
722 | BBMASK += "/meta-oe/recipes-support/" | ||
723 | BBMASK += "/meta-foo/.*/openldap" | ||
724 | BBMASK += "opencv.*\.bbappend" | ||
725 | BBMASK += "lzma" | ||
726 | |||
727 | .. note:: | ||
728 | |||
729 | When specifying a directory name, use the trailing slash character | ||
730 | to ensure you match just that directory name. | ||
731 | |||
732 | :term:`BBMULTICONFIG` | ||
733 | Specifies each additional separate configuration when you are | ||
734 | building targets with multiple configurations. Use this variable in | ||
735 | your ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file. Specify a | ||
736 | multiconfigname for each configuration file you are using. For | ||
737 | example, the following line specifies three configuration files: | ||
738 | :: | ||
739 | |||
740 | BBMULTICONFIG = "configA configB configC" | ||
741 | |||
742 | Each configuration file you | ||
743 | use must reside in the :term:`Build Directory` | ||
744 | ``conf/multiconfig`` directory (e.g. | ||
745 | build_directory\ ``/conf/multiconfig/configA.conf``). | ||
746 | |||
747 | For information on how to use ``BBMULTICONFIG`` in an environment | ||
748 | that supports building targets with multiple configurations, see the | ||
749 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building images for multiple targets using multiple configurations`" | ||
750 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
751 | |||
752 | :term:`BBPATH` | ||
753 | Used by BitBake to locate ``.bbclass`` and configuration files. This | ||
754 | variable is analogous to the ``PATH`` variable. | ||
755 | |||
756 | .. note:: | ||
757 | |||
758 | If you run BitBake from a directory outside of the | ||
759 | Build Directory | ||
760 | , you must be sure to set | ||
761 | BBPATH | ||
762 | to point to the Build Directory. Set the variable as you would any | ||
763 | environment variable and then run BitBake: | ||
764 | :: | ||
765 | |||
766 | $ BBPATH = "build_directory" | ||
767 | $ export BBPATH | ||
768 | $ bitbake target | ||
769 | |||
770 | |||
771 | :term:`BBSERVER` | ||
772 | If defined in the BitBake environment, ``BBSERVER`` points to the | ||
773 | BitBake remote server. | ||
774 | |||
775 | Use the following format to export the variable to the BitBake | ||
776 | environment: | ||
777 | :: | ||
778 | |||
779 | export BBSERVER=localhost:$port | ||
780 | |||
781 | By default, ``BBSERVER`` also appears in | ||
782 | :term:`bitbake:BB_HASHBASE_WHITELIST`. | ||
783 | Consequently, ``BBSERVER`` is excluded from checksum and dependency | ||
784 | data. | ||
785 | |||
786 | :term:`BINCONFIG` | ||
787 | When inheriting the | ||
788 | :ref:`binconfig-disabled <ref-classes-binconfig-disabled>` class, | ||
789 | this variable specifies binary configuration scripts to disable in | ||
790 | favor of using ``pkg-config`` to query the information. The | ||
791 | ``binconfig-disabled`` class will modify the specified scripts to | ||
792 | return an error so that calls to them can be easily found and | ||
793 | replaced. | ||
794 | |||
795 | To add multiple scripts, separate them by spaces. Here is an example | ||
796 | from the ``libpng`` recipe: | ||
797 | :: | ||
798 | |||
799 | BINCONFIG = "${bindir}/libpng-config ${bindir}/libpng16-config" | ||
800 | |||
801 | :term:`BINCONFIG_GLOB` | ||
802 | When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class, | ||
803 | this variable specifies a wildcard for configuration scripts that | ||
804 | need editing. The scripts are edited to correct any paths that have | ||
805 | been set up during compilation so that they are correct for use when | ||
806 | installed into the sysroot and called by the build processes of other | ||
807 | recipes. | ||
808 | |||
809 | .. note:: | ||
810 | |||
811 | The ``BINCONFIG_GLOB`` variable uses | ||
812 | `shell globbing <https://tldp.org/LDP/abs/html/globbingref.html>`__, | ||
813 | which is recognition and expansion of wildcards during pattern | ||
814 | matching. Shell globbing is very similar to | ||
815 | `fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__ | ||
816 | and `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__. | ||
817 | |||
818 | For more information on how this variable works, see | ||
819 | ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. | ||
820 | You can also find general | ||
821 | information on the class in the | ||
822 | ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section. | ||
823 | |||
824 | :term:`BP` | ||
825 | The base recipe name and version but without any special recipe name | ||
826 | suffix (i.e. ``-native``, ``lib64-``, and so forth). ``BP`` is | ||
827 | comprised of the following: | ||
828 | :: | ||
829 | |||
830 | ${BPN}-${PV} | ||
831 | |||
832 | :term:`BPN` | ||
833 | This variable is a version of the :term:`PN` variable with | ||
834 | common prefixes and suffixes removed, such as ``nativesdk-``, | ||
835 | ``-cross``, ``-native``, and multilib's ``lib64-`` and ``lib32-``. | ||
836 | The exact lists of prefixes and suffixes removed are specified by the | ||
837 | :term:`MLPREFIX` and | ||
838 | :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX` variables, | ||
839 | respectively. | ||
840 | |||
841 | :term:`BUGTRACKER` | ||
842 | Specifies a URL for an upstream bug tracking website for a recipe. | ||
843 | The OpenEmbedded build system does not use this variable. Rather, the | ||
844 | variable is a useful pointer in case a bug in the software being | ||
845 | built needs to be manually reported. | ||
846 | |||
847 | :term:`BUILD_ARCH` | ||
848 | Specifies the architecture of the build host (e.g. ``i686``). The | ||
849 | OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of ``BUILD_ARCH`` from the | ||
850 | machine name reported by the ``uname`` command. | ||
851 | |||
852 | :term:`BUILD_AS_ARCH` | ||
853 | Specifies the architecture-specific assembler flags for the build | ||
854 | host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_AS_ARCH`` is empty. | ||
855 | |||
856 | :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH` | ||
857 | Specifies the architecture-specific C compiler flags for the build | ||
858 | host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is empty. | ||
859 | |||
860 | :term:`BUILD_CCLD` | ||
861 | Specifies the linker command to be used for the build host when the C | ||
862 | compiler is being used as the linker. By default, ``BUILD_CCLD`` | ||
863 | points to GCC and passes as arguments the value of | ||
864 | :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming | ||
865 | ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set. | ||
866 | |||
867 | :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` | ||
868 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the | ||
869 | build host. When building in the ``-native`` context, | ||
870 | :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by | ||
871 | default. | ||
872 | |||
873 | :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS` | ||
874 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C preprocessor (i.e. to both the C | ||
875 | and the C++ compilers) when building for the build host. When | ||
876 | building in the ``-native`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` | ||
877 | is set to the value of this variable by default. | ||
878 | |||
879 | :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS` | ||
880 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the | ||
881 | build host. When building in the ``-native`` context, | ||
882 | :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable | ||
883 | by default. | ||
884 | |||
885 | :term:`BUILD_FC` | ||
886 | Specifies the Fortran compiler command for the build host. By | ||
887 | default, ``BUILD_FC`` points to Gfortran and passes as arguments the | ||
888 | value of :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming | ||
889 | ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set. | ||
890 | |||
891 | :term:`BUILD_LD` | ||
892 | Specifies the linker command for the build host. By default, | ||
893 | ``BUILD_LD`` points to the GNU linker (ld) and passes as arguments | ||
894 | the value of :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH`, assuming | ||
895 | ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is set. | ||
896 | |||
897 | :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH` | ||
898 | Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the build host. By | ||
899 | default, the value of ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is empty. | ||
900 | |||
901 | :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS` | ||
902 | Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the build | ||
903 | host. When building in the ``-native`` context, | ||
904 | :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable | ||
905 | by default. | ||
906 | |||
907 | :term:`BUILD_OPTIMIZATION` | ||
908 | Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when | ||
909 | building for the build host or the SDK. The flags are passed through | ||
910 | the :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` and | ||
911 | :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` default values. | ||
912 | |||
913 | The default value of the ``BUILD_OPTIMIZATION`` variable is "-O2 | ||
914 | -pipe". | ||
915 | |||
916 | :term:`BUILD_OS` | ||
917 | Specifies the operating system in use on the build host (e.g. | ||
918 | "linux"). The OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of | ||
919 | ``BUILD_OS`` from the OS reported by the ``uname`` command - the | ||
920 | first word, converted to lower-case characters. | ||
921 | |||
922 | :term:`BUILD_PREFIX` | ||
923 | The toolchain binary prefix used for native recipes. The OpenEmbedded | ||
924 | build system uses the ``BUILD_PREFIX`` value to set the | ||
925 | :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building for | ||
926 | ``native`` recipes. | ||
927 | |||
928 | :term:`BUILD_STRIP` | ||
929 | Specifies the command to be used to strip debugging symbols from | ||
930 | binaries produced for the build host. By default, ``BUILD_STRIP`` | ||
931 | points to | ||
932 | ``${``\ :term:`BUILD_PREFIX`\ ``}strip``. | ||
933 | |||
934 | :term:`BUILD_SYS` | ||
935 | Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating | ||
936 | system, to use when building for the build host (i.e. when building | ||
937 | ``native`` recipes). | ||
938 | |||
939 | The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based | ||
940 | on :term:`BUILD_ARCH`, | ||
941 | :term:`BUILD_VENDOR`, and | ||
942 | :term:`BUILD_OS`. You do not need to set the | ||
943 | ``BUILD_SYS`` variable yourself. | ||
944 | |||
945 | :term:`BUILD_VENDOR` | ||
946 | Specifies the vendor name to use when building for the build host. | ||
947 | The default value is an empty string (""). | ||
948 | |||
949 | :term:`BUILDDIR` | ||
950 | Points to the location of the :term:`Build Directory`. | ||
951 | You can define this directory indirectly through the | ||
952 | :ref:`structure-core-script` script by passing in a Build | ||
953 | Directory path when you run the script. If you run the script and do | ||
954 | not provide a Build Directory path, the ``BUILDDIR`` defaults to | ||
955 | ``build`` in the current directory. | ||
956 | |||
957 | :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` | ||
958 | When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` | ||
959 | class, this variable specifies whether or not to commit the build | ||
960 | history output in a local Git repository. If set to "1", this local | ||
961 | repository will be maintained automatically by the ``buildhistory`` | ||
962 | class and a commit will be created on every build for changes to each | ||
963 | top-level subdirectory of the build history output (images, packages, | ||
964 | and sdk). If you want to track changes to build history over time, | ||
965 | you should set this value to "1". | ||
966 | |||
967 | By default, the ``buildhistory`` class does not commit the build | ||
968 | history output in a local Git repository: | ||
969 | :: | ||
970 | |||
971 | BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT ?= "0" | ||
972 | |||
973 | :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR` | ||
974 | When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` | ||
975 | class, this variable specifies the author to use for each Git commit. | ||
976 | In order for the ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable to work, the | ||
977 | :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` variable must | ||
978 | be set to "1". | ||
979 | |||
980 | Git requires that the value you provide for the | ||
981 | ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable takes the form of "name | ||
982 | email@host". Providing an email address or host that is not valid | ||
983 | does not produce an error. | ||
984 | |||
985 | By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows: | ||
986 | :: | ||
987 | |||
988 | BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR ?= "buildhistory <buildhistory@${DISTRO}>" | ||
989 | |||
990 | :term:`BUILDHISTORY_DIR` | ||
991 | When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` | ||
992 | class, this variable specifies the directory in which build history | ||
993 | information is kept. For more information on how the variable works, | ||
994 | see the ``buildhistory.class``. | ||
995 | |||
996 | By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the directory as follows: | ||
997 | :: | ||
998 | |||
999 | BUILDHISTORY_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/buildhistory" | ||
1000 | |||
1001 | :term:`BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES` | ||
1002 | When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` | ||
1003 | class, this variable specifies the build history features to be | ||
1004 | enabled. For more information on how build history works, see the | ||
1005 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:maintaining build output quality`" | ||
1006 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
1007 | |||
1008 | You can specify these features in the form of a space-separated list: | ||
1009 | |||
1010 | - *image:* Analysis of the contents of images, which includes the | ||
1011 | list of installed packages among other things. | ||
1012 | |||
1013 | - *package:* Analysis of the contents of individual packages. | ||
1014 | |||
1015 | - *sdk:* Analysis of the contents of the software development kit | ||
1016 | (SDK). | ||
1017 | |||
1018 | - *task:* Save output file signatures for | ||
1019 | :ref:`shared state <overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache>` | ||
1020 | (sstate) tasks. | ||
1021 | This saves one file per task and lists the SHA-256 checksums for | ||
1022 | each file staged (i.e. the output of the task). | ||
1023 | |||
1024 | By default, the ``buildhistory`` class enables the following | ||
1025 | features: | ||
1026 | :: | ||
1027 | |||
1028 | BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES ?= "image package sdk" | ||
1029 | |||
1030 | :term:`BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES` | ||
1031 | When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` | ||
1032 | class, this variable specifies a list of paths to files copied from | ||
1033 | the image contents into the build history directory under an | ||
1034 | "image-files" directory in the directory for the image, so that you | ||
1035 | can track the contents of each file. The default is to copy | ||
1036 | ``/etc/passwd`` and ``/etc/group``, which allows you to monitor for | ||
1037 | changes in user and group entries. You can modify the list to include | ||
1038 | any file. Specifying an invalid path does not produce an error. | ||
1039 | Consequently, you can include files that might not always be present. | ||
1040 | |||
1041 | By default, the ``buildhistory`` class provides paths to the | ||
1042 | following files: | ||
1043 | :: | ||
1044 | |||
1045 | BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES ?= "/etc/passwd /etc/group" | ||
1046 | |||
1047 | :term:`BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO` | ||
1048 | When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>` | ||
1049 | class, this variable optionally specifies a remote repository to | ||
1050 | which build history pushes Git changes. In order for | ||
1051 | ``BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO`` to work, | ||
1052 | :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` must be set to | ||
1053 | "1". | ||
1054 | |||
1055 | The repository should correspond to a remote address that specifies a | ||
1056 | repository as understood by Git, or alternatively to a remote name | ||
1057 | that you have set up manually using ``git remote`` within the local | ||
1058 | repository. | ||
1059 | |||
1060 | By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows: | ||
1061 | :: | ||
1062 | |||
1063 | BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO ?= "" | ||
1064 | |||
1065 | :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` | ||
1066 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the | ||
1067 | SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, | ||
1068 | :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by | ||
1069 | default. | ||
1070 | |||
1071 | :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS` | ||
1072 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the | ||
1073 | C and the C++ compilers) when building for the SDK. When building in | ||
1074 | the ``nativesdk-`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set | ||
1075 | to the value of this variable by default. | ||
1076 | |||
1077 | :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS` | ||
1078 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the | ||
1079 | SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, | ||
1080 | :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable | ||
1081 | by default. | ||
1082 | |||
1083 | :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS` | ||
1084 | Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the SDK. | ||
1085 | When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context, | ||
1086 | :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable | ||
1087 | by default. | ||
1088 | |||
1089 | :term:`BUILDSTATS_BASE` | ||
1090 | Points to the location of the directory that holds build statistics | ||
1091 | when you use and enable the | ||
1092 | :ref:`buildstats <ref-classes-buildstats>` class. The | ||
1093 | ``BUILDSTATS_BASE`` directory defaults to | ||
1094 | ``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/buildstats/``. | ||
1095 | |||
1096 | :term:`BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID` | ||
1097 | For the BusyBox recipe, specifies whether to split the output | ||
1098 | executable file into two parts: one for features that require | ||
1099 | ``setuid root``, and one for the remaining features (i.e. those that | ||
1100 | do not require ``setuid root``). | ||
1101 | |||
1102 | The ``BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID`` variable defaults to "1", which results in | ||
1103 | splitting the output executable file. Set the variable to "0" to get | ||
1104 | a single output executable file. | ||
1105 | |||
1106 | :term:`CACHE` | ||
1107 | Specifies the directory BitBake uses to store a cache of the | ||
1108 | :term:`Metadata` so it does not need to be parsed every time | ||
1109 | BitBake is started. | ||
1110 | |||
1111 | :term:`CC` | ||
1112 | The minimal command and arguments used to run the C compiler. | ||
1113 | |||
1114 | :term:`CFLAGS` | ||
1115 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler. This variable is | ||
1116 | exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the | ||
1117 | software being built during the compilation step. | ||
1118 | |||
1119 | Default initialization for ``CFLAGS`` varies depending on what is | ||
1120 | being built: | ||
1121 | |||
1122 | - :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` when building for the | ||
1123 | target | ||
1124 | |||
1125 | - :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` when building for the | ||
1126 | build host (i.e. ``-native``) | ||
1127 | |||
1128 | - :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` when building for | ||
1129 | an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) | ||
1130 | |||
1131 | :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE` | ||
1132 | An internal variable specifying the special class override that | ||
1133 | should currently apply (e.g. "class-target", "class-native", and so | ||
1134 | forth). The classes that use this variable (e.g. | ||
1135 | :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>`, | ||
1136 | :ref:`nativesdk <ref-classes-nativesdk>`, and so forth) set the | ||
1137 | variable to appropriate values. | ||
1138 | |||
1139 | .. note:: | ||
1140 | |||
1141 | ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` gets its default "class-target" value from the | ||
1142 | ``bitbake.conf`` file. | ||
1143 | |||
1144 | As an example, the following override allows you to install extra | ||
1145 | files, but only when building for the target: | ||
1146 | :: | ||
1147 | |||
1148 | do_install_append_class-target() { | ||
1149 | install my-extra-file ${D}${sysconfdir} | ||
1150 | } | ||
1151 | |||
1152 | Here is an example where ``FOO`` is set to | ||
1153 | "native" when building for the build host, and to "other" when not | ||
1154 | building for the build host: | ||
1155 | :: | ||
1156 | |||
1157 | FOO_class-native = "native" | ||
1158 | FOO = "other" | ||
1159 | |||
1160 | The underlying mechanism behind ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` is simply | ||
1161 | that it is included in the default value of | ||
1162 | :term:`OVERRIDES`. | ||
1163 | |||
1164 | :term:`CLEANBROKEN` | ||
1165 | If set to "1" within a recipe, ``CLEANBROKEN`` specifies that the | ||
1166 | ``make clean`` command does not work for the software being built. | ||
1167 | Consequently, the OpenEmbedded build system will not try to run | ||
1168 | ``make clean`` during the :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` | ||
1169 | task, which is the default behavior. | ||
1170 | |||
1171 | :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES` | ||
1172 | Provides a list of hardware features that are enabled in both | ||
1173 | :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` and | ||
1174 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`. This select list of | ||
1175 | features contains features that make sense to be controlled both at | ||
1176 | the machine and distribution configuration level. For example, the | ||
1177 | "bluetooth" feature requires hardware support but should also be | ||
1178 | optional at the distribution level, in case the hardware supports | ||
1179 | Bluetooth but you do not ever intend to use it. | ||
1180 | |||
1181 | :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR` | ||
1182 | Points to ``meta/files/common-licenses`` in the | ||
1183 | :term:`Source Directory`, which is where generic license | ||
1184 | files reside. | ||
1185 | |||
1186 | :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` | ||
1187 | A regular expression that resolves to one or more hosts (when the | ||
1188 | recipe is native) or one or more targets (when the recipe is | ||
1189 | non-native) with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression | ||
1190 | is matched against :term:`HOST_SYS`. You can use the | ||
1191 | variable to stop recipes from being built for classes of systems with | ||
1192 | which the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is | ||
1193 | particularly useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase | ||
1194 | parsing speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not | ||
1195 | compatible with the current system. | ||
1196 | |||
1197 | :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE` | ||
1198 | A regular expression that resolves to one or more target machines | ||
1199 | with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression is matched | ||
1200 | against :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`. You can use | ||
1201 | the variable to stop recipes from being built for machines with which | ||
1202 | the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is particularly | ||
1203 | useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase parsing | ||
1204 | speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not compatible | ||
1205 | with the current machine. | ||
1206 | |||
1207 | :term:`COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB` | ||
1208 | Defines wildcards to match when installing a list of complementary | ||
1209 | packages for all the packages explicitly (or implicitly) installed in | ||
1210 | an image. | ||
1211 | |||
1212 | .. note:: | ||
1213 | |||
1214 | The ``COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB`` variable uses Unix filename pattern matching | ||
1215 | (`fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__), | ||
1216 | which is similar to the Unix style pathname pattern expansion | ||
1217 | (`glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__). | ||
1218 | |||
1219 | The resulting list of complementary packages is associated with an | ||
1220 | item that can be added to | ||
1221 | :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. An example usage of | ||
1222 | this is the "dev-pkgs" item that when added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` | ||
1223 | will install -dev packages (containing headers and other development | ||
1224 | files) for every package in the image. | ||
1225 | |||
1226 | To add a new feature item pointing to a wildcard, use a variable flag | ||
1227 | to specify the feature item name and use the value to specify the | ||
1228 | wildcard. Here is an example: | ||
1229 | :: | ||
1230 | |||
1231 | COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB[dev-pkgs] = '*-dev' | ||
1232 | |||
1233 | :term:`COMPONENTS_DIR` | ||
1234 | Stores sysroot components for each recipe. The OpenEmbedded build | ||
1235 | system uses ``COMPONENTS_DIR`` when constructing recipe-specific | ||
1236 | sysroots for other recipes. | ||
1237 | |||
1238 | The default is | ||
1239 | "``${``\ :term:`STAGING_DIR`\ ``}-components``." | ||
1240 | (i.e. | ||
1241 | "``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/sysroots-components``"). | ||
1242 | |||
1243 | :term:`CONF_VERSION` | ||
1244 | Tracks the version of the local configuration file (i.e. | ||
1245 | ``local.conf``). The value for ``CONF_VERSION`` increments each time | ||
1246 | ``build/conf/`` compatibility changes. | ||
1247 | |||
1248 | :term:`CONFFILES` | ||
1249 | Identifies editable or configurable files that are part of a package. | ||
1250 | If the Package Management System (PMS) is being used to update | ||
1251 | packages on the target system, it is possible that configuration | ||
1252 | files you have changed after the original installation and that you | ||
1253 | now want to remain unchanged are overwritten. In other words, | ||
1254 | editable files might exist in the package that you do not want reset | ||
1255 | as part of the package update process. You can use the ``CONFFILES`` | ||
1256 | variable to list the files in the package that you wish to prevent | ||
1257 | the PMS from overwriting during this update process. | ||
1258 | |||
1259 | To use the ``CONFFILES`` variable, provide a package name override | ||
1260 | that identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a | ||
1261 | space-separated list of files. Here is an example: | ||
1262 | :: | ||
1263 | |||
1264 | CONFFILES_${PN} += "${sysconfdir}/file1 \ | ||
1265 | ${sysconfdir}/file2 ${sysconfdir}/file3" | ||
1266 | |||
1267 | A relationship exists between the ``CONFFILES`` and ``FILES`` | ||
1268 | variables. The files listed within ``CONFFILES`` must be a subset of | ||
1269 | the files listed within ``FILES``. Because the configuration files | ||
1270 | you provide with ``CONFFILES`` are simply being identified so that | ||
1271 | the PMS will not overwrite them, it makes sense that the files must | ||
1272 | already be included as part of the package through the ``FILES`` | ||
1273 | variable. | ||
1274 | |||
1275 | .. note:: | ||
1276 | |||
1277 | When specifying paths as part of the ``CONFFILES`` variable, it is | ||
1278 | good practice to use appropriate path variables. | ||
1279 | For example, ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc`` or ``${bindir}`` | ||
1280 | rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these variables at | ||
1281 | the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in the | ||
1282 | :term:`Source Directory`. | ||
1283 | |||
1284 | :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` | ||
1285 | Identifies the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) source files. The | ||
1286 | OpenEmbedded build system receives and uses this kernel Kconfig | ||
1287 | variable as an environment variable. By default, the variable is set | ||
1288 | to null (""). | ||
1289 | |||
1290 | The ``CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE`` can be either a single cpio archive | ||
1291 | with a ``.cpio`` suffix or a space-separated list of directories and | ||
1292 | files for building the initramfs image. A cpio archive should contain | ||
1293 | a filesystem archive to be used as an initramfs image. Directories | ||
1294 | should contain a filesystem layout to be included in the initramfs | ||
1295 | image. Files should contain entries according to the format described | ||
1296 | by the ``usr/gen_init_cpio`` program in the kernel tree. | ||
1297 | |||
1298 | If you specify multiple directories and files, the initramfs image | ||
1299 | will be the aggregate of all of them. | ||
1300 | |||
1301 | For information on creating an initramfs, see the | ||
1302 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section | ||
1303 | in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
1304 | |||
1305 | :term:`CONFIG_SITE` | ||
1306 | A list of files that contains ``autoconf`` test results relevant to | ||
1307 | the current build. This variable is used by the Autotools utilities | ||
1308 | when running ``configure``. | ||
1309 | |||
1310 | :term:`CONFIGURE_FLAGS` | ||
1311 | The minimal arguments for GNU configure. | ||
1312 | |||
1313 | :term:`CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES` | ||
1314 | When inheriting the | ||
1315 | :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` | ||
1316 | class, this variable identifies distribution features that would be | ||
1317 | in conflict should the recipe be built. In other words, if the | ||
1318 | ``CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that also | ||
1319 | appears in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then | ||
1320 | the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build | ||
1321 | the recipe then an error will be triggered. | ||
1322 | |||
1323 | :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` | ||
1324 | A space-separated list of licenses to exclude from the source | ||
1325 | archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In | ||
1326 | other words, if a license in a recipe's | ||
1327 | :term:`LICENSE` value is in the value of | ||
1328 | ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE``, then its source is not archived by the | ||
1329 | class. | ||
1330 | |||
1331 | .. note:: | ||
1332 | |||
1333 | The ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` variable takes precedence over the | ||
1334 | :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` variable. | ||
1335 | |||
1336 | The default value, which is "CLOSED Proprietary", for | ||
1337 | ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` is set by the | ||
1338 | :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which | ||
1339 | is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. | ||
1340 | |||
1341 | :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` | ||
1342 | A space-separated list of licenses to include in the source archived | ||
1343 | by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In other | ||
1344 | words, if a license in a recipe's :term:`LICENSE` | ||
1345 | value is in the value of ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE``, then its | ||
1346 | source is archived by the class. | ||
1347 | |||
1348 | The default value is set by the | ||
1349 | :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which | ||
1350 | is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. The default value includes | ||
1351 | "GPL*", "LGPL*", and "AGPL*". | ||
1352 | |||
1353 | :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE` | ||
1354 | A list of recipes to exclude in the source archived by the | ||
1355 | :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The | ||
1356 | ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and | ||
1357 | exclusion caused through the | ||
1358 | :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and | ||
1359 | :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` | ||
1360 | variables, respectively. | ||
1361 | |||
1362 | The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly exclude | ||
1363 | any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` is set by the | ||
1364 | :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which | ||
1365 | is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. | ||
1366 | |||
1367 | :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE` | ||
1368 | A list of recipes to include in the source archived by the | ||
1369 | :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The | ||
1370 | ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and | ||
1371 | exclusion caused through the | ||
1372 | :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and | ||
1373 | :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE` | ||
1374 | variables, respectively. | ||
1375 | |||
1376 | The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly include | ||
1377 | any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` is set by the | ||
1378 | :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which | ||
1379 | is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. | ||
1380 | |||
1381 | :term:`COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES` | ||
1382 | A space-separated list of recipe types to include in the source | ||
1383 | archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. | ||
1384 | Recipe types are ``target``, ``native``, ``nativesdk``, ``cross``, | ||
1385 | ``crosssdk``, and ``cross-canadian``. | ||
1386 | |||
1387 | The default value, which is "target*", for ``COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES`` | ||
1388 | is set by the :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` | ||
1389 | class, which is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. | ||
1390 | |||
1391 | :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` | ||
1392 | If set to "1" along with the | ||
1393 | :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, the | ||
1394 | OpenEmbedded build system copies into the image the license files, | ||
1395 | which are located in ``/usr/share/common-licenses``, for each | ||
1396 | package. The license files are placed in directories within the image | ||
1397 | itself during build time. | ||
1398 | |||
1399 | .. note:: | ||
1400 | |||
1401 | The ``COPY_LIC_DIRS`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for | ||
1402 | newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for | ||
1403 | read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the | ||
1404 | :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information. | ||
1405 | You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" | ||
1406 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for | ||
1407 | information on providing license text. | ||
1408 | |||
1409 | :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` | ||
1410 | If set to "1", the OpenEmbedded build system copies the license | ||
1411 | manifest for the image to | ||
1412 | ``/usr/share/common-licenses/license.manifest`` within the image | ||
1413 | itself during build time. | ||
1414 | |||
1415 | .. note:: | ||
1416 | |||
1417 | The ``COPY_LIC_MANIFEST`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for | ||
1418 | newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for | ||
1419 | read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the | ||
1420 | :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information. | ||
1421 | You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" | ||
1422 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for | ||
1423 | information on providing license text. | ||
1424 | |||
1425 | :term:`CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL` | ||
1426 | Specifies the list of packages to be added to the image. You should | ||
1427 | only set this variable in the ``local.conf`` configuration file found | ||
1428 | in the :term:`Build Directory`. | ||
1429 | |||
1430 | This variable replaces ``POKY_EXTRA_INSTALL``, which is no longer | ||
1431 | supported. | ||
1432 | |||
1433 | :term:`COREBASE` | ||
1434 | Specifies the parent directory of the OpenEmbedded-Core Metadata | ||
1435 | layer (i.e. ``meta``). | ||
1436 | |||
1437 | It is an important distinction that ``COREBASE`` points to the parent | ||
1438 | of this layer and not the layer itself. Consider an example where you | ||
1439 | have cloned the Poky Git repository and retained the ``poky`` name | ||
1440 | for your local copy of the repository. In this case, ``COREBASE`` | ||
1441 | points to the ``poky`` folder because it is the parent directory of | ||
1442 | the ``poky/meta`` layer. | ||
1443 | |||
1444 | :term:`COREBASE_FILES` | ||
1445 | Lists files from the :term:`COREBASE` directory that | ||
1446 | should be copied other than the layers listed in the | ||
1447 | ``bblayers.conf`` file. The ``COREBASE_FILES`` variable exists for | ||
1448 | the purpose of copying metadata from the OpenEmbedded build system | ||
1449 | into the extensible SDK. | ||
1450 | |||
1451 | Explicitly listing files in ``COREBASE`` is needed because it | ||
1452 | typically contains build directories and other files that should not | ||
1453 | normally be copied into the extensible SDK. Consequently, the value | ||
1454 | of ``COREBASE_FILES`` is used in order to only copy the files that | ||
1455 | are actually needed. | ||
1456 | |||
1457 | :term:`CPP` | ||
1458 | The minimal command and arguments used to run the C preprocessor. | ||
1459 | |||
1460 | :term:`CPPFLAGS` | ||
1461 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the | ||
1462 | C and the C++ compilers). This variable is exported to an environment | ||
1463 | variable and thus made visible to the software being built during the | ||
1464 | compilation step. | ||
1465 | |||
1466 | Default initialization for ``CPPFLAGS`` varies depending on what is | ||
1467 | being built: | ||
1468 | |||
1469 | - :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS` when building for | ||
1470 | the target | ||
1471 | |||
1472 | - :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS` when building for the | ||
1473 | build host (i.e. ``-native``) | ||
1474 | |||
1475 | - :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS` when building | ||
1476 | for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) | ||
1477 | |||
1478 | :term:`CROSS_COMPILE` | ||
1479 | The toolchain binary prefix for the target tools. The | ||
1480 | ``CROSS_COMPILE`` variable is the same as the | ||
1481 | :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` variable. | ||
1482 | |||
1483 | .. note:: | ||
1484 | |||
1485 | The OpenEmbedded build system sets the ``CROSS_COMPILE`` | ||
1486 | variable only in certain contexts (e.g. when building for kernel | ||
1487 | and kernel module recipes). | ||
1488 | |||
1489 | :term:`CVSDIR` | ||
1490 | The directory in which files checked out under the CVS system are | ||
1491 | stored. | ||
1492 | |||
1493 | :term:`CXX` | ||
1494 | The minimal command and arguments used to run the C++ compiler. | ||
1495 | |||
1496 | :term:`CXXFLAGS` | ||
1497 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler. This variable is | ||
1498 | exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the | ||
1499 | software being built during the compilation step. | ||
1500 | |||
1501 | Default initialization for ``CXXFLAGS`` varies depending on what is | ||
1502 | being built: | ||
1503 | |||
1504 | - :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS` when building for | ||
1505 | the target | ||
1506 | |||
1507 | - :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS` when building for the | ||
1508 | build host (i.e. ``-native``) | ||
1509 | |||
1510 | - :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS` when building | ||
1511 | for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) | ||
1512 | |||
1513 | :term:`D` | ||
1514 | The destination directory. The location in the :term:`Build Directory` | ||
1515 | where components are installed by the | ||
1516 | :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task. This location defaults | ||
1517 | to: | ||
1518 | :: | ||
1519 | |||
1520 | ${WORKDIR}/image | ||
1521 | |||
1522 | .. note:: | ||
1523 | |||
1524 | Tasks that read from or write to this directory should run under | ||
1525 | :ref:`fakeroot <overview-manual/concepts:fakeroot and pseudo>`. | ||
1526 | |||
1527 | :term:`DATE` | ||
1528 | The date the build was started. Dates appear using the year, month, | ||
1529 | and day (YMD) format (e.g. "20150209" for February 9th, 2015). | ||
1530 | |||
1531 | :term:`DATETIME` | ||
1532 | The date and time on which the current build started. The format is | ||
1533 | suitable for timestamps. | ||
1534 | |||
1535 | :term:`DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME` | ||
1536 | When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, | ||
1537 | which is the default behavior, ``DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME`` specifies a | ||
1538 | particular package should not be renamed according to Debian library | ||
1539 | package naming. You must use the package name as an override when you | ||
1540 | set this variable. Here is an example from the ``fontconfig`` recipe: | ||
1541 | :: | ||
1542 | |||
1543 | DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME_fontconfig-utils = "1" | ||
1544 | |||
1545 | :term:`DEBIANNAME` | ||
1546 | When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited, | ||
1547 | which is the default behavior, ``DEBIANNAME`` allows you to override | ||
1548 | the library name for an individual package. Overriding the library | ||
1549 | name in these cases is rare. You must use the package name as an | ||
1550 | override when you set this variable. Here is an example from the | ||
1551 | ``dbus`` recipe: | ||
1552 | :: | ||
1553 | |||
1554 | DEBIANNAME_${PN} = "dbus-1" | ||
1555 | |||
1556 | :term:`DEBUG_BUILD` | ||
1557 | Specifies to build packages with debugging information. This | ||
1558 | influences the value of the ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable. | ||
1559 | |||
1560 | :term:`DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION` | ||
1561 | The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when | ||
1562 | compiling a system for debugging. This variable defaults to "-O | ||
1563 | -fno-omit-frame-pointer ${DEBUG_FLAGS} -pipe". | ||
1564 | |||
1565 | :term:`DEFAULT_PREFERENCE` | ||
1566 | Specifies a weak bias for recipe selection priority. | ||
1567 | |||
1568 | The most common usage of this is variable is to set it to "-1" within | ||
1569 | a recipe for a development version of a piece of software. Using the | ||
1570 | variable in this way causes the stable version of the recipe to build | ||
1571 | by default in the absence of ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` being used to | ||
1572 | build the development version. | ||
1573 | |||
1574 | .. note:: | ||
1575 | |||
1576 | The bias provided by ``DEFAULT_PREFERENCE`` is weak and is overridden | ||
1577 | by :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` if that variable is different between two | ||
1578 | layers that contain different versions of the same recipe. | ||
1579 | |||
1580 | :term:`DEFAULTTUNE` | ||
1581 | The default CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) tunings (i.e. | ||
1582 | the "tune") used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The | ||
1583 | ``DEFAULTTUNE`` helps define | ||
1584 | :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. | ||
1585 | |||
1586 | The default tune is either implicitly or explicitly set by the | ||
1587 | machine (:term:`MACHINE`). However, you can override | ||
1588 | the setting using available tunes as defined with | ||
1589 | :term:`AVAILTUNES`. | ||
1590 | |||
1591 | :term:`DEPENDS` | ||
1592 | Lists a recipe's build-time dependencies. These are dependencies on | ||
1593 | other recipes whose contents (e.g. headers and shared libraries) are | ||
1594 | needed by the recipe at build time. | ||
1595 | |||
1596 | As an example, consider a recipe ``foo`` that contains the following | ||
1597 | assignment: | ||
1598 | :: | ||
1599 | |||
1600 | DEPENDS = "bar" | ||
1601 | |||
1602 | The practical effect of the previous | ||
1603 | assignment is that all files installed by bar will be available in | ||
1604 | the appropriate staging sysroot, given by the | ||
1605 | :term:`STAGING_DIR* <STAGING_DIR>` variables, by the time the | ||
1606 | :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for ``foo`` runs. | ||
1607 | This mechanism is implemented by having ``do_configure`` depend on | ||
1608 | the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task of | ||
1609 | each recipe listed in ``DEPENDS``, through a | ||
1610 | ``[``\ :ref:`deptask <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags>`\ ``]`` | ||
1611 | declaration in the :ref:`base <ref-classes-base>` class. | ||
1612 | |||
1613 | .. note:: | ||
1614 | |||
1615 | It seldom is necessary to reference, for example, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` | ||
1616 | explicitly. The standard classes and build-related variables are | ||
1617 | configured to automatically use the appropriate staging sysroots. | ||
1618 | |||
1619 | As another example, ``DEPENDS`` can also be used to add utilities | ||
1620 | that run on the build machine during the build. For example, a recipe | ||
1621 | that makes use of a code generator built by the recipe ``codegen`` | ||
1622 | might have the following: | ||
1623 | :: | ||
1624 | |||
1625 | DEPENDS = "codegen-native" | ||
1626 | |||
1627 | For more | ||
1628 | information, see the :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>` class and | ||
1629 | the :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH` variable. | ||
1630 | |||
1631 | .. note:: | ||
1632 | |||
1633 | - ``DEPENDS`` is a list of recipe names. Or, to be more precise, | ||
1634 | it is a list of :term:`PROVIDES` names, which | ||
1635 | usually match recipe names. Putting a package name such as | ||
1636 | "foo-dev" in ``DEPENDS`` does not make sense. Use "foo" | ||
1637 | instead, as this will put files from all the packages that make | ||
1638 | up ``foo``, which includes those from ``foo-dev``, into the | ||
1639 | sysroot. | ||
1640 | |||
1641 | - One recipe having another recipe in ``DEPENDS`` does not by | ||
1642 | itself add any runtime dependencies between the packages | ||
1643 | produced by the two recipes. However, as explained in the | ||
1644 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" | ||
1645 | section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, | ||
1646 | runtime dependencies will often be added automatically, meaning | ||
1647 | ``DEPENDS`` alone is sufficient for most recipes. | ||
1648 | |||
1649 | - Counterintuitively, ``DEPENDS`` is often necessary even for | ||
1650 | recipes that install precompiled components. For example, if | ||
1651 | ``libfoo`` is a precompiled library that links against | ||
1652 | ``libbar``, then linking against ``libfoo`` requires both | ||
1653 | ``libfoo`` and ``libbar`` to be available in the sysroot. | ||
1654 | Without a ``DEPENDS`` from the recipe that installs ``libfoo`` | ||
1655 | to the recipe that installs ``libbar``, other recipes might | ||
1656 | fail to link against ``libfoo``. | ||
1657 | |||
1658 | For information on runtime dependencies, see the | ||
1659 | :term:`RDEPENDS` variable. You can also see the | ||
1660 | ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and | ||
1661 | ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the | ||
1662 | BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and | ||
1663 | dependencies. | ||
1664 | |||
1665 | :term:`DEPLOY_DIR` | ||
1666 | Points to the general area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to | ||
1667 | place images, packages, SDKs, and other output files that are ready | ||
1668 | to be used outside of the build system. By default, this directory | ||
1669 | resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as | ||
1670 | ``${TMPDIR}/deploy``. | ||
1671 | |||
1672 | For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see | ||
1673 | ":ref:`ref-manual/ref-structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section. | ||
1674 | For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the | ||
1675 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`", | ||
1676 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`", and | ||
1677 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections all in the | ||
1678 | Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. | ||
1679 | |||
1680 | :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_DEB` | ||
1681 | Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place | ||
1682 | Debian packages that are ready to be used outside of the build | ||
1683 | system. This variable applies only when | ||
1684 | :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains | ||
1685 | "package_deb". | ||
1686 | |||
1687 | The BitBake configuration file initially defines the | ||
1688 | ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable as a sub-folder of | ||
1689 | :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: | ||
1690 | :: | ||
1691 | |||
1692 | DEPLOY_DIR_DEB = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/deb" | ||
1693 | |||
1694 | The :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>` class uses the | ||
1695 | ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable to make sure the | ||
1696 | :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_deb` task | ||
1697 | writes Debian packages into the appropriate folder. For more | ||
1698 | information on how packaging works, see the | ||
1699 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section | ||
1700 | in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. | ||
1701 | |||
1702 | :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` | ||
1703 | Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place | ||
1704 | images and other associated output files that are ready to be | ||
1705 | deployed onto the target machine. The directory is machine-specific | ||
1706 | as it contains the ``${MACHINE}`` name. By default, this directory | ||
1707 | resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as | ||
1708 | ``${DEPLOY_DIR}/images/${MACHINE}/``. | ||
1709 | |||
1710 | For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see | ||
1711 | ":ref:`ref-manual/ref-structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section. | ||
1712 | For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the | ||
1713 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`" and | ||
1714 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections both in | ||
1715 | the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. | ||
1716 | |||
1717 | :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IPK` | ||
1718 | Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place | ||
1719 | IPK packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system. | ||
1720 | This variable applies only when | ||
1721 | :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains | ||
1722 | "package_ipk". | ||
1723 | |||
1724 | The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a | ||
1725 | sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: | ||
1726 | :: | ||
1727 | |||
1728 | DEPLOY_DIR_IPK = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/ipk" | ||
1729 | |||
1730 | The :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>` class uses the | ||
1731 | ``DEPLOY_DIR_IPK`` variable to make sure the | ||
1732 | :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_ipk` task | ||
1733 | writes IPK packages into the appropriate folder. For more information | ||
1734 | on how packaging works, see the | ||
1735 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section | ||
1736 | in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. | ||
1737 | |||
1738 | :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_RPM` | ||
1739 | Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place | ||
1740 | RPM packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system. | ||
1741 | This variable applies only when | ||
1742 | :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains | ||
1743 | "package_rpm". | ||
1744 | |||
1745 | The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a | ||
1746 | sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: | ||
1747 | :: | ||
1748 | |||
1749 | DEPLOY_DIR_RPM = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/rpm" | ||
1750 | |||
1751 | The :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>` class uses the | ||
1752 | ``DEPLOY_DIR_RPM`` variable to make sure the | ||
1753 | :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_rpm` task | ||
1754 | writes RPM packages into the appropriate folder. For more information | ||
1755 | on how packaging works, see the | ||
1756 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section | ||
1757 | in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. | ||
1758 | |||
1759 | :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_TAR` | ||
1760 | Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place | ||
1761 | tarballs that are ready to be used outside of the build system. This | ||
1762 | variable applies only when | ||
1763 | :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains | ||
1764 | "package_tar". | ||
1765 | |||
1766 | The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a | ||
1767 | sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`: | ||
1768 | :: | ||
1769 | |||
1770 | DEPLOY_DIR_TAR = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/tar" | ||
1771 | |||
1772 | The :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class uses the | ||
1773 | ``DEPLOY_DIR_TAR`` variable to make sure the | ||
1774 | :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_tar` task | ||
1775 | writes TAR packages into the appropriate folder. For more information | ||
1776 | on how packaging works, see the | ||
1777 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section | ||
1778 | in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. | ||
1779 | |||
1780 | :term:`DEPLOYDIR` | ||
1781 | When inheriting the :ref:`deploy <ref-classes-deploy>` class, the | ||
1782 | ``DEPLOYDIR`` points to a temporary work area for deployed files that | ||
1783 | is set in the ``deploy`` class as follows: | ||
1784 | :: | ||
1785 | |||
1786 | DEPLOYDIR = "${WORKDIR}/deploy-${PN}" | ||
1787 | |||
1788 | Recipes inheriting the ``deploy`` class should copy files to be | ||
1789 | deployed into ``DEPLOYDIR``, and the class will take care of copying | ||
1790 | them into :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` | ||
1791 | afterwards. | ||
1792 | |||
1793 | :term:`DESCRIPTION` | ||
1794 | The package description used by package managers. If not set, | ||
1795 | ``DESCRIPTION`` takes the value of the :term:`SUMMARY` | ||
1796 | variable. | ||
1797 | |||
1798 | :term:`DISTRO` | ||
1799 | The short name of the distribution. For information on the long name | ||
1800 | of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO_NAME` | ||
1801 | variable. | ||
1802 | |||
1803 | The ``DISTRO`` variable corresponds to a distribution configuration | ||
1804 | file whose root name is the same as the variable's argument and whose | ||
1805 | filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the distribution | ||
1806 | configuration file for the Poky distribution is named ``poky.conf`` | ||
1807 | and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory of the | ||
1808 | :term:`Source Directory`. | ||
1809 | |||
1810 | Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO`` variable is set as | ||
1811 | follows: | ||
1812 | :: | ||
1813 | |||
1814 | DISTRO = "poky" | ||
1815 | |||
1816 | Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro`` | ||
1817 | directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the | ||
1818 | distribution configuration. The value for ``DISTRO`` must not contain | ||
1819 | spaces, and is typically all lower-case. | ||
1820 | |||
1821 | .. note:: | ||
1822 | |||
1823 | If the ``DISTRO`` variable is blank, a set of default configurations | ||
1824 | are used, which are specified within | ||
1825 | ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory. | ||
1826 | |||
1827 | :term:`DISTRO_CODENAME` | ||
1828 | Specifies a codename for the distribution being built. | ||
1829 | |||
1830 | :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` | ||
1831 | Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images. | ||
1832 | This variable takes affect through ``packagegroup-base`` so the | ||
1833 | variable only really applies to the more full-featured images that | ||
1834 | include ``packagegroup-base``. You can use this variable to keep | ||
1835 | distro policy out of generic images. As with all other distro | ||
1836 | variables, you set this variable in the distro ``.conf`` file. | ||
1837 | |||
1838 | :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` | ||
1839 | Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images if | ||
1840 | the packages exist. The packages might not exist or be empty (e.g. | ||
1841 | kernel modules). The list of packages are automatically installed but | ||
1842 | you can remove them. | ||
1843 | |||
1844 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` | ||
1845 | The software support you want in your distribution for various | ||
1846 | features. You define your distribution features in the distribution | ||
1847 | configuration file. | ||
1848 | |||
1849 | In most cases, the presence or absence of a feature in | ||
1850 | ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` is translated to the appropriate option supplied | ||
1851 | to the configure script during the | ||
1852 | :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for recipes that | ||
1853 | optionally support the feature. For example, specifying "x11" in | ||
1854 | ``DISTRO_FEATURES``, causes every piece of software built for the | ||
1855 | target that can optionally support X11 to have its X11 support | ||
1856 | enabled. | ||
1857 | |||
1858 | Two more examples are Bluetooth and NFS support. For a more complete | ||
1859 | list of features that ships with the Yocto Project and that you can | ||
1860 | provide with this variable, see the ":ref:`ref-features-distro`" section. | ||
1861 | |||
1862 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL` | ||
1863 | Features to be added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` if not also present in | ||
1864 | ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``. | ||
1865 | |||
1866 | This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is | ||
1867 | not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference | ||
1868 | the variable to see which distro features are being backfilled for | ||
1869 | all distro configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section | ||
1870 | for more information. | ||
1871 | |||
1872 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED` | ||
1873 | Features from ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be | ||
1874 | backfilled (i.e. added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES``) during the build. See | ||
1875 | the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information. | ||
1876 | |||
1877 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT` | ||
1878 | A convenience variable that gives you the default list of distro | ||
1879 | features with the exception of any features specific to the C library | ||
1880 | (``libc``). | ||
1881 | |||
1882 | When creating a custom distribution, you might find it useful to be | ||
1883 | able to reuse the default | ||
1884 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` options without the | ||
1885 | need to write out the full set. Here is an example that uses | ||
1886 | ``DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT`` from a custom distro configuration file: | ||
1887 | :: | ||
1888 | |||
1889 | DISTRO_FEATURES ?= "${DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT} myfeature" | ||
1890 | |||
1891 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE` | ||
1892 | Specifies a list of features that if present in the target | ||
1893 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be | ||
1894 | included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building native recipes. This | ||
1895 | variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the | ||
1896 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE` | ||
1897 | variable. | ||
1898 | |||
1899 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK` | ||
1900 | Specifies a list of features that if present in the target | ||
1901 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be | ||
1902 | included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building nativesdk recipes. This | ||
1903 | variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the | ||
1904 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK` | ||
1905 | variable. | ||
1906 | |||
1907 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE` | ||
1908 | Specifies a list of features that should be included in | ||
1909 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building native | ||
1910 | recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features filtered | ||
1911 | using the | ||
1912 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE` | ||
1913 | variable. | ||
1914 | |||
1915 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK` | ||
1916 | Specifies a list of features that should be included in | ||
1917 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building | ||
1918 | nativesdk recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features | ||
1919 | filtered using the | ||
1920 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK` | ||
1921 | variable. | ||
1922 | |||
1923 | :term:`DISTRO_NAME` | ||
1924 | The long name of the distribution. For information on the short name | ||
1925 | of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO` variable. | ||
1926 | |||
1927 | The ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable corresponds to a distribution | ||
1928 | configuration file whose root name is the same as the variable's | ||
1929 | argument and whose filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the | ||
1930 | distribution configuration file for the Poky distribution is named | ||
1931 | ``poky.conf`` and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory | ||
1932 | of the :term:`Source Directory`. | ||
1933 | |||
1934 | Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is set | ||
1935 | as follows: | ||
1936 | :: | ||
1937 | |||
1938 | DISTRO_NAME = "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)" | ||
1939 | |||
1940 | Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro`` | ||
1941 | directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the | ||
1942 | distribution configuration. | ||
1943 | |||
1944 | .. note:: | ||
1945 | |||
1946 | If the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is blank, a set of default | ||
1947 | configurations are used, which are specified within | ||
1948 | ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory. | ||
1949 | |||
1950 | :term:`DISTRO_VERSION` | ||
1951 | The version of the distribution. | ||
1952 | |||
1953 | :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES` | ||
1954 | A colon-separated list of overrides specific to the current | ||
1955 | distribution. By default, this list includes the value of | ||
1956 | :term:`DISTRO`. | ||
1957 | |||
1958 | You can extend ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that should | ||
1959 | apply to the distribution. | ||
1960 | |||
1961 | The underlying mechanism behind ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` is simply that it | ||
1962 | is included in the default value of | ||
1963 | :term:`OVERRIDES`. | ||
1964 | |||
1965 | :term:`DL_DIR` | ||
1966 | The central download directory used by the build process to store | ||
1967 | downloads. By default, ``DL_DIR`` gets files suitable for mirroring | ||
1968 | for everything except Git repositories. If you want tarballs of Git | ||
1969 | repositories, use the | ||
1970 | :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS` | ||
1971 | variable. | ||
1972 | |||
1973 | You can set this directory by defining the ``DL_DIR`` variable in the | ||
1974 | ``conf/local.conf`` file. This directory is self-maintaining and you | ||
1975 | should not have to touch it. By default, the directory is | ||
1976 | ``downloads`` in the :term:`Build Directory`. | ||
1977 | :: | ||
1978 | |||
1979 | #DL_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/downloads" | ||
1980 | |||
1981 | To specify a different download directory, | ||
1982 | simply remove the comment from the line and provide your directory. | ||
1983 | |||
1984 | During a first build, the system downloads many different source code | ||
1985 | tarballs from various upstream projects. Downloading can take a | ||
1986 | while, particularly if your network connection is slow. Tarballs are | ||
1987 | all stored in the directory defined by ``DL_DIR`` and the build | ||
1988 | system looks there first to find source tarballs. | ||
1989 | |||
1990 | .. note:: | ||
1991 | |||
1992 | When wiping and rebuilding, you can preserve this directory to | ||
1993 | speed up this part of subsequent builds. | ||
1994 | |||
1995 | You can safely share this directory between multiple builds on the | ||
1996 | same development machine. For additional information on how the build | ||
1997 | process gets source files when working behind a firewall or proxy | ||
1998 | server, see this specific question in the ":doc:`faq`" | ||
1999 | chapter. You can also refer to the | ||
2000 | ":yocto_wiki:`Working Behind a Network Proxy </Working_Behind_a_Network_Proxy>`" | ||
2001 | Wiki page. | ||
2002 | |||
2003 | :term:`DOC_COMPRESS` | ||
2004 | When inheriting the :ref:`compress_doc <ref-classes-compress_doc>` | ||
2005 | class, this variable sets the compression policy used when the | ||
2006 | OpenEmbedded build system compresses man pages and info pages. By | ||
2007 | default, the compression method used is gz (gzip). Other policies | ||
2008 | available are xz and bz2. | ||
2009 | |||
2010 | For information on policies and on how to use this variable, see the | ||
2011 | comments in the ``meta/classes/compress_doc.bbclass`` file. | ||
2012 | |||
2013 | :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` | ||
2014 | When building bootable images (i.e. where ``hddimg``, ``iso``, or | ||
2015 | ``wic.vmdk`` is in :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`), the | ||
2016 | ``EFI_PROVIDER`` variable specifies the EFI bootloader to use. The | ||
2017 | default is "grub-efi", but "systemd-boot" can be used instead. | ||
2018 | |||
2019 | See the :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` and | ||
2020 | :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` classes for more | ||
2021 | information. | ||
2022 | |||
2023 | :term:`ENABLE_BINARY_LOCALE_GENERATION` | ||
2024 | Variable that controls which locales for ``glibc`` are generated | ||
2025 | during the build (useful if the target device has 64Mbytes of RAM or | ||
2026 | less). | ||
2027 | |||
2028 | :term:`ERR_REPORT_DIR` | ||
2029 | When used with the :ref:`report-error <ref-classes-report-error>` | ||
2030 | class, specifies the path used for storing the debug files created by | ||
2031 | the :ref:`error reporting | ||
2032 | tool <dev-manual/common-tasks:using the error reporting tool>`, which | ||
2033 | allows you to submit build errors you encounter to a central | ||
2034 | database. By default, the value of this variable is | ||
2035 | ``${``\ :term:`LOG_DIR`\ ``}/error-report``. | ||
2036 | |||
2037 | You can set ``ERR_REPORT_DIR`` to the path you want the error | ||
2038 | reporting tool to store the debug files as follows in your | ||
2039 | ``local.conf`` file: | ||
2040 | :: | ||
2041 | |||
2042 | ERR_REPORT_DIR = "path" | ||
2043 | |||
2044 | :term:`ERROR_QA` | ||
2045 | Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as | ||
2046 | errors by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in | ||
2047 | your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you | ||
2048 | can control with this variable, see the | ||
2049 | ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section. | ||
2050 | |||
2051 | :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS` | ||
2052 | Triggers the OpenEmbedded build system's shared libraries resolver to | ||
2053 | exclude an entire package when scanning for shared libraries. | ||
2054 | |||
2055 | .. note:: | ||
2056 | |||
2057 | The shared libraries resolver's functionality results in part from | ||
2058 | the internal function ``package_do_shlibs``, which is part of the | ||
2059 | :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. You should be aware that the shared | ||
2060 | libraries resolver might implicitly define some dependencies between | ||
2061 | packages. | ||
2062 | |||
2063 | The ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable is similar to the | ||
2064 | :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS` variable, which excludes a | ||
2065 | package's particular libraries only and not the whole package. | ||
2066 | |||
2067 | Use the ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable by setting it to "1" for a | ||
2068 | particular package: | ||
2069 | :: | ||
2070 | |||
2071 | EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS = "1" | ||
2072 | |||
2073 | :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD` | ||
2074 | Directs BitBake to exclude a recipe from world builds (i.e. | ||
2075 | ``bitbake world``). During world builds, BitBake locates, parses and | ||
2076 | builds all recipes found in every layer exposed in the | ||
2077 | ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file. | ||
2078 | |||
2079 | To exclude a recipe from a world build using this variable, set the | ||
2080 | variable to "1" in the recipe. | ||
2081 | |||
2082 | .. note:: | ||
2083 | |||
2084 | Recipes added to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` may still be built during a | ||
2085 | world build in order to satisfy dependencies of other recipes. Adding | ||
2086 | a recipe to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` only ensures that the recipe is not | ||
2087 | explicitly added to the list of build targets in a world build. | ||
2088 | |||
2089 | :term:`EXTENDPE` | ||
2090 | Used with file and pathnames to create a prefix for a recipe's | ||
2091 | version based on the recipe's :term:`PE` value. If ``PE`` | ||
2092 | is set and greater than zero for a recipe, ``EXTENDPE`` becomes that | ||
2093 | value (e.g if ``PE`` is equal to "1" then ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "1"). | ||
2094 | If a recipe's ``PE`` is not set (the default) or is equal to zero, | ||
2095 | ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "". | ||
2096 | |||
2097 | See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example. | ||
2098 | |||
2099 | :term:`EXTENDPKGV` | ||
2100 | The full package version specification as it appears on the final | ||
2101 | packages produced by a recipe. The variable's value is normally used | ||
2102 | to fix a runtime dependency to the exact same version of another | ||
2103 | package in the same recipe: | ||
2104 | :: | ||
2105 | |||
2106 | RDEPENDS_${PN}-additional-module = "${PN} (= ${EXTENDPKGV})" | ||
2107 | |||
2108 | The dependency relationships are intended to force the package | ||
2109 | manager to upgrade these types of packages in lock-step. | ||
2110 | |||
2111 | :term:`EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS` | ||
2112 | When set, the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`` variable indicates that these | ||
2113 | tools are not in the source tree. | ||
2114 | |||
2115 | When kernel tools are available in the tree, they are preferred over | ||
2116 | any externally installed tools. Setting the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`` | ||
2117 | variable tells the OpenEmbedded build system to prefer the installed | ||
2118 | external tools. See the | ||
2119 | :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>` class in | ||
2120 | ``meta/classes`` to see how the variable is used. | ||
2121 | |||
2122 | :term:`EXTERNALSRC` | ||
2123 | When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>` | ||
2124 | class, this variable points to the source tree, which is outside of | ||
2125 | the OpenEmbedded build system. When set, this variable sets the | ||
2126 | :term:`S` variable, which is what the OpenEmbedded build | ||
2127 | system uses to locate unpacked recipe source code. | ||
2128 | |||
2129 | For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the | ||
2130 | ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You | ||
2131 | can also find information on how to use this variable in the | ||
2132 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`" | ||
2133 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
2134 | |||
2135 | :term:`EXTERNALSRC_BUILD` | ||
2136 | When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>` | ||
2137 | class, this variable points to the directory in which the recipe's | ||
2138 | source code is built, which is outside of the OpenEmbedded build | ||
2139 | system. When set, this variable sets the :term:`B` variable, | ||
2140 | which is what the OpenEmbedded build system uses to locate the Build | ||
2141 | Directory. | ||
2142 | |||
2143 | For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the | ||
2144 | ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You | ||
2145 | can also find information on how to use this variable in the | ||
2146 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`" | ||
2147 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
2148 | |||
2149 | :term:`EXTRA_AUTORECONF` | ||
2150 | For recipes inheriting the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` | ||
2151 | class, you can use ``EXTRA_AUTORECONF`` to specify extra options to | ||
2152 | pass to the ``autoreconf`` command that is executed during the | ||
2153 | :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. | ||
2154 | |||
2155 | The default value is "--exclude=autopoint". | ||
2156 | |||
2157 | :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` | ||
2158 | A list of additional features to include in an image. When listing | ||
2159 | more than one feature, separate them with a space. | ||
2160 | |||
2161 | Typically, you configure this variable in your ``local.conf`` file, | ||
2162 | which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`. | ||
2163 | Although you can use this variable from within a recipe, best | ||
2164 | practices dictate that you do not. | ||
2165 | |||
2166 | .. note:: | ||
2167 | |||
2168 | To enable primary features from within the image recipe, use the | ||
2169 | :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variable. | ||
2170 | |||
2171 | Here are some examples of features you can add: | ||
2172 | |||
2173 | - "dbg-pkgs" - Adds -dbg packages for all installed packages including | ||
2174 | symbol information for debugging and profiling. | ||
2175 | |||
2176 | - "debug-tweaks" - Makes an image suitable for debugging. For example, allows root logins without passwords and | ||
2177 | enables post-installation logging. See the 'allow-empty-password' and | ||
2178 | 'post-install-logging' features in the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" | ||
2179 | section for more information. | ||
2180 | - "dev-pkgs" - Adds -dev packages for all installed packages. This is | ||
2181 | useful if you want to develop against the libraries in the image. | ||
2182 | - "read-only-rootfs" - Creates an image whose root filesystem is | ||
2183 | read-only. See the | ||
2184 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating a read-only root filesystem`" | ||
2185 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more | ||
2186 | information | ||
2187 | - "tools-debug" - Adds debugging tools such as gdb and strace. | ||
2188 | - "tools-sdk" - Adds development tools such as gcc, make, | ||
2189 | pkgconfig and so forth. | ||
2190 | - "tools-testapps" - Adds useful testing tools | ||
2191 | such as ts_print, aplay, arecord and so forth. | ||
2192 | |||
2193 | For a complete list of image features that ships with the Yocto | ||
2194 | Project, see the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section. | ||
2195 | |||
2196 | For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this | ||
2197 | variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``" | ||
2198 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
2199 | |||
2200 | :term:`EXTRA_IMAGECMD` | ||
2201 | Specifies additional options for the image creation command that has | ||
2202 | been specified in :term:`IMAGE_CMD`. When setting | ||
2203 | this variable, use an override for the associated image type. Here is | ||
2204 | an example: | ||
2205 | :: | ||
2206 | |||
2207 | EXTRA_IMAGECMD_ext3 ?= "-i 4096" | ||
2208 | |||
2209 | :term:`EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS` | ||
2210 | A list of recipes to build that do not provide packages for | ||
2211 | installing into the root filesystem. | ||
2212 | |||
2213 | Sometimes a recipe is required to build the final image but is not | ||
2214 | needed in the root filesystem. You can use the ``EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS`` | ||
2215 | variable to list these recipes and thus specify the dependencies. A | ||
2216 | typical example is a required bootloader in a machine configuration. | ||
2217 | |||
2218 | .. note:: | ||
2219 | |||
2220 | To add packages to the root filesystem, see the various | ||
2221 | \*:term:`RDEPENDS` and \*:term:`RRECOMMENDS` variables. | ||
2222 | |||
2223 | :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH` | ||
2224 | A list of subdirectories of | ||
2225 | ``${``\ :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE`\ ``}`` | ||
2226 | added to the beginning of the environment variable ``PATH``. As an | ||
2227 | example, the following prepends | ||
2228 | "${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/foo:${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/bar:" to | ||
2229 | ``PATH``: | ||
2230 | :: | ||
2231 | |||
2232 | EXTRANATIVEPATH = "foo bar" | ||
2233 | |||
2234 | :term:`EXTRA_OECMAKE` | ||
2235 | Additional `CMake <https://cmake.org/overview/>`__ options. See the | ||
2236 | :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` class for additional information. | ||
2237 | |||
2238 | :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` | ||
2239 | Additional ``configure`` script options. See | ||
2240 | :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` for | ||
2241 | additional information on passing configure script options. | ||
2242 | |||
2243 | :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE` | ||
2244 | Additional GNU ``make`` options. | ||
2245 | |||
2246 | Because the ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` defaults to "", you need to set the | ||
2247 | variable to specify any required GNU options. | ||
2248 | |||
2249 | :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` and | ||
2250 | :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` also make use of | ||
2251 | ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` to pass the required flags. | ||
2252 | |||
2253 | :term:`EXTRA_OESCONS` | ||
2254 | When inheriting the :ref:`scons <ref-classes-scons>` class, this | ||
2255 | variable specifies additional configuration options you want to pass | ||
2256 | to the ``scons`` command line. | ||
2257 | |||
2258 | :term:`EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS` | ||
2259 | When inheriting the :ref:`extrausers <ref-classes-extrausers>` | ||
2260 | class, this variable provides image level user and group operations. | ||
2261 | This is a more global method of providing user and group | ||
2262 | configuration as compared to using the | ||
2263 | :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, which ties user and | ||
2264 | group configurations to a specific recipe. | ||
2265 | |||
2266 | The set list of commands you can configure using the | ||
2267 | ``EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS`` is shown in the ``extrausers`` class. These | ||
2268 | commands map to the normal Unix commands of the same names: | ||
2269 | :: | ||
2270 | |||
2271 | # EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS = "\ | ||
2272 | # useradd -p '' tester; \ | ||
2273 | # groupadd developers; \ | ||
2274 | # userdel nobody; \ | ||
2275 | # groupdel -g video; \ | ||
2276 | # groupmod -g 1020 developers; \ | ||
2277 | # usermod -s /bin/sh tester; \ | ||
2278 | # " | ||
2279 | |||
2280 | :term:`FEATURE_PACKAGES` | ||
2281 | Defines one or more packages to include in an image when a specific | ||
2282 | item is included in :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. | ||
2283 | When setting the value, ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` should have the name of | ||
2284 | the feature item as an override. Here is an example: | ||
2285 | :: | ||
2286 | |||
2287 | FEATURE_PACKAGES_widget = "package1 package2" | ||
2288 | |||
2289 | In this example, if "widget" were added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``, | ||
2290 | package1 and package2 would be included in the image. | ||
2291 | |||
2292 | .. note:: | ||
2293 | |||
2294 | Packages installed by features defined through ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` | ||
2295 | are often package groups. While similarly named, you should not | ||
2296 | confuse the ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` variable with package groups, which | ||
2297 | are discussed elsewhere in the documentation. | ||
2298 | |||
2299 | :term:`FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI` | ||
2300 | Points to the base URL of the server and location within the | ||
2301 | document-root that provides the metadata and packages required by | ||
2302 | OPKG to support runtime package management of IPK packages. You set | ||
2303 | this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. | ||
2304 | |||
2305 | Consider the following example: | ||
2306 | :: | ||
2307 | |||
2308 | FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI = "http://192.168.7.1/BOARD-dir" | ||
2309 | |||
2310 | This example assumes you are serving | ||
2311 | your packages over HTTP and your databases are located in a directory | ||
2312 | named ``BOARD-dir``, which is underneath your HTTP server's | ||
2313 | document-root. In this case, the OpenEmbedded build system generates | ||
2314 | a set of configuration files for you in your target that work with | ||
2315 | the feed. | ||
2316 | |||
2317 | :term:`FILES` | ||
2318 | The list of files and directories that are placed in a package. The | ||
2319 | :term:`PACKAGES` variable lists the packages | ||
2320 | generated by a recipe. | ||
2321 | |||
2322 | To use the ``FILES`` variable, provide a package name override that | ||
2323 | identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a space-separated | ||
2324 | list of files or paths that identify the files you want included as | ||
2325 | part of the resulting package. Here is an example: | ||
2326 | :: | ||
2327 | |||
2328 | FILES_${PN} += "${bindir}/mydir1 ${bindir}/mydir2/myfile" | ||
2329 | |||
2330 | .. note:: | ||
2331 | |||
2332 | - When specifying files or paths, you can pattern match using | ||
2333 | Python's | ||
2334 | `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_ | ||
2335 | syntax. For details on the syntax, see the documentation by | ||
2336 | following the previous link. | ||
2337 | |||
2338 | - When specifying paths as part of the ``FILES`` variable, it is | ||
2339 | good practice to use appropriate path variables. For example, | ||
2340 | use ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc``, or ``${bindir}`` | ||
2341 | rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these | ||
2342 | variables at the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in | ||
2343 | the :term:`Source Directory`. You will also | ||
2344 | find the default values of the various ``FILES_*`` variables in | ||
2345 | this file. | ||
2346 | |||
2347 | If some of the files you provide with the ``FILES`` variable are | ||
2348 | editable and you know they should not be overwritten during the | ||
2349 | package update process by the Package Management System (PMS), you | ||
2350 | can identify these files so that the PMS will not overwrite them. See | ||
2351 | the :term:`CONFFILES` variable for information on | ||
2352 | how to identify these files to the PMS. | ||
2353 | |||
2354 | :term:`FILES_SOLIBSDEV` | ||
2355 | Defines the file specification to match | ||
2356 | :term:`SOLIBSDEV`. In other words, | ||
2357 | ``FILES_SOLIBSDEV`` defines the full path name of the development | ||
2358 | symbolic link (symlink) for shared libraries on the target platform. | ||
2359 | |||
2360 | The following statement from the ``bitbake.conf`` shows how it is | ||
2361 | set: | ||
2362 | :: | ||
2363 | |||
2364 | FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "${base_libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV}" | ||
2365 | |||
2366 | :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` | ||
2367 | Extends the search path the OpenEmbedded build system uses when | ||
2368 | looking for files and patches as it processes recipes and append | ||
2369 | files. The default directories BitBake uses when it processes recipes | ||
2370 | are initially defined by the :term:`FILESPATH` | ||
2371 | variable. You can extend ``FILESPATH`` variable by using | ||
2372 | ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``. | ||
2373 | |||
2374 | Best practices dictate that you accomplish this by using | ||
2375 | ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` from within a ``.bbappend`` file and that you | ||
2376 | prepend paths as follows: | ||
2377 | :: | ||
2378 | |||
2379 | FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:" | ||
2380 | |||
2381 | In the above example, the build system first | ||
2382 | looks for files in a directory that has the same name as the | ||
2383 | corresponding append file. | ||
2384 | |||
2385 | .. note:: | ||
2386 | |||
2387 | When extending ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``, be sure to use the immediate | ||
2388 | expansion (``:=``) operator. Immediate expansion makes sure that | ||
2389 | BitBake evaluates :term:`THISDIR` at the time the | ||
2390 | directive is encountered rather than at some later time when | ||
2391 | expansion might result in a directory that does not contain the | ||
2392 | files you need. | ||
2393 | |||
2394 | Also, include the trailing separating colon character if you are | ||
2395 | prepending. The trailing colon character is necessary because you | ||
2396 | are directing BitBake to extend the path by prepending directories | ||
2397 | to the search path. | ||
2398 | |||
2399 | Here is another common use: | ||
2400 | :: | ||
2401 | |||
2402 | FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/files:" | ||
2403 | |||
2404 | In this example, the build system extends the | ||
2405 | ``FILESPATH`` variable to include a directory named ``files`` that is | ||
2406 | in the same directory as the corresponding append file. | ||
2407 | |||
2408 | This next example specifically adds three paths: | ||
2409 | :: | ||
2410 | |||
2411 | FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "path_1:path_2:path_3:" | ||
2412 | |||
2413 | A final example shows how you can extend the search path and include | ||
2414 | a :term:`MACHINE`-specific override, which is useful | ||
2415 | in a BSP layer: | ||
2416 | :: | ||
2417 | |||
2418 | FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend_intel-x86-common := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:" | ||
2419 | |||
2420 | The previous statement appears in the | ||
2421 | ``linux-yocto-dev.bbappend`` file, which is found in the | ||
2422 | :ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories` in | ||
2423 | ``meta-intel/common/recipes-kernel/linux``. Here, the machine | ||
2424 | override is a special :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` | ||
2425 | definition for multiple ``meta-intel`` machines. | ||
2426 | |||
2427 | .. note:: | ||
2428 | |||
2429 | For a layer that supports a single BSP, the override could just be | ||
2430 | the value of ``MACHINE``. | ||
2431 | |||
2432 | By prepending paths in ``.bbappend`` files, you allow multiple append | ||
2433 | files that reside in different layers but are used for the same | ||
2434 | recipe to correctly extend the path. | ||
2435 | |||
2436 | :term:`FILESOVERRIDES` | ||
2437 | A subset of :term:`OVERRIDES` used by the | ||
2438 | OpenEmbedded build system for creating | ||
2439 | :term:`FILESPATH`. The ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable | ||
2440 | uses overrides to automatically extend the | ||
2441 | :term:`FILESPATH` variable. For an example of how | ||
2442 | that works, see the :term:`FILESPATH` variable | ||
2443 | description. Additionally, you find more information on how overrides | ||
2444 | are handled in the | ||
2445 | ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`" | ||
2446 | section of the BitBake User Manual. | ||
2447 | |||
2448 | By default, the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable is defined as: | ||
2449 | :: | ||
2450 | |||
2451 | FILESOVERRIDES = "${TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH}:${MACHINEOVERRIDES}:${DISTROOVERRIDES}" | ||
2452 | |||
2453 | .. note:: | ||
2454 | |||
2455 | Do not hand-edit the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable. The values match up | ||
2456 | with expected overrides and are used in an expected manner by the | ||
2457 | build system. | ||
2458 | |||
2459 | :term:`FILESPATH` | ||
2460 | The default set of directories the OpenEmbedded build system uses | ||
2461 | when searching for patches and files. | ||
2462 | |||
2463 | During the build process, BitBake searches each directory in | ||
2464 | ``FILESPATH`` in the specified order when looking for files and | ||
2465 | patches specified by each ``file://`` URI in a recipe's | ||
2466 | :term:`SRC_URI` statements. | ||
2467 | |||
2468 | The default value for the ``FILESPATH`` variable is defined in the | ||
2469 | ``base.bbclass`` class found in ``meta/classes`` in the | ||
2470 | :term:`Source Directory`: | ||
2471 | :: | ||
2472 | |||
2473 | FILESPATH = "${@base_set_filespath(["${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BP}", \ | ||
2474 | "${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BPN}", "${FILE_DIRNAME}/files"], d)}" | ||
2475 | |||
2476 | The | ||
2477 | ``FILESPATH`` variable is automatically extended using the overrides | ||
2478 | from the :term:`FILESOVERRIDES` variable. | ||
2479 | |||
2480 | .. note:: | ||
2481 | |||
2482 | - Do not hand-edit the ``FILESPATH`` variable. If you want the | ||
2483 | build system to look in directories other than the defaults, | ||
2484 | extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the | ||
2485 | :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` variable. | ||
2486 | |||
2487 | - Be aware that the default ``FILESPATH`` directories do not map | ||
2488 | to directories in custom layers where append files | ||
2489 | (``.bbappend``) are used. If you want the build system to find | ||
2490 | patches or files that reside with your append files, you need | ||
2491 | to extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the | ||
2492 | ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` variable. | ||
2493 | |||
2494 | You can take advantage of this searching behavior in useful ways. For | ||
2495 | example, consider a case where the following directory structure | ||
2496 | exists for general and machine-specific configurations: | ||
2497 | :: | ||
2498 | |||
2499 | files/defconfig | ||
2500 | files/MACHINEA/defconfig | ||
2501 | files/MACHINEB/defconfig | ||
2502 | |||
2503 | Also in the example, the ``SRC_URI`` statement contains | ||
2504 | "file://defconfig". Given this scenario, you can set | ||
2505 | :term:`MACHINE` to "MACHINEA" and cause the build | ||
2506 | system to use files from ``files/MACHINEA``. Set ``MACHINE`` to | ||
2507 | "MACHINEB" and the build system uses files from ``files/MACHINEB``. | ||
2508 | Finally, for any machine other than "MACHINEA" and "MACHINEB", the | ||
2509 | build system uses files from ``files/defconfig``. | ||
2510 | |||
2511 | You can find out more about the patching process in the | ||
2512 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:patching`" section | ||
2513 | in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the | ||
2514 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:patching code`" section in | ||
2515 | the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. See the | ||
2516 | :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task as well. | ||
2517 | |||
2518 | :term:`FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES` | ||
2519 | Allows you to define your own file permissions settings table as part | ||
2520 | of your configuration for the packaging process. For example, suppose | ||
2521 | you need a consistent set of custom permissions for a set of groups | ||
2522 | and users across an entire work project. It is best to do this in the | ||
2523 | packages themselves but this is not always possible. | ||
2524 | |||
2525 | By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``fs-perms.txt``, | ||
2526 | which is located in the ``meta/files`` folder in the :term:`Source Directory`. | ||
2527 | If you create your own file | ||
2528 | permissions setting table, you should place it in your layer or the | ||
2529 | distro's layer. | ||
2530 | |||
2531 | You define the ``FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES`` variable in the | ||
2532 | ``conf/local.conf`` file, which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`, | ||
2533 | to point to your custom | ||
2534 | ``fs-perms.txt``. You can specify more than a single file permissions | ||
2535 | setting table. The paths you specify to these files must be defined | ||
2536 | within the :term:`BBPATH` variable. | ||
2537 | |||
2538 | For guidance on how to create your own file permissions settings | ||
2539 | table file, examine the existing ``fs-perms.txt``. | ||
2540 | |||
2541 | :term:`FIT_GENERATE_KEYS` | ||
2542 | Decides whether to generate the keys for signing fitImage if they | ||
2543 | don't already exist. The keys are created in ``UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR``. | ||
2544 | The default value is 0. | ||
2545 | |||
2546 | :term:`FIT_HASH_ALG` | ||
2547 | Specifies the hash algorithm used in creating the FIT Image. For e.g. sha256. | ||
2548 | |||
2549 | :term:`FIT_KEY_GENRSA_ARGS` | ||
2550 | Arguments to openssl genrsa for generating RSA private key for signing | ||
2551 | fitImage. The default value is "-F4". i.e. the public exponent 65537 to | ||
2552 | use. | ||
2553 | |||
2554 | :term:`FIT_KEY_REQ_ARGS` | ||
2555 | Arguments to openssl req for generating certificate for signing fitImage. | ||
2556 | The default value is "-batch -new". batch for non interactive mode | ||
2557 | and new for generating new keys. | ||
2558 | |||
2559 | :term:`FIT_KEY_SIGN_PKCS` | ||
2560 | Format for public key ceritifcate used in signing fitImage. | ||
2561 | The default value is "x509". | ||
2562 | |||
2563 | :term:`FIT_SIGN_ALG` | ||
2564 | Specifies the signature algorithm used in creating the FIT Image. | ||
2565 | For e.g. rsa2048. | ||
2566 | |||
2567 | :term:`FIT_SIGN_NUMBITS` | ||
2568 | Size of private key in number of bits used in fitImage. The default | ||
2569 | value is "2048". | ||
2570 | |||
2571 | :term:`FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` | ||
2572 | When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class, | ||
2573 | this variable specifies the runtime dependencies for font packages. | ||
2574 | By default, the ``FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` is set to "fontconfig-utils". | ||
2575 | |||
2576 | :term:`FONT_PACKAGES` | ||
2577 | When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class, | ||
2578 | this variable identifies packages containing font files that need to | ||
2579 | be cached by Fontconfig. By default, the ``fontcache`` class assumes | ||
2580 | that fonts are in the recipe's main package (i.e. | ||
2581 | ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if fonts you | ||
2582 | need are in a package other than that main package. | ||
2583 | |||
2584 | :term:`FORCE_RO_REMOVE` | ||
2585 | Forces the removal of the packages listed in ``ROOTFS_RO_UNNEEDED`` | ||
2586 | during the generation of the root filesystem. | ||
2587 | |||
2588 | Set the variable to "1" to force the removal of these packages. | ||
2589 | |||
2590 | :term:`FULL_OPTIMIZATION` | ||
2591 | The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when | ||
2592 | compiling an optimized system. This variable defaults to "-O2 -pipe | ||
2593 | ${DEBUG_FLAGS}". | ||
2594 | |||
2595 | :term:`GCCPIE` | ||
2596 | Enables Position Independent Executables (PIE) within the GNU C | ||
2597 | Compiler (GCC). Enabling PIE in the GCC makes Return Oriented | ||
2598 | Programming (ROP) attacks much more difficult to execute. | ||
2599 | |||
2600 | By default the ``security_flags.inc`` file enables PIE by setting the | ||
2601 | variable as follows: | ||
2602 | :: | ||
2603 | |||
2604 | GCCPIE ?= "--enable-default-pie" | ||
2605 | |||
2606 | :term:`GCCVERSION` | ||
2607 | Specifies the default version of the GNU C Compiler (GCC) used for | ||
2608 | compilation. By default, ``GCCVERSION`` is set to "8.x" in the | ||
2609 | ``meta/conf/distro/include/tcmode-default.inc`` include file: | ||
2610 | :: | ||
2611 | |||
2612 | GCCVERSION ?= "8.%" | ||
2613 | |||
2614 | You can override this value by setting it in a | ||
2615 | configuration file such as the ``local.conf``. | ||
2616 | |||
2617 | :term:`GDB` | ||
2618 | The minimal command and arguments to run the GNU Debugger. | ||
2619 | |||
2620 | :term:`GITDIR` | ||
2621 | The directory in which a local copy of a Git repository is stored | ||
2622 | when it is cloned. | ||
2623 | |||
2624 | :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES` | ||
2625 | Specifies the list of GLIBC locales to generate should you not wish | ||
2626 | to generate all LIBC locals, which can be time consuming. | ||
2627 | |||
2628 | .. note:: | ||
2629 | |||
2630 | If you specifically remove the locale ``en_US.UTF-8``, you must set | ||
2631 | :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS` appropriately. | ||
2632 | |||
2633 | You can set ``GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES`` in your ``local.conf`` file. | ||
2634 | By default, all locales are generated. | ||
2635 | :: | ||
2636 | |||
2637 | GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES = "en_GB.UTF-8 en_US.UTF-8" | ||
2638 | |||
2639 | :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM` | ||
2640 | When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, | ||
2641 | this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be | ||
2642 | passed to the ``groupadd`` command if you wish to add a group to the | ||
2643 | system when the package is installed. | ||
2644 | |||
2645 | Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe: | ||
2646 | :: | ||
2647 | |||
2648 | GROUPADD_PARAM_${PN} = "-r netdev" | ||
2649 | |||
2650 | For information on the standard Linux shell command | ||
2651 | ``groupadd``, see http://linux.die.net/man/8/groupadd. | ||
2652 | |||
2653 | :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM` | ||
2654 | When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, | ||
2655 | this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be | ||
2656 | passed to the ``groupmems`` command if you wish to modify the members | ||
2657 | of a group when the package is installed. | ||
2658 | |||
2659 | For information on the standard Linux shell command ``groupmems``, | ||
2660 | see http://linux.die.net/man/8/groupmems. | ||
2661 | |||
2662 | :term:`GRUB_GFXSERIAL` | ||
2663 | Configures the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) to have graphics | ||
2664 | and serial in the boot menu. Set this variable to "1" in your | ||
2665 | ``local.conf`` or distribution configuration file to enable graphics | ||
2666 | and serial in the menu. | ||
2667 | |||
2668 | See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more | ||
2669 | information on how this variable is used. | ||
2670 | |||
2671 | :term:`GRUB_OPTS` | ||
2672 | Additional options to add to the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) | ||
2673 | configuration. Use a semi-colon character (``;``) to separate | ||
2674 | multiple options. | ||
2675 | |||
2676 | The ``GRUB_OPTS`` variable is optional. See the | ||
2677 | :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information | ||
2678 | on how this variable is used. | ||
2679 | |||
2680 | :term:`GRUB_TIMEOUT` | ||
2681 | Specifies the timeout before executing the default ``LABEL`` in the | ||
2682 | GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB). | ||
2683 | |||
2684 | The ``GRUB_TIMEOUT`` variable is optional. See the | ||
2685 | :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information | ||
2686 | on how this variable is used. | ||
2687 | |||
2688 | :term:`GTKIMMODULES_PACKAGES` | ||
2689 | When inheriting the | ||
2690 | :ref:`gtk-immodules-cache <ref-classes-gtk-immodules-cache>` class, | ||
2691 | this variable specifies the packages that contain the GTK+ input | ||
2692 | method modules being installed when the modules are in packages other | ||
2693 | than the main package. | ||
2694 | |||
2695 | :term:`HOMEPAGE` | ||
2696 | Website where more information about the software the recipe is | ||
2697 | building can be found. | ||
2698 | |||
2699 | :term:`HOST_ARCH` | ||
2700 | The name of the target architecture, which is normally the same as | ||
2701 | :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. The OpenEmbedded build system | ||
2702 | supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures | ||
2703 | supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is | ||
2704 | configurable: | ||
2705 | |||
2706 | - arm | ||
2707 | - i586 | ||
2708 | - x86_64 | ||
2709 | - powerpc | ||
2710 | - powerpc64 | ||
2711 | - mips | ||
2712 | - mipsel | ||
2713 | |||
2714 | :term:`HOST_CC_ARCH` | ||
2715 | Specifies architecture-specific compiler flags that are passed to the | ||
2716 | C compiler. | ||
2717 | |||
2718 | Default initialization for ``HOST_CC_ARCH`` varies depending on what | ||
2719 | is being built: | ||
2720 | |||
2721 | - :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH` when building for the | ||
2722 | target | ||
2723 | |||
2724 | - :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH` when building for the build host (i.e. | ||
2725 | ``-native``) | ||
2726 | |||
2727 | - ``BUILDSDK_CC_ARCH`` when building for an SDK (i.e. | ||
2728 | ``nativesdk-``) | ||
2729 | |||
2730 | :term:`HOST_OS` | ||
2731 | Specifies the name of the target operating system, which is normally | ||
2732 | the same as the :term:`TARGET_OS`. The variable can | ||
2733 | be set to "linux" for ``glibc``-based systems and to "linux-musl" for | ||
2734 | ``musl``. For ARM/EABI targets, there are also "linux-gnueabi" and | ||
2735 | "linux-musleabi" values possible. | ||
2736 | |||
2737 | :term:`HOST_PREFIX` | ||
2738 | Specifies the prefix for the cross-compile toolchain. ``HOST_PREFIX`` | ||
2739 | is normally the same as :term:`TARGET_PREFIX`. | ||
2740 | |||
2741 | :term:`HOST_SYS` | ||
2742 | Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating | ||
2743 | system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the | ||
2744 | current recipe. | ||
2745 | |||
2746 | The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based | ||
2747 | on :term:`HOST_ARCH`, | ||
2748 | :term:`HOST_VENDOR`, and | ||
2749 | :term:`HOST_OS` variables. | ||
2750 | |||
2751 | .. note:: | ||
2752 | |||
2753 | You do not need to set the variable yourself. | ||
2754 | |||
2755 | Consider these two examples: | ||
2756 | |||
2757 | - Given a native recipe on a 32-bit x86 machine running Linux, the | ||
2758 | value is "i686-linux". | ||
2759 | |||
2760 | - Given a recipe being built for a little-endian MIPS target running | ||
2761 | Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux". | ||
2762 | |||
2763 | :term:`HOSTTOOLS` | ||
2764 | A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that | ||
2765 | should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this | ||
2766 | filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. If a tool | ||
2767 | specified in the value of ``HOSTTOOLS`` is not found on the build | ||
2768 | host, the OpenEmbedded build system produces an error and the build | ||
2769 | is not started. | ||
2770 | |||
2771 | For additional information, see | ||
2772 | :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`. | ||
2773 | |||
2774 | :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL` | ||
2775 | A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that | ||
2776 | should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this | ||
2777 | filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. Unlike | ||
2778 | :term:`HOSTTOOLS`, the OpenEmbedded build system | ||
2779 | does not produce an error if a tool specified in the value of | ||
2780 | ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` is not found on the build host. Thus, you can | ||
2781 | use ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` to filter optional host tools. | ||
2782 | |||
2783 | :term:`HOST_VENDOR` | ||
2784 | Specifies the name of the vendor. ``HOST_VENDOR`` is normally the | ||
2785 | same as :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`. | ||
2786 | |||
2787 | :term:`ICECC_DISABLED` | ||
2788 | Disables or enables the ``icecc`` (Icecream) function. For more | ||
2789 | information on this function and best practices for using this | ||
2790 | variable, see the ":ref:`icecc.bbclass <ref-classes-icecc>`" | ||
2791 | section. | ||
2792 | |||
2793 | Setting this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` disables the | ||
2794 | function: | ||
2795 | :: | ||
2796 | |||
2797 | ICECC_DISABLED ??= "1" | ||
2798 | |||
2799 | To enable the function, set the variable as follows: | ||
2800 | :: | ||
2801 | |||
2802 | ICECC_DISABLED = "" | ||
2803 | |||
2804 | :term:`ICECC_ENV_EXEC` | ||
2805 | Points to the ``icecc-create-env`` script that you provide. This | ||
2806 | variable is used by the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You | ||
2807 | set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. | ||
2808 | |||
2809 | If you do not point to a script that you provide, the OpenEmbedded | ||
2810 | build system uses the default script provided by the | ||
2811 | ``icecc-create-env.bb`` recipe, which is a modified version and not | ||
2812 | the one that comes with ``icecc``. | ||
2813 | |||
2814 | :term:`ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE` | ||
2815 | Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the | ||
2816 | :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task that specify parallel | ||
2817 | compilation. This variable usually takes the form of "-j x", where x | ||
2818 | represents the maximum number of parallel threads ``make`` can run. | ||
2819 | |||
2820 | .. note:: | ||
2821 | |||
2822 | The options passed affect builds on all enabled machines on the | ||
2823 | network, which are machines running the ``iceccd`` daemon. | ||
2824 | |||
2825 | If your enabled machines support multiple cores, coming up with the | ||
2826 | maximum number of parallel threads that gives you the best | ||
2827 | performance could take some experimentation since machine speed, | ||
2828 | network lag, available memory, and existing machine loads can all | ||
2829 | affect build time. Consequently, unlike the | ||
2830 | :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable, there is no | ||
2831 | rule-of-thumb for setting ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE`` to achieve optimal | ||
2832 | performance. | ||
2833 | |||
2834 | If you do not set ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE``, the build system does not | ||
2835 | use it (i.e. the system does not detect and assign the number of | ||
2836 | cores as is done with ``PARALLEL_MAKE``). | ||
2837 | |||
2838 | :term:`ICECC_PATH` | ||
2839 | The location of the ``icecc`` binary. You can set this variable in | ||
2840 | your ``local.conf`` file. If your ``local.conf`` file does not define | ||
2841 | this variable, the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class attempts | ||
2842 | to define it by locating ``icecc`` using ``which``. | ||
2843 | |||
2844 | :term:`ICECC_USER_CLASS_BL` | ||
2845 | Identifies user classes that you do not want the Icecream distributed | ||
2846 | compile support to consider. This variable is used by the | ||
2847 | :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in | ||
2848 | your ``local.conf`` file. | ||
2849 | |||
2850 | When you list classes using this variable, you are "blacklisting" | ||
2851 | them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any classes | ||
2852 | you list will be distributed and compiled locally. | ||
2853 | |||
2854 | :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_BL` | ||
2855 | Identifies user recipes that you do not want the Icecream distributed | ||
2856 | compile support to consider. This variable is used by the | ||
2857 | :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in | ||
2858 | your ``local.conf`` file. | ||
2859 | |||
2860 | When you list packages using this variable, you are "blacklisting" | ||
2861 | them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any packages | ||
2862 | you list will be distributed and compiled locally. | ||
2863 | |||
2864 | :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_WL` | ||
2865 | Identifies user recipes that use an empty | ||
2866 | :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable that you want to | ||
2867 | force remote distributed compilation on using the Icecream | ||
2868 | distributed compile support. This variable is used by the | ||
2869 | :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in | ||
2870 | your ``local.conf`` file. | ||
2871 | |||
2872 | :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME` | ||
2873 | The base name of image output files. This variable defaults to the | ||
2874 | recipe name (``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). | ||
2875 | |||
2876 | :term:`IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES` | ||
2877 | A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition | ||
2878 | when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the | ||
2879 | ``bootimg-efi`` source plugin. By default, | ||
2880 | the files are | ||
2881 | installed under the same name as the source files. To change the | ||
2882 | installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon | ||
2883 | (;). Source files need to be located in | ||
2884 | :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two | ||
2885 | examples: | ||
2886 | :: | ||
2887 | |||
2888 | IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE};bz2" | ||
2889 | IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE} microcode.cpio" | ||
2890 | |||
2891 | Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In | ||
2892 | this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base | ||
2893 | name of the source file path. To install files into a directory | ||
2894 | within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;). | ||
2895 | Here are two examples: | ||
2896 | :: | ||
2897 | |||
2898 | IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*" | ||
2899 | IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*;boot/" | ||
2900 | |||
2901 | The first example | ||
2902 | installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/boot/loader/`` | ||
2903 | into the root of the target partition. The second example installs | ||
2904 | the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition. | ||
2905 | |||
2906 | You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the | ||
2907 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" | ||
2908 | section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference | ||
2909 | material for Wic is located in the | ||
2910 | ":doc:`/ref-manual/ref-kickstart`" chapter. | ||
2911 | |||
2912 | :term:`IMAGE_BOOT_FILES` | ||
2913 | A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition | ||
2914 | when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the | ||
2915 | ``bootimg-partition`` source plugin. By default, | ||
2916 | the files are | ||
2917 | installed under the same name as the source files. To change the | ||
2918 | installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon | ||
2919 | (;). Source files need to be located in | ||
2920 | :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two | ||
2921 | examples: | ||
2922 | :: | ||
2923 | |||
2924 | IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.img uImage;kernel" | ||
2925 | IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.${UBOOT_SUFFIX} ${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE}" | ||
2926 | |||
2927 | Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In | ||
2928 | this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base | ||
2929 | name of the source file path. To install files into a directory | ||
2930 | within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;). | ||
2931 | Here are two examples: | ||
2932 | :: | ||
2933 | |||
2934 | IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*" | ||
2935 | IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*;boot/" | ||
2936 | |||
2937 | The first example | ||
2938 | installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/bcm2835-bootfiles`` | ||
2939 | into the root of the target partition. The second example installs | ||
2940 | the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition. | ||
2941 | |||
2942 | You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the | ||
2943 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" | ||
2944 | section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference | ||
2945 | material for Wic is located in the | ||
2946 | ":doc:`/ref-manual/ref-kickstart`" chapter. | ||
2947 | |||
2948 | :term:`IMAGE_CLASSES` | ||
2949 | A list of classes that all images should inherit. You typically use | ||
2950 | this variable to specify the list of classes that register the | ||
2951 | different types of images the OpenEmbedded build system creates. | ||
2952 | |||
2953 | The default value for ``IMAGE_CLASSES`` is ``image_types``. You can | ||
2954 | set this variable in your ``local.conf`` or in a distribution | ||
2955 | configuration file. | ||
2956 | |||
2957 | For more information, see ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass`` in the | ||
2958 | :term:`Source Directory`. | ||
2959 | |||
2960 | :term:`IMAGE_CMD` | ||
2961 | Specifies the command to create the image file for a specific image | ||
2962 | type, which corresponds to the value set set in | ||
2963 | :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`, (e.g. ``ext3``, | ||
2964 | ``btrfs``, and so forth). When setting this variable, you should use | ||
2965 | an override for the associated type. Here is an example: | ||
2966 | :: | ||
2967 | |||
2968 | IMAGE_CMD_jffs2 = "mkfs.jffs2 --root=${IMAGE_ROOTFS} \ | ||
2969 | --faketime --output=${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.jffs2 \ | ||
2970 | ${EXTRA_IMAGECMD}" | ||
2971 | |||
2972 | You typically do not need to set this variable unless you are adding | ||
2973 | support for a new image type. For more examples on how to set this | ||
2974 | variable, see the :ref:`image_types <ref-classes-image_types>` | ||
2975 | class file, which is ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass``. | ||
2976 | |||
2977 | :term:`IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES` | ||
2978 | Specifies one or more files that contain custom device tables that | ||
2979 | are passed to the ``makedevs`` command as part of creating an image. | ||
2980 | These files list basic device nodes that should be created under | ||
2981 | ``/dev`` within the image. If ``IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`` is not set, | ||
2982 | ``files/device_table-minimal.txt`` is used, which is located by | ||
2983 | :term:`BBPATH`. For details on how you should write | ||
2984 | device table files, see ``meta/files/device_table-minimal.txt`` as an | ||
2985 | example. | ||
2986 | |||
2987 | :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` | ||
2988 | The primary list of features to include in an image. Typically, you | ||
2989 | configure this variable in an image recipe. Although you can use this | ||
2990 | variable from your ``local.conf`` file, which is found in the | ||
2991 | :term:`Build Directory`, best practices dictate that you do | ||
2992 | not. | ||
2993 | |||
2994 | .. note:: | ||
2995 | |||
2996 | To enable extra features from outside the image recipe, use the | ||
2997 | :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` variable. | ||
2998 | |||
2999 | For a list of image features that ships with the Yocto Project, see | ||
3000 | the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section. | ||
3001 | |||
3002 | For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this | ||
3003 | variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``" | ||
3004 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
3005 | |||
3006 | :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` | ||
3007 | Specifies the formats the OpenEmbedded build system uses during the | ||
3008 | build when creating the root filesystem. For example, setting | ||
3009 | ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` as follows causes the build system to create root | ||
3010 | filesystems using two formats: ``.ext3`` and ``.tar.bz2``: | ||
3011 | :: | ||
3012 | |||
3013 | IMAGE_FSTYPES = "ext3 tar.bz2" | ||
3014 | |||
3015 | For the complete list of supported image formats from which you can | ||
3016 | choose, see :term:`IMAGE_TYPES`. | ||
3017 | |||
3018 | .. note:: | ||
3019 | |||
3020 | - If an image recipe uses the "inherit image" line and you are | ||
3021 | setting ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` inside the recipe, you must set | ||
3022 | ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` prior to using the "inherit image" line. | ||
3023 | |||
3024 | - Due to the way the OpenEmbedded build system processes this | ||
3025 | variable, you cannot update its contents by using ``_append`` | ||
3026 | or ``_prepend``. You must use the ``+=`` operator to add one or | ||
3027 | more options to the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` variable. | ||
3028 | |||
3029 | :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` | ||
3030 | Used by recipes to specify the packages to install into an image | ||
3031 | through the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class. Use the | ||
3032 | ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable with care to avoid ordering issues. | ||
3033 | |||
3034 | Image recipes set ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to specify the packages to | ||
3035 | install into an image through ``image.bbclass``. Additionally, | ||
3036 | "helper" classes such as the | ||
3037 | :ref:`core-image <ref-classes-core-image>` class exist that can | ||
3038 | take lists used with ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` and turn them into | ||
3039 | auto-generated entries in ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` in addition to its | ||
3040 | default contents. | ||
3041 | |||
3042 | When you use this variable, it is best to use it as follows: | ||
3043 | :: | ||
3044 | |||
3045 | IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " package-name" | ||
3046 | |||
3047 | Be sure to include the space | ||
3048 | between the quotation character and the start of the package name or | ||
3049 | names. | ||
3050 | |||
3051 | .. note:: | ||
3052 | |||
3053 | - When working with a | ||
3054 | :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/ref-images:images>` | ||
3055 | image, do not use the ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable to specify | ||
3056 | packages for installation. Instead, use the | ||
3057 | :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` variable, which | ||
3058 | allows the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) recipe to use a | ||
3059 | fixed set of packages and not be affected by ``IMAGE_INSTALL``. | ||
3060 | For information on creating an initramfs, see the | ||
3061 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" | ||
3062 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
3063 | |||
3064 | - Using ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` with the | ||
3065 | :ref:`+= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:appending (+=) and prepending (=+) with spaces>` | ||
3066 | BitBake operator within the ``/conf/local.conf`` file or from | ||
3067 | within an image recipe is not recommended. Use of this operator | ||
3068 | in these ways can cause ordering issues. Since | ||
3069 | ``core-image.bbclass`` sets ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to a default | ||
3070 | value using the | ||
3071 | :ref:`?= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:setting a default value (?=)>` | ||
3072 | operator, using a ``+=`` operation against ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` | ||
3073 | results in unexpected behavior when used within | ||
3074 | ``conf/local.conf``. Furthermore, the same operation from | ||
3075 | within an image recipe may or may not succeed depending on the | ||
3076 | specific situation. In both these cases, the behavior is | ||
3077 | contrary to how most users expect the ``+=`` operator to work. | ||
3078 | |||
3079 | :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS` | ||
3080 | Specifies the list of locales to install into the image during the | ||
3081 | root filesystem construction process. The OpenEmbedded build system | ||
3082 | automatically splits locale files, which are used for localization, | ||
3083 | into separate packages. Setting the ``IMAGE_LINGUAS`` variable | ||
3084 | ensures that any locale packages that correspond to packages already | ||
3085 | selected for installation into the image are also installed. Here is | ||
3086 | an example: | ||
3087 | :: | ||
3088 | |||
3089 | IMAGE_LINGUAS = "pt-br de-de" | ||
3090 | |||
3091 | In this example, the build system ensures any Brazilian Portuguese | ||
3092 | and German locale files that correspond to packages in the image are | ||
3093 | installed (i.e. ``*-locale-pt-br`` and ``*-locale-de-de`` as well as | ||
3094 | ``*-locale-pt`` and ``*-locale-de``, since some software packages | ||
3095 | only provide locale files by language and not by country-specific | ||
3096 | language). | ||
3097 | |||
3098 | See the :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES` | ||
3099 | variable for information on generating GLIBC locales. | ||
3100 | |||
3101 | |||
3102 | :term:`IMAGE_LINK_NAME` | ||
3103 | The name of the output image symlink (which does not include | ||
3104 | the version part as :term:`IMAGE_NAME` does). The default value | ||
3105 | is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME` and :term:`MACHINE` | ||
3106 | variables: | ||
3107 | :: | ||
3108 | |||
3109 | IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}" | ||
3110 | |||
3111 | |||
3112 | :term:`IMAGE_MANIFEST` | ||
3113 | The manifest file for the image. This file lists all the installed | ||
3114 | packages that make up the image. The file contains package | ||
3115 | information on a line-per-package basis as follows: | ||
3116 | :: | ||
3117 | |||
3118 | packagename packagearch version | ||
3119 | |||
3120 | The :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class defines the manifest | ||
3121 | file as follows: | ||
3122 | :: | ||
3123 | |||
3124 | IMAGE_MANIFEST ="${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.manifest" | ||
3125 | |||
3126 | The location is | ||
3127 | derived using the :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE` | ||
3128 | and :term:`IMAGE_NAME` variables. You can find | ||
3129 | information on how the image is created in the ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:image generation`" | ||
3130 | section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. | ||
3131 | |||
3132 | :term:`IMAGE_NAME` | ||
3133 | The name of the output image files minus the extension. This variable | ||
3134 | is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`, | ||
3135 | :term:`MACHINE`, and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` | ||
3136 | variables: | ||
3137 | :: | ||
3138 | |||
3139 | IMAGE_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" | ||
3140 | |||
3141 | :term:`IMAGE_NAME_SUFFIX` | ||
3142 | Suffix used for the image output file name - defaults to ``".rootfs"`` | ||
3143 | to distinguish the image file from other files created during image | ||
3144 | building; however if this suffix is redundant or not desired you can | ||
3145 | clear the value of this variable (set the value to ""). For example, | ||
3146 | this is typically cleared in initramfs image recipes. | ||
3147 | |||
3148 | :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR` | ||
3149 | Defines a multiplier that the build system applies to the initial | ||
3150 | image size for cases when the multiplier times the returned disk | ||
3151 | usage value for the image is greater than the sum of | ||
3152 | ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` and ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE``. The result of | ||
3153 | the multiplier applied to the initial image size creates free disk | ||
3154 | space in the image as overhead. By default, the build process uses a | ||
3155 | multiplier of 1.3 for this variable. This default value results in | ||
3156 | 30% free disk space added to the image when this method is used to | ||
3157 | determine the final generated image size. You should be aware that | ||
3158 | post install scripts and the package management system uses disk | ||
3159 | space inside this overhead area. Consequently, the multiplier does | ||
3160 | not produce an image with all the theoretical free disk space. See | ||
3161 | ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` for information on how the build system | ||
3162 | determines the overall image size. | ||
3163 | |||
3164 | The default 30% free disk space typically gives the image enough room | ||
3165 | to boot and allows for basic post installs while still leaving a | ||
3166 | small amount of free disk space. If 30% free space is inadequate, you | ||
3167 | can increase the default value. For example, the following setting | ||
3168 | gives you 50% free space added to the image: | ||
3169 | :: | ||
3170 | |||
3171 | IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR = "1.5" | ||
3172 | |||
3173 | Alternatively, you can ensure a specific amount of free disk space is | ||
3174 | added to the image by using the ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE`` | ||
3175 | variable. | ||
3176 | |||
3177 | :term:`IMAGE_PKGTYPE` | ||
3178 | Defines the package type (i.e. DEB, RPM, IPK, or TAR) used by the | ||
3179 | OpenEmbedded build system. The variable is defined appropriately by | ||
3180 | the :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>`, | ||
3181 | :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>`, | ||
3182 | :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>`, or | ||
3183 | :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class. | ||
3184 | |||
3185 | .. note:: | ||
3186 | |||
3187 | The ``package_tar`` class is broken and is not supported. It is | ||
3188 | recommended that you do not use it. | ||
3189 | |||
3190 | The :ref:`populate_sdk_* <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` and | ||
3191 | :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` classes use the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE`` | ||
3192 | for packaging up images and SDKs. | ||
3193 | |||
3194 | You should not set the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE`` manually. Rather, the | ||
3195 | variable is set indirectly through the appropriate | ||
3196 | :ref:`package_* <ref-classes-package>` class using the | ||
3197 | :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` variable. The | ||
3198 | OpenEmbedded build system uses the first package type (e.g. DEB, RPM, | ||
3199 | or IPK) that appears with the variable | ||
3200 | |||
3201 | .. note:: | ||
3202 | |||
3203 | Files using the ``.tar`` format are never used as a substitute | ||
3204 | packaging format for DEB, RPM, and IPK formatted files for your image | ||
3205 | or SDK. | ||
3206 | |||
3207 | :term:`IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` | ||
3208 | Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build | ||
3209 | system creates the final image output files. You can specify | ||
3210 | functions separated by semicolons: | ||
3211 | :: | ||
3212 | |||
3213 | IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " | ||
3214 | |||
3215 | If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the | ||
3216 | function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the | ||
3217 | directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the | ||
3218 | :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more | ||
3219 | information. | ||
3220 | |||
3221 | :term:`IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND` | ||
3222 | Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build | ||
3223 | system creates the final image output files. You can specify | ||
3224 | functions separated by semicolons: | ||
3225 | :: | ||
3226 | |||
3227 | IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " | ||
3228 | |||
3229 | If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the | ||
3230 | function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the | ||
3231 | directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the | ||
3232 | :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more | ||
3233 | information. | ||
3234 | |||
3235 | :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` | ||
3236 | The location of the root filesystem while it is under construction | ||
3237 | (i.e. during the :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task). This | ||
3238 | variable is not configurable. Do not change it. | ||
3239 | |||
3240 | :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_ALIGNMENT` | ||
3241 | Specifies the alignment for the output image file in Kbytes. If the | ||
3242 | size of the image is not a multiple of this value, then the size is | ||
3243 | rounded up to the nearest multiple of the value. The default value is | ||
3244 | "1". See :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE` for | ||
3245 | additional information. | ||
3246 | |||
3247 | :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE` | ||
3248 | Defines additional free disk space created in the image in Kbytes. By | ||
3249 | default, this variable is set to "0". This free disk space is added | ||
3250 | to the image after the build system determines the image size as | ||
3251 | described in ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE``. | ||
3252 | |||
3253 | This variable is particularly useful when you want to ensure that a | ||
3254 | specific amount of free disk space is available on a device after an | ||
3255 | image is installed and running. For example, to be sure 5 Gbytes of | ||
3256 | free disk space is available, set the variable as follows: | ||
3257 | :: | ||
3258 | |||
3259 | IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "5242880" | ||
3260 | |||
3261 | For example, the Yocto Project Build Appliance specifically requests | ||
3262 | 40 Gbytes of extra space with the line: | ||
3263 | :: | ||
3264 | |||
3265 | IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "41943040" | ||
3266 | |||
3267 | :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE` | ||
3268 | Defines the size in Kbytes for the generated image. The OpenEmbedded | ||
3269 | build system determines the final size for the generated image using | ||
3270 | an algorithm that takes into account the initial disk space used for | ||
3271 | the generated image, a requested size for the image, and requested | ||
3272 | additional free disk space to be added to the image. Programatically, | ||
3273 | the build system determines the final size of the generated image as | ||
3274 | follows: | ||
3275 | :: | ||
3276 | |||
3277 | if (image-du * overhead) < rootfs-size: | ||
3278 | internal-rootfs-size = rootfs-size + xspace | ||
3279 | else: | ||
3280 | internal-rootfs-size = (image-du * overhead) + xspace | ||
3281 | where: | ||
3282 | image-du = Returned value of the du command on the image. | ||
3283 | overhead = IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR | ||
3284 | rootfs-size = IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE | ||
3285 | internal-rootfs-size = Initial root filesystem size before any modifications. | ||
3286 | xspace = IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE | ||
3287 | |||
3288 | See the :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR` | ||
3289 | and :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE` | ||
3290 | variables for related information. | ||
3291 | |||
3292 | :term:`IMAGE_TYPEDEP` | ||
3293 | Specifies a dependency from one image type on another. Here is an | ||
3294 | example from the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class: | ||
3295 | :: | ||
3296 | |||
3297 | IMAGE_TYPEDEP_live = "ext3" | ||
3298 | |||
3299 | In the previous example, the variable ensures that when "live" is | ||
3300 | listed with the :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable, | ||
3301 | the OpenEmbedded build system produces an ``ext3`` image first since | ||
3302 | one of the components of the live image is an ``ext3`` formatted | ||
3303 | partition containing the root filesystem. | ||
3304 | |||
3305 | :term:`IMAGE_TYPES` | ||
3306 | Specifies the complete list of supported image types by default: | ||
3307 | |||
3308 | - btrfs | ||
3309 | - container | ||
3310 | - cpio | ||
3311 | - cpio.gz | ||
3312 | - cpio.lz4 | ||
3313 | - cpio.lzma | ||
3314 | - cpio.xz | ||
3315 | - cramfs | ||
3316 | - ext2 | ||
3317 | - ext2.bz2 | ||
3318 | - ext2.gz | ||
3319 | - ext2.lzma | ||
3320 | - ext3 | ||
3321 | - ext3.gz | ||
3322 | - ext4 | ||
3323 | - ext4.gz | ||
3324 | - f2fs | ||
3325 | - hddimg | ||
3326 | - iso | ||
3327 | - jffs2 | ||
3328 | - jffs2.sum | ||
3329 | - multiubi | ||
3330 | - squashfs | ||
3331 | - squashfs-lz4 | ||
3332 | - squashfs-lzo | ||
3333 | - squashfs-xz | ||
3334 | - tar | ||
3335 | - tar.bz2 | ||
3336 | - tar.gz | ||
3337 | - tar.lz4 | ||
3338 | - tar.xz | ||
3339 | - tar.zst | ||
3340 | - ubi | ||
3341 | - ubifs | ||
3342 | - wic | ||
3343 | - wic.bz2 | ||
3344 | - wic.gz | ||
3345 | - wic.lzma | ||
3346 | |||
3347 | For more information about these types of images, see | ||
3348 | ``meta/classes/image_types*.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. | ||
3349 | |||
3350 | :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` | ||
3351 | Version suffix that is part of the default :term:`IMAGE_NAME` and | ||
3352 | :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` values. | ||
3353 | Defaults to ``"-${DATETIME}"``, however you could set this to a | ||
3354 | version string that comes from your external build environment if | ||
3355 | desired, and this suffix would then be used consistently across | ||
3356 | the build artifacts. | ||
3357 | |||
3358 | :term:`INC_PR` | ||
3359 | Helps define the recipe revision for recipes that share a common | ||
3360 | ``include`` file. You can think of this variable as part of the | ||
3361 | recipe revision as set from within an include file. | ||
3362 | |||
3363 | Suppose, for example, you have a set of recipes that are used across | ||
3364 | several projects. And, within each of those recipes the revision (its | ||
3365 | :term:`PR` value) is set accordingly. In this case, when | ||
3366 | the revision of those recipes changes, the burden is on you to find | ||
3367 | all those recipes and be sure that they get changed to reflect the | ||
3368 | updated version of the recipe. In this scenario, it can get | ||
3369 | complicated when recipes that are used in many places and provide | ||
3370 | common functionality are upgraded to a new revision. | ||
3371 | |||
3372 | A more efficient way of dealing with this situation is to set the | ||
3373 | ``INC_PR`` variable inside the ``include`` files that the recipes | ||
3374 | share and then expand the ``INC_PR`` variable within the recipes to | ||
3375 | help define the recipe revision. | ||
3376 | |||
3377 | The following provides an example that shows how to use the | ||
3378 | ``INC_PR`` variable given a common ``include`` file that defines the | ||
3379 | variable. Once the variable is defined in the ``include`` file, you | ||
3380 | can use the variable to set the ``PR`` values in each recipe. You | ||
3381 | will notice that when you set a recipe's ``PR`` you can provide more | ||
3382 | granular revisioning by appending values to the ``INC_PR`` variable: | ||
3383 | :: | ||
3384 | |||
3385 | recipes-graphics/xorg-font/xorg-font-common.inc:INC_PR = "r2" | ||
3386 | recipes-graphics/xorg-font/encodings_1.0.4.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.1" | ||
3387 | recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-util_1.3.0.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.0" | ||
3388 | recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-alias_1.0.3.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.3" | ||
3389 | |||
3390 | The | ||
3391 | first line of the example establishes the baseline revision to be | ||
3392 | used for all recipes that use the ``include`` file. The remaining | ||
3393 | lines in the example are from individual recipes and show how the | ||
3394 | ``PR`` value is set. | ||
3395 | |||
3396 | :term:`INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE` | ||
3397 | Specifies a space-separated list of license names (as they would | ||
3398 | appear in :term:`LICENSE`) that should be excluded | ||
3399 | from the build. Recipes that provide no alternatives to listed | ||
3400 | incompatible licenses are not built. Packages that are individually | ||
3401 | licensed with the specified incompatible licenses will be deleted. | ||
3402 | |||
3403 | .. note:: | ||
3404 | |||
3405 | This functionality is only regularly tested using the following | ||
3406 | setting: | ||
3407 | :: | ||
3408 | |||
3409 | INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "GPL-3.0 LGPL-3.0 AGPL-3.0" | ||
3410 | |||
3411 | |||
3412 | Although you can use other settings, you might be required to | ||
3413 | remove dependencies on or provide alternatives to components that | ||
3414 | are required to produce a functional system image. | ||
3415 | |||
3416 | .. note:: | ||
3417 | |||
3418 | It is possible to define a list of licenses that are allowed to be | ||
3419 | used instead of the licenses that are excluded. To do this, define | ||
3420 | a variable ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` with the names of the licences | ||
3421 | that are allowed. Then define ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` as: | ||
3422 | :: | ||
3423 | |||
3424 | INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "${@' '.join(sorted(set(d.getVar('AVAILABLE_LICENSES').split()) - set(d.getVar('COMPATIBLE_LICENSES').split())))}" | ||
3425 | |||
3426 | |||
3427 | This will result in ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` containing the names of | ||
3428 | all licences from :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES` except the ones specified | ||
3429 | in ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` , thus only allowing the latter licences to | ||
3430 | be used. | ||
3431 | |||
3432 | :term:`INHERIT` | ||
3433 | Causes the named class or classes to be inherited globally. Anonymous | ||
3434 | functions in the class or classes are not executed for the base | ||
3435 | configuration and in each individual recipe. The OpenEmbedded build | ||
3436 | system ignores changes to ``INHERIT`` in individual recipes. | ||
3437 | |||
3438 | For more information on ``INHERIT``, see the | ||
3439 | :ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:\`\`inherit\`\` configuration directive`" | ||
3440 | section in the Bitbake User Manual. | ||
3441 | |||
3442 | :term:`INHERIT_DISTRO` | ||
3443 | Lists classes that will be inherited at the distribution level. It is | ||
3444 | unlikely that you want to edit this variable. | ||
3445 | |||
3446 | The default value of the variable is set as follows in the | ||
3447 | ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` file: | ||
3448 | :: | ||
3449 | |||
3450 | INHERIT_DISTRO ?= "debian devshell sstate license" | ||
3451 | |||
3452 | :term:`INHIBIT_DEFAULT_DEPS` | ||
3453 | Prevents the default dependencies, namely the C compiler and standard | ||
3454 | C library (libc), from being added to :term:`DEPENDS`. | ||
3455 | This variable is usually used within recipes that do not require any | ||
3456 | compilation using the C compiler. | ||
3457 | |||
3458 | Set the variable to "1" to prevent the default dependencies from | ||
3459 | being added. | ||
3460 | |||
3461 | :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT` | ||
3462 | Prevents the OpenEmbedded build system from splitting out debug | ||
3463 | information during packaging. By default, the build system splits out | ||
3464 | debugging information during the | ||
3465 | :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. For more information on | ||
3466 | how debug information is split out, see the | ||
3467 | :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE` | ||
3468 | variable. | ||
3469 | |||
3470 | To prevent the build system from splitting out debug information | ||
3471 | during packaging, set the ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT`` variable as | ||
3472 | follows: | ||
3473 | :: | ||
3474 | |||
3475 | INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT = "1" | ||
3476 | |||
3477 | :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP` | ||
3478 | If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in resulting | ||
3479 | packages and prevents the ``-dbg`` package from containing the source | ||
3480 | files. | ||
3481 | |||
3482 | By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries and puts | ||
3483 | the debugging symbols into ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-dbg``. | ||
3484 | Consequently, you should not set ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP`` when you | ||
3485 | plan to debug in general. | ||
3486 | |||
3487 | :term:`INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP` | ||
3488 | If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in the | ||
3489 | resulting sysroot. | ||
3490 | |||
3491 | By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries in the | ||
3492 | resulting sysroot. When you specifically set the | ||
3493 | ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable to "1" in your recipe, you inhibit | ||
3494 | this stripping. | ||
3495 | |||
3496 | If you want to use this variable, include the | ||
3497 | :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class. This class uses a | ||
3498 | ``sys_strip()`` function to test for the variable and acts | ||
3499 | accordingly. | ||
3500 | |||
3501 | .. note:: | ||
3502 | |||
3503 | Use of the ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable occurs in rare and | ||
3504 | special circumstances. For example, suppose you are building | ||
3505 | bare-metal firmware by using an external GCC toolchain. Furthermore, | ||
3506 | even if the toolchain's binaries are strippable, other files exist | ||
3507 | that are needed for the build that are not strippable. | ||
3508 | |||
3509 | :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES` | ||
3510 | Defines the format for the output image of an initial RAM filesystem | ||
3511 | (initramfs), which is used during boot. Supported formats are the | ||
3512 | same as those supported by the | ||
3513 | :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable. | ||
3514 | |||
3515 | The default value of this variable, which is set in the | ||
3516 | ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file in the | ||
3517 | :term:`Source Directory`, is "cpio.gz". The Linux kernel's | ||
3518 | initramfs mechanism, as opposed to the initial RAM filesystem | ||
3519 | `initrd <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Initrd>`__ mechanism, expects | ||
3520 | an optionally compressed cpio archive. | ||
3521 | |||
3522 | :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` | ||
3523 | Specifies the :term:`PROVIDES` name of an image | ||
3524 | recipe that is used to build an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) | ||
3525 | image. In other words, the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable causes an | ||
3526 | additional recipe to be built as a dependency to whatever root | ||
3527 | filesystem recipe you might be using (e.g. ``core-image-sato``). The | ||
3528 | initramfs image recipe you provide should set | ||
3529 | :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` to | ||
3530 | :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES`. | ||
3531 | |||
3532 | An initramfs image provides a temporary root filesystem used for | ||
3533 | early system initialization (e.g. loading of modules needed to locate | ||
3534 | and mount the "real" root filesystem). | ||
3535 | |||
3536 | .. note:: | ||
3537 | |||
3538 | See the ``meta/recipes-core/images/core-image-minimal-initramfs.bb`` | ||
3539 | recipe in the :term:`Source Directory` | ||
3540 | for an example initramfs recipe. To select this sample recipe as | ||
3541 | the one built to provide the initramfs image, set ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` | ||
3542 | to "core-image-minimal-initramfs". | ||
3543 | |||
3544 | You can also find more information by referencing the | ||
3545 | ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in | ||
3546 | the Source Directory, the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class, | ||
3547 | and the :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class to see how to use | ||
3548 | the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable. | ||
3549 | |||
3550 | If ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` is empty, which is the default, then no | ||
3551 | initramfs image is built. | ||
3552 | |||
3553 | For more information, you can also see the | ||
3554 | :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE` | ||
3555 | variable, which allows the generated image to be bundled inside the | ||
3556 | kernel image. Additionally, for information on creating an initramfs | ||
3557 | image, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section | ||
3558 | in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
3559 | |||
3560 | :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE` | ||
3561 | Controls whether or not the image recipe specified by | ||
3562 | :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` is run through an | ||
3563 | extra pass | ||
3564 | (:ref:`ref-tasks-bundle_initramfs`) during | ||
3565 | kernel compilation in order to build a single binary that contains | ||
3566 | both the kernel image and the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) | ||
3567 | image. This makes use of the | ||
3568 | :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` kernel | ||
3569 | feature. | ||
3570 | |||
3571 | .. note:: | ||
3572 | |||
3573 | Using an extra compilation pass to bundle the initramfs avoids a | ||
3574 | circular dependency between the kernel recipe and the initramfs | ||
3575 | recipe should the initramfs include kernel modules. Should that be | ||
3576 | the case, the initramfs recipe depends on the kernel for the | ||
3577 | kernel modules, and the kernel depends on the initramfs recipe | ||
3578 | since the initramfs is bundled inside the kernel image. | ||
3579 | |||
3580 | The combined binary is deposited into the ``tmp/deploy`` directory, | ||
3581 | which is part of the :term:`Build Directory`. | ||
3582 | |||
3583 | Setting the variable to "1" in a configuration file causes the | ||
3584 | OpenEmbedded build system to generate a kernel image with the | ||
3585 | initramfs specified in ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` bundled within: | ||
3586 | :: | ||
3587 | |||
3588 | INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE = "1" | ||
3589 | |||
3590 | By default, the | ||
3591 | :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class sets this variable to a | ||
3592 | null string as follows: | ||
3593 | :: | ||
3594 | |||
3595 | INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE ?= "" | ||
3596 | |||
3597 | .. note:: | ||
3598 | |||
3599 | You must set the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`` variable in a | ||
3600 | configuration file. You cannot set the variable in a recipe file. | ||
3601 | |||
3602 | See the | ||
3603 | :yocto_git:`local.conf.sample.extended </poky/tree/meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended>` | ||
3604 | file for additional information. Also, for information on creating an | ||
3605 | initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section | ||
3606 | in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
3607 | |||
3608 | :term:`INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME` | ||
3609 | The link name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is | ||
3610 | set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as | ||
3611 | follows: | ||
3612 | :: | ||
3613 | |||
3614 | INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" | ||
3615 | |||
3616 | The value of the | ||
3617 | ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same | ||
3618 | file, has the following value: | ||
3619 | :: | ||
3620 | |||
3621 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" | ||
3622 | |||
3623 | See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional | ||
3624 | information. | ||
3625 | |||
3626 | :term:`INITRAMFS_NAME` | ||
3627 | The base name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is | ||
3628 | set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as | ||
3629 | follows: | ||
3630 | :: | ||
3631 | |||
3632 | INITRAMFS_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" | ||
3633 | |||
3634 | The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` | ||
3635 | variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: | ||
3636 | :: | ||
3637 | |||
3638 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" | ||
3639 | |||
3640 | :term:`INITRD` | ||
3641 | Indicates list of filesystem images to concatenate and use as an | ||
3642 | initial RAM disk (``initrd``). | ||
3643 | |||
3644 | The ``INITRD`` variable is an optional variable used with the | ||
3645 | :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class. | ||
3646 | |||
3647 | :term:`INITRD_IMAGE` | ||
3648 | When building a "live" bootable image (i.e. when | ||
3649 | :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains "live"), | ||
3650 | ``INITRD_IMAGE`` specifies the image recipe that should be built to | ||
3651 | provide the initial RAM disk image. The default value is | ||
3652 | "core-image-minimal-initramfs". | ||
3653 | |||
3654 | See the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class for more | ||
3655 | information. | ||
3656 | |||
3657 | :term:`INITSCRIPT_NAME` | ||
3658 | The filename of the initialization script as installed to | ||
3659 | ``${sysconfdir}/init.d``. | ||
3660 | |||
3661 | This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``. | ||
3662 | The variable is mandatory. | ||
3663 | |||
3664 | :term:`INITSCRIPT_PACKAGES` | ||
3665 | A list of the packages that contain initscripts. If multiple packages | ||
3666 | are specified, you need to append the package name to the other | ||
3667 | ``INITSCRIPT_*`` as an override. | ||
3668 | |||
3669 | This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``. | ||
3670 | The variable is optional and defaults to the :term:`PN` | ||
3671 | variable. | ||
3672 | |||
3673 | :term:`INITSCRIPT_PARAMS` | ||
3674 | Specifies the options to pass to ``update-rc.d``. Here is an example: | ||
3675 | :: | ||
3676 | |||
3677 | INITSCRIPT_PARAMS = "start 99 5 2 . stop 20 0 1 6 ." | ||
3678 | |||
3679 | In this example, the script has a runlevel of 99, starts the script | ||
3680 | in initlevels 2 and 5, and stops the script in levels 0, 1 and 6. | ||
3681 | |||
3682 | The variable's default value is "defaults", which is set in the | ||
3683 | :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class. | ||
3684 | |||
3685 | The value in ``INITSCRIPT_PARAMS`` is passed through to the | ||
3686 | ``update-rc.d`` command. For more information on valid parameters, | ||
3687 | please see the ``update-rc.d`` manual page at | ||
3688 | https://manpages.debian.org/buster/init-system-helpers/update-rc.d.8.en.html | ||
3689 | |||
3690 | :term:`INSANE_SKIP` | ||
3691 | Specifies the QA checks to skip for a specific package within a | ||
3692 | recipe. For example, to skip the check for symbolic link ``.so`` | ||
3693 | files in the main package of a recipe, add the following to the | ||
3694 | recipe. The package name override must be used, which in this example | ||
3695 | is ``${PN}``: | ||
3696 | :: | ||
3697 | |||
3698 | INSANE_SKIP_${PN} += "dev-so" | ||
3699 | |||
3700 | See the ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section for a | ||
3701 | list of the valid QA checks you can specify using this variable. | ||
3702 | |||
3703 | :term:`INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE` | ||
3704 | By default, the ``tzdata`` recipe packages an ``/etc/timezone`` file. | ||
3705 | Set the ``INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE`` variable to "0" at the | ||
3706 | configuration level to disable this behavior. | ||
3707 | |||
3708 | :term:`IPK_FEED_URIS` | ||
3709 | When the IPK backend is in use and package management is enabled on | ||
3710 | the target, you can use this variable to set up ``opkg`` in the | ||
3711 | target image to point to package feeds on a nominated server. Once | ||
3712 | the feed is established, you can perform installations or upgrades | ||
3713 | using the package manager at runtime. | ||
3714 | |||
3715 | :term:`KARCH` | ||
3716 | Defines the kernel architecture used when assembling the | ||
3717 | configuration. Architectures supported for this release are: | ||
3718 | |||
3719 | - powerpc | ||
3720 | - i386 | ||
3721 | - x86_64 | ||
3722 | - arm | ||
3723 | - qemu | ||
3724 | - mips | ||
3725 | |||
3726 | You define the ``KARCH`` variable in the :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`. | ||
3727 | |||
3728 | :term:`KBRANCH` | ||
3729 | A regular expression used by the build process to explicitly identify | ||
3730 | the kernel branch that is validated, patched, and configured during a | ||
3731 | build. You must set this variable to ensure the exact kernel branch | ||
3732 | you want is being used by the build process. | ||
3733 | |||
3734 | Values for this variable are set in the kernel's recipe file and the | ||
3735 | kernel's append file. For example, if you are using the | ||
3736 | ``linux-yocto_4.12`` kernel, the kernel recipe file is the | ||
3737 | ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bb`` file. ``KBRANCH`` | ||
3738 | is set as follows in that kernel recipe file: | ||
3739 | :: | ||
3740 | |||
3741 | KBRANCH ?= "standard/base" | ||
3742 | |||
3743 | This variable is also used from the kernel's append file to identify | ||
3744 | the kernel branch specific to a particular machine or target | ||
3745 | hardware. Continuing with the previous kernel example, the kernel's | ||
3746 | append file (i.e. ``linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``) is located in the | ||
3747 | BSP layer for a given machine. For example, the append file for the | ||
3748 | Beaglebone, EdgeRouter, and generic versions of both 32 and 64-bit IA | ||
3749 | machines (``meta-yocto-bsp``) is named | ||
3750 | ``meta-yocto-bsp/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``. | ||
3751 | Here are the related statements from that append file: | ||
3752 | :: | ||
3753 | |||
3754 | KBRANCH_genericx86 = "standard/base" | ||
3755 | KBRANCH_genericx86-64 = "standard/base" | ||
3756 | KBRANCH_edgerouter = "standard/edgerouter" | ||
3757 | KBRANCH_beaglebone = "standard/beaglebone" | ||
3758 | |||
3759 | The ``KBRANCH`` statements | ||
3760 | identify the kernel branch to use when building for each supported | ||
3761 | BSP. | ||
3762 | |||
3763 | :term:`KBUILD_DEFCONFIG` | ||
3764 | When used with the :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>` | ||
3765 | class, specifies an "in-tree" kernel configuration file for use | ||
3766 | during a kernel build. | ||
3767 | |||
3768 | Typically, when using a ``defconfig`` to configure a kernel during a | ||
3769 | build, you place the file in your layer in the same manner as you | ||
3770 | would place patch files and configuration fragment files (i.e. | ||
3771 | "out-of-tree"). However, if you want to use a ``defconfig`` file that | ||
3772 | is part of the kernel tree (i.e. "in-tree"), you can use the | ||
3773 | ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable and append the | ||
3774 | :term:`KMACHINE` variable to point to the | ||
3775 | ``defconfig`` file. | ||
3776 | |||
3777 | To use the variable, set it in the append file for your kernel recipe | ||
3778 | using the following form: | ||
3779 | :: | ||
3780 | |||
3781 | KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_KMACHINE ?= defconfig_file | ||
3782 | |||
3783 | Here is an example from a "raspberrypi2" ``KMACHINE`` build that uses | ||
3784 | a ``defconfig`` file named "bcm2709_defconfig": | ||
3785 | :: | ||
3786 | |||
3787 | KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_raspberrypi2 = "bcm2709_defconfig" | ||
3788 | |||
3789 | As an alternative, you can use the following within your append file: | ||
3790 | :: | ||
3791 | |||
3792 | KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_pn-linux-yocto ?= defconfig_file | ||
3793 | |||
3794 | For more | ||
3795 | information on how to use the ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable, see the | ||
3796 | ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:using an "in-tree" \`\`defconfig\`\` file`" | ||
3797 | section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. | ||
3798 | |||
3799 | :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE` | ||
3800 | Specifies an alternate kernel image type for creation in addition to | ||
3801 | the kernel image type specified using the | ||
3802 | :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` variable. | ||
3803 | |||
3804 | :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` | ||
3805 | Specifies the name of all of the build artifacts. You can change the | ||
3806 | name of the artifacts by changing the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`` | ||
3807 | variable. | ||
3808 | |||
3809 | The value of ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME``, which is set in the | ||
3810 | ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file, has the | ||
3811 | following default value: | ||
3812 | :: | ||
3813 | |||
3814 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" | ||
3815 | |||
3816 | See the :term:`PKGE`, :term:`PKGV`, :term:`PKGR`, :term:`MACHINE` | ||
3817 | and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` variables for additional information. | ||
3818 | |||
3819 | :term:`KERNEL_CLASSES` | ||
3820 | A list of classes defining kernel image types that the | ||
3821 | :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class should inherit. You | ||
3822 | typically append this variable to enable extended image types. An | ||
3823 | example is the "kernel-fitimage", which enables fitImage support and | ||
3824 | resides in ``meta/classes/kernel-fitimage.bbclass``. You can register | ||
3825 | custom kernel image types with the ``kernel`` class using this | ||
3826 | variable. | ||
3827 | |||
3828 | :term:`KERNEL_DEVICETREE` | ||
3829 | Specifies the name of the generated Linux kernel device tree (i.e. | ||
3830 | the ``.dtb``) file. | ||
3831 | |||
3832 | .. note:: | ||
3833 | |||
3834 | Legacy support exists for specifying the full path to the device | ||
3835 | tree. However, providing just the ``.dtb`` file is preferred. | ||
3836 | |||
3837 | In order to use this variable, the | ||
3838 | :ref:`kernel-devicetree <ref-classes-kernel-devicetree>` class must | ||
3839 | be inherited. | ||
3840 | |||
3841 | :term:`KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME` | ||
3842 | The link name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable | ||
3843 | is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as | ||
3844 | follows: | ||
3845 | :: | ||
3846 | |||
3847 | KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" | ||
3848 | |||
3849 | The | ||
3850 | value of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in | ||
3851 | the same file, has the following value: | ||
3852 | :: | ||
3853 | |||
3854 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" | ||
3855 | |||
3856 | See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional | ||
3857 | information. | ||
3858 | |||
3859 | :term:`KERNEL_DTB_NAME` | ||
3860 | The base name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable | ||
3861 | is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as | ||
3862 | follows: | ||
3863 | :: | ||
3864 | |||
3865 | KERNEL_DTB_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" | ||
3866 | |||
3867 | The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` | ||
3868 | variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: | ||
3869 | :: | ||
3870 | |||
3871 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" | ||
3872 | |||
3873 | :term:`KERNEL_EXTRA_ARGS` | ||
3874 | Specifies additional ``make`` command-line arguments the OpenEmbedded | ||
3875 | build system passes on when compiling the kernel. | ||
3876 | |||
3877 | :term:`KERNEL_FEATURES` | ||
3878 | Includes additional kernel metadata. In the OpenEmbedded build | ||
3879 | system, the default Board Support Packages (BSPs) | ||
3880 | :term:`Metadata` is provided through the | ||
3881 | :term:`KMACHINE` and :term:`KBRANCH` | ||
3882 | variables. You can use the ``KERNEL_FEATURES`` variable from within | ||
3883 | the kernel recipe or kernel append file to further add metadata for | ||
3884 | all BSPs or specific BSPs. | ||
3885 | |||
3886 | The metadata you add through this variable includes config fragments | ||
3887 | and features descriptions, which usually includes patches as well as | ||
3888 | config fragments. You typically override the ``KERNEL_FEATURES`` | ||
3889 | variable for a specific machine. In this way, you can provide | ||
3890 | validated, but optional, sets of kernel configurations and features. | ||
3891 | |||
3892 | For example, the following example from the ``linux-yocto-rt_4.12`` | ||
3893 | kernel recipe adds "netfilter" and "taskstats" features to all BSPs | ||
3894 | as well as "virtio" configurations to all QEMU machines. The last two | ||
3895 | statements add specific configurations to targeted machine types: | ||
3896 | :: | ||
3897 | |||
3898 | KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES ?= "features/netfilter/netfilter.scc features/taskstats/taskstats.scc" | ||
3899 | KERNEL_FEATURES_append = "${KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES}" | ||
3900 | KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemuall = "cfg/virtio.scc" | ||
3901 | KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86 = " cfg/sound.scc cfg/paravirt_kvm.scc" | ||
3902 | KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86-64 = "cfg/sound.scc" | ||
3903 | |||
3904 | :term:`KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME` | ||
3905 | The link name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This | ||
3906 | variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` | ||
3907 | file as follows: | ||
3908 | :: | ||
3909 | |||
3910 | KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" | ||
3911 | |||
3912 | The value of the | ||
3913 | ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same | ||
3914 | file, has the following value: | ||
3915 | :: | ||
3916 | |||
3917 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" | ||
3918 | |||
3919 | See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional | ||
3920 | information. | ||
3921 | |||
3922 | :term:`KERNEL_FIT_NAME` | ||
3923 | The base name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This | ||
3924 | variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` | ||
3925 | file as follows: | ||
3926 | :: | ||
3927 | |||
3928 | KERNEL_FIT_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" | ||
3929 | |||
3930 | The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` | ||
3931 | variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value: | ||
3932 | :: | ||
3933 | |||
3934 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" | ||
3935 | |||
3936 | :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME` | ||
3937 | The link name for the kernel image. This variable is set in the | ||
3938 | ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: | ||
3939 | :: | ||
3940 | |||
3941 | KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" | ||
3942 | |||
3943 | The value of | ||
3944 | the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same | ||
3945 | file, has the following value: | ||
3946 | :: | ||
3947 | |||
3948 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" | ||
3949 | |||
3950 | See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional | ||
3951 | information. | ||
3952 | |||
3953 | :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE` | ||
3954 | Specifies the maximum size of the kernel image file in kilobytes. If | ||
3955 | ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is set, the size of the kernel image file is | ||
3956 | checked against the set value during the | ||
3957 | :ref:`ref-tasks-sizecheck` task. The task fails if | ||
3958 | the kernel image file is larger than the setting. | ||
3959 | |||
3960 | ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is useful for target devices that have a | ||
3961 | limited amount of space in which the kernel image must be stored. | ||
3962 | |||
3963 | By default, this variable is not set, which means the size of the | ||
3964 | kernel image is not checked. | ||
3965 | |||
3966 | :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME` | ||
3967 | The base name of the kernel image. This variable is set in the | ||
3968 | ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: | ||
3969 | :: | ||
3970 | |||
3971 | KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" | ||
3972 | |||
3973 | The value of the | ||
3974 | :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable, | ||
3975 | which is set in the same file, has the following value: | ||
3976 | :: | ||
3977 | |||
3978 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" | ||
3979 | |||
3980 | :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` | ||
3981 | The type of kernel to build for a device, usually set by the machine | ||
3982 | configuration files and defaults to "zImage". This variable is used | ||
3983 | when building the kernel and is passed to ``make`` as the target to | ||
3984 | build. | ||
3985 | |||
3986 | If you want to build an alternate kernel image type, use the | ||
3987 | :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE` variable. | ||
3988 | |||
3989 | :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` | ||
3990 | Lists kernel modules that need to be auto-loaded during boot. | ||
3991 | |||
3992 | .. note:: | ||
3993 | |||
3994 | This variable replaces the deprecated :term:`module_autoload` | ||
3995 | variable. | ||
3996 | |||
3997 | You can use the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` variable anywhere that it | ||
3998 | can be recognized by the kernel recipe or by an out-of-tree kernel | ||
3999 | module recipe (e.g. a machine configuration file, a distribution | ||
4000 | configuration file, an append file for the recipe, or the recipe | ||
4001 | itself). | ||
4002 | |||
4003 | Specify it as follows: | ||
4004 | :: | ||
4005 | |||
4006 | KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name1 module_name2 module_name3" | ||
4007 | |||
4008 | Including ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` causes the OpenEmbedded build | ||
4009 | system to populate the ``/etc/modules-load.d/modname.conf`` file with | ||
4010 | the list of modules to be auto-loaded on boot. The modules appear | ||
4011 | one-per-line in the file. Here is an example of the most common use | ||
4012 | case: | ||
4013 | :: | ||
4014 | |||
4015 | KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name" | ||
4016 | |||
4017 | For information on how to populate the ``modname.conf`` file with | ||
4018 | ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF` variable. | ||
4019 | |||
4020 | :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF` | ||
4021 | Provides a list of modules for which the OpenEmbedded build system | ||
4022 | expects to find ``module_conf_``\ modname values that specify | ||
4023 | configuration for each of the modules. For information on how to | ||
4024 | provide those module configurations, see the | ||
4025 | :term:`module_conf_* <module_conf>` variable. | ||
4026 | |||
4027 | :term:`KERNEL_PATH` | ||
4028 | The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value | ||
4029 | of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within | ||
4030 | the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on | ||
4031 | how this variable is used, see the | ||
4032 | ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`" | ||
4033 | section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. | ||
4034 | |||
4035 | To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build | ||
4036 | modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the | ||
4037 | :term:`KERNEL_SRC` variable, which is identical to | ||
4038 | the ``KERNEL_PATH`` variable. Both variables are common variables | ||
4039 | used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory. | ||
4040 | |||
4041 | :term:`KERNEL_SRC` | ||
4042 | The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value | ||
4043 | of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within | ||
4044 | the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on | ||
4045 | how this variable is used, see the | ||
4046 | ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`" | ||
4047 | section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual. | ||
4048 | |||
4049 | To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build | ||
4050 | modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the | ||
4051 | :term:`KERNEL_PATH` variable, which is identical | ||
4052 | to the ``KERNEL_SRC`` variable. Both variables are common variables | ||
4053 | used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory. | ||
4054 | |||
4055 | :term:`KERNEL_VERSION` | ||
4056 | Specifies the version of the kernel as extracted from ``version.h`` | ||
4057 | or ``utsrelease.h`` within the kernel sources. Effects of setting | ||
4058 | this variable do not take affect until the kernel has been | ||
4059 | configured. Consequently, attempting to refer to this variable in | ||
4060 | contexts prior to configuration will not work. | ||
4061 | |||
4062 | :term:`KERNELDEPMODDEPEND` | ||
4063 | Specifies whether the data referenced through | ||
4064 | :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` is needed or not. The | ||
4065 | ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` does not control whether or not that data | ||
4066 | exists, but simply whether or not it is used. If you do not need to | ||
4067 | use the data, set the ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` variable in your | ||
4068 | ``initramfs`` recipe. Setting the variable there when the data is not | ||
4069 | needed avoids a potential dependency loop. | ||
4070 | |||
4071 | :term:`KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION` | ||
4072 | Provides a short description of a configuration fragment. You use | ||
4073 | this variable in the ``.scc`` file that describes a configuration | ||
4074 | fragment file. Here is the variable used in a file named ``smp.scc`` | ||
4075 | to describe SMP being enabled: | ||
4076 | :: | ||
4077 | |||
4078 | define KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION "Enable SMP" | ||
4079 | |||
4080 | :term:`KMACHINE` | ||
4081 | The machine as known by the kernel. Sometimes the machine name used | ||
4082 | by the kernel does not match the machine name used by the | ||
4083 | OpenEmbedded build system. For example, the machine name that the | ||
4084 | OpenEmbedded build system understands as ``core2-32-intel-common`` | ||
4085 | goes by a different name in the Linux Yocto kernel. The kernel | ||
4086 | understands that machine as ``intel-core2-32``. For cases like these, | ||
4087 | the ``KMACHINE`` variable maps the kernel machine name to the | ||
4088 | OpenEmbedded build system machine name. | ||
4089 | |||
4090 | These mappings between different names occur in the Yocto Linux | ||
4091 | Kernel's ``meta`` branch. As an example take a look in the | ||
4092 | ``common/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.19.bbappend`` file: | ||
4093 | :: | ||
4094 | |||
4095 | LINUX_VERSION_core2-32-intel-common = "3.19.0" | ||
4096 | COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "${MACHINE}" | ||
4097 | SRCREV_meta_core2-32-intel-common = "8897ef68b30e7426bc1d39895e71fb155d694974" | ||
4098 | SRCREV_machine_core2-32-intel-common = "43b9eced9ba8a57add36af07736344dcc383f711" | ||
4099 | KMACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "intel-core2-32" | ||
4100 | KBRANCH_core2-32-intel-common = "standard/base" | ||
4101 | KERNEL_FEATURES_append_core2-32-intel-common = "${KERNEL_FEATURES_INTEL_COMMON}" | ||
4102 | |||
4103 | The ``KMACHINE`` statement says | ||
4104 | that the kernel understands the machine name as "intel-core2-32". | ||
4105 | However, the OpenEmbedded build system understands the machine as | ||
4106 | "core2-32-intel-common". | ||
4107 | |||
4108 | :term:`KTYPE` | ||
4109 | Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration. | ||
4110 | The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt" | ||
4111 | kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`" | ||
4112 | section in the | ||
4113 | Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on | ||
4114 | kernel types. | ||
4115 | |||
4116 | You define the ``KTYPE`` variable in the | ||
4117 | :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`. The | ||
4118 | value you use must match the value used for the | ||
4119 | :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE` value used by the | ||
4120 | kernel recipe. | ||
4121 | |||
4122 | :term:`LABELS` | ||
4123 | Provides a list of targets for automatic configuration. | ||
4124 | |||
4125 | See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more | ||
4126 | information on how this variable is used. | ||
4127 | |||
4128 | :term:`LAYERDEPENDS` | ||
4129 | Lists the layers, separated by spaces, on which this recipe depends. | ||
4130 | Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a dependency | ||
4131 | by adding it to the end of the layer name. Here is an example: | ||
4132 | :: | ||
4133 | |||
4134 | LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)" | ||
4135 | |||
4136 | In this previous example, | ||
4137 | version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared against | ||
4138 | :term:`LAYERVERSION`\ ``_anotherlayer``. | ||
4139 | |||
4140 | An error is produced if any dependency is missing or the version | ||
4141 | numbers (if specified) do not match exactly. This variable is used in | ||
4142 | the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the name of | ||
4143 | the specific layer (e.g. ``LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer``). | ||
4144 | |||
4145 | :term:`LAYERDIR` | ||
4146 | When used inside the ``layer.conf`` configuration file, this variable | ||
4147 | provides the path of the current layer. This variable is not | ||
4148 | available outside of ``layer.conf`` and references are expanded | ||
4149 | immediately when parsing of the file completes. | ||
4150 | |||
4151 | :term:`LAYERRECOMMENDS` | ||
4152 | Lists the layers, separated by spaces, recommended for use with this | ||
4153 | layer. | ||
4154 | |||
4155 | Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a | ||
4156 | recommendation by adding the version to the end of the layer name. | ||
4157 | Here is an example: | ||
4158 | :: | ||
4159 | |||
4160 | LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)" | ||
4161 | |||
4162 | In this previous example, version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared | ||
4163 | against ``LAYERVERSION_anotherlayer``. | ||
4164 | |||
4165 | This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be | ||
4166 | suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g. | ||
4167 | ``LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer``). | ||
4168 | |||
4169 | :term:`LAYERSERIES_COMPAT` | ||
4170 | Lists the versions of the :term:`OpenEmbedded-Core (OE-Core)` for which | ||
4171 | a layer is compatible. Using the ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` variable | ||
4172 | allows the layer maintainer to indicate which combinations of the | ||
4173 | layer and OE-Core can be expected to work. The variable gives the | ||
4174 | system a way to detect when a layer has not been tested with new | ||
4175 | releases of OE-Core (e.g. the layer is not maintained). | ||
4176 | |||
4177 | To specify the OE-Core versions for which a layer is compatible, use | ||
4178 | this variable in your layer's ``conf/layer.conf`` configuration file. | ||
4179 | For the list, use the Yocto Project | ||
4180 | :yocto_wiki:`Release Name </Releases>` (e.g. | ||
4181 | DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP). To specify multiple OE-Core versions for the | ||
4182 | layer, use a space-separated list: | ||
4183 | :: | ||
4184 | |||
4185 | LAYERSERIES_COMPAT_layer_root_name = "DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP_MINUS_ONE" | ||
4186 | |||
4187 | .. note:: | ||
4188 | |||
4189 | Setting ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` is required by the Yocto Project | ||
4190 | Compatible version 2 standard. | ||
4191 | The OpenEmbedded build system produces a warning if the variable | ||
4192 | is not set for any given layer. | ||
4193 | |||
4194 | See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating your own layer`" | ||
4195 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
4196 | |||
4197 | :term:`LAYERVERSION` | ||
4198 | Optionally specifies the version of a layer as a single number. You | ||
4199 | can use this within :term:`LAYERDEPENDS` for | ||
4200 | another layer in order to depend on a specific version of the layer. | ||
4201 | This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be | ||
4202 | suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g. | ||
4203 | ``LAYERVERSION_mylayer``). | ||
4204 | |||
4205 | :term:`LD` | ||
4206 | The minimal command and arguments used to run the linker. | ||
4207 | |||
4208 | :term:`LDFLAGS` | ||
4209 | Specifies the flags to pass to the linker. This variable is exported | ||
4210 | to an environment variable and thus made visible to the software | ||
4211 | being built during the compilation step. | ||
4212 | |||
4213 | Default initialization for ``LDFLAGS`` varies depending on what is | ||
4214 | being built: | ||
4215 | |||
4216 | - :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS` when building for the | ||
4217 | target | ||
4218 | |||
4219 | - :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS` when building for the | ||
4220 | build host (i.e. ``-native``) | ||
4221 | |||
4222 | - :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS` when building for | ||
4223 | an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``) | ||
4224 | |||
4225 | :term:`LEAD_SONAME` | ||
4226 | Specifies the lead (or primary) compiled library file (i.e. ``.so``) | ||
4227 | that the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class applies its | ||
4228 | naming policy to given a recipe that packages multiple libraries. | ||
4229 | |||
4230 | This variable works in conjunction with the ``debian`` class. | ||
4231 | |||
4232 | :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` | ||
4233 | Checksums of the license text in the recipe source code. | ||
4234 | |||
4235 | This variable tracks changes in license text of the source code | ||
4236 | files. If the license text is changed, it will trigger a build | ||
4237 | failure, which gives the developer an opportunity to review any | ||
4238 | license change. | ||
4239 | |||
4240 | This variable must be defined for all recipes (unless | ||
4241 | :term:`LICENSE` is set to "CLOSED"). | ||
4242 | |||
4243 | For more information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:tracking license changes`" | ||
4244 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
4245 | |||
4246 | :term:`LICENSE` | ||
4247 | The list of source licenses for the recipe. Follow these rules: | ||
4248 | |||
4249 | - Do not use spaces within individual license names. | ||
4250 | |||
4251 | - Separate license names using \| (pipe) when there is a choice | ||
4252 | between licenses. | ||
4253 | |||
4254 | - Separate license names using & (ampersand) when multiple licenses | ||
4255 | exist that cover different parts of the source. | ||
4256 | |||
4257 | - You can use spaces between license names. | ||
4258 | |||
4259 | - For standard licenses, use the names of the files in | ||
4260 | ``meta/files/common-licenses/`` or the | ||
4261 | :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP` flag names defined in | ||
4262 | ``meta/conf/licenses.conf``. | ||
4263 | |||
4264 | Here are some examples: | ||
4265 | :: | ||
4266 | |||
4267 | LICENSE = "LGPLv2.1 | GPLv3" | ||
4268 | LICENSE = "MPL-1 & LGPLv2.1" | ||
4269 | LICENSE = "GPLv2+" | ||
4270 | |||
4271 | The first example is from the | ||
4272 | recipes for Qt, which the user may choose to distribute under either | ||
4273 | the LGPL version 2.1 or GPL version 3. The second example is from | ||
4274 | Cairo where two licenses cover different parts of the source code. | ||
4275 | The final example is from ``sysstat``, which presents a single | ||
4276 | license. | ||
4277 | |||
4278 | You can also specify licenses on a per-package basis to handle | ||
4279 | situations where components of the output have different licenses. | ||
4280 | For example, a piece of software whose code is licensed under GPLv2 | ||
4281 | but has accompanying documentation licensed under the GNU Free | ||
4282 | Documentation License 1.2 could be specified as follows: | ||
4283 | :: | ||
4284 | |||
4285 | LICENSE = "GFDL-1.2 & GPLv2" | ||
4286 | LICENSE_${PN} = "GPLv2" | ||
4287 | LICENSE_${PN}-doc = "GFDL-1.2" | ||
4288 | |||
4289 | :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` | ||
4290 | Setting ``LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE`` to "1" causes the OpenEmbedded | ||
4291 | build system to create an extra package (i.e. | ||
4292 | ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-lic``) for each recipe and to add | ||
4293 | those packages to the | ||
4294 | :term:`RRECOMMENDS`\ ``_${PN}``. | ||
4295 | |||
4296 | The ``${PN}-lic`` package installs a directory in | ||
4297 | ``/usr/share/licenses`` named ``${PN}``, which is the recipe's base | ||
4298 | name, and installs files in that directory that contain license and | ||
4299 | copyright information (i.e. copies of the appropriate license files | ||
4300 | from ``meta/common-licenses`` that match the licenses specified in | ||
4301 | the :term:`LICENSE` variable of the recipe metadata | ||
4302 | and copies of files marked in | ||
4303 | :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` as containing | ||
4304 | license text). | ||
4305 | |||
4306 | For related information on providing license text, see the | ||
4307 | :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` variable, the | ||
4308 | :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, and the | ||
4309 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`" | ||
4310 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
4311 | |||
4312 | :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` | ||
4313 | Specifies additional flags for a recipe you must whitelist through | ||
4314 | :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST` in | ||
4315 | order to allow the recipe to be built. When providing multiple flags, | ||
4316 | separate them with spaces. | ||
4317 | |||
4318 | This value is independent of :term:`LICENSE` and is | ||
4319 | typically used to mark recipes that might require additional licenses | ||
4320 | in order to be used in a commercial product. For more information, | ||
4321 | see the | ||
4322 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`" | ||
4323 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
4324 | |||
4325 | :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST` | ||
4326 | Lists license flags that when specified in | ||
4327 | :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` within a recipe should not | ||
4328 | prevent that recipe from being built. This practice is otherwise | ||
4329 | known as "whitelisting" license flags. For more information, see the | ||
4330 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`" | ||
4331 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
4332 | |||
4333 | :term:`LICENSE_PATH` | ||
4334 | Path to additional licenses used during the build. By default, the | ||
4335 | OpenEmbedded build system uses ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` to define the | ||
4336 | directory that holds common license text used during the build. The | ||
4337 | ``LICENSE_PATH`` variable allows you to extend that location to other | ||
4338 | areas that have additional licenses: | ||
4339 | :: | ||
4340 | |||
4341 | LICENSE_PATH += "path-to-additional-common-licenses" | ||
4342 | |||
4343 | :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE` | ||
4344 | Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration. | ||
4345 | The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt" | ||
4346 | kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`" | ||
4347 | section in the | ||
4348 | Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on | ||
4349 | kernel types. | ||
4350 | |||
4351 | If you do not specify a ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE``, it defaults to | ||
4352 | "standard". Together with :term:`KMACHINE`, the | ||
4353 | ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE`` variable defines the search arguments used by | ||
4354 | the kernel tools to find the appropriate description within the | ||
4355 | kernel :term:`Metadata` with which to build out the sources | ||
4356 | and configuration. | ||
4357 | |||
4358 | :term:`LINUX_VERSION` | ||
4359 | The Linux version from ``kernel.org`` on which the Linux kernel image | ||
4360 | being built using the OpenEmbedded build system is based. You define | ||
4361 | this variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the | ||
4362 | ``linux-yocto-3.4.bb`` kernel recipe found in | ||
4363 | ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux`` defines the variables as follows: | ||
4364 | :: | ||
4365 | |||
4366 | LINUX_VERSION ?= "3.4.24" | ||
4367 | |||
4368 | The ``LINUX_VERSION`` variable is used to define :term:`PV` | ||
4369 | for the recipe: | ||
4370 | :: | ||
4371 | |||
4372 | PV = "${LINUX_VERSION}+git${SRCPV}" | ||
4373 | |||
4374 | :term:`LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION` | ||
4375 | A string extension compiled into the version string of the Linux | ||
4376 | kernel built with the OpenEmbedded build system. You define this | ||
4377 | variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the linux-yocto kernel | ||
4378 | recipes all define the variable as follows: | ||
4379 | :: | ||
4380 | |||
4381 | LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION ?= "-yocto-${LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE}" | ||
4382 | |||
4383 | Defining this variable essentially sets the Linux kernel | ||
4384 | configuration item ``CONFIG_LOCALVERSION``, which is visible through | ||
4385 | the ``uname`` command. Here is an example that shows the extension | ||
4386 | assuming it was set as previously shown: | ||
4387 | :: | ||
4388 | |||
4389 | $ uname -r | ||
4390 | 3.7.0-rc8-custom | ||
4391 | |||
4392 | :term:`LOG_DIR` | ||
4393 | Specifies the directory to which the OpenEmbedded build system writes | ||
4394 | overall log files. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/log``. | ||
4395 | |||
4396 | For the directory containing logs specific to each task, see the | ||
4397 | :term:`T` variable. | ||
4398 | |||
4399 | :term:`MACHINE` | ||
4400 | Specifies the target device for which the image is built. You define | ||
4401 | ``MACHINE`` in the ``local.conf`` file found in the | ||
4402 | :term:`Build Directory`. By default, ``MACHINE`` is set to | ||
4403 | "qemux86", which is an x86-based architecture machine to be emulated | ||
4404 | using QEMU: | ||
4405 | :: | ||
4406 | |||
4407 | MACHINE ?= "qemux86" | ||
4408 | |||
4409 | The variable corresponds to a machine configuration file of the same | ||
4410 | name, through which machine-specific configurations are set. Thus, | ||
4411 | when ``MACHINE`` is set to "qemux86" there exists the corresponding | ||
4412 | ``qemux86.conf`` machine configuration file, which can be found in | ||
4413 | the :term:`Source Directory` in | ||
4414 | ``meta/conf/machine``. | ||
4415 | |||
4416 | The list of machines supported by the Yocto Project as shipped | ||
4417 | include the following: | ||
4418 | :: | ||
4419 | |||
4420 | MACHINE ?= "qemuarm" | ||
4421 | MACHINE ?= "qemuarm64" | ||
4422 | MACHINE ?= "qemumips" | ||
4423 | MACHINE ?= "qemumips64" | ||
4424 | MACHINE ?= "qemuppc" | ||
4425 | MACHINE ?= "qemux86" | ||
4426 | MACHINE ?= "qemux86-64" | ||
4427 | MACHINE ?= "genericx86" | ||
4428 | MACHINE ?= "genericx86-64" | ||
4429 | MACHINE ?= "beaglebone" | ||
4430 | MACHINE ?= "edgerouter" | ||
4431 | |||
4432 | The last five are Yocto Project reference hardware | ||
4433 | boards, which are provided in the ``meta-yocto-bsp`` layer. | ||
4434 | |||
4435 | .. note:: | ||
4436 | |||
4437 | Adding additional Board Support Package (BSP) layers to your | ||
4438 | configuration adds new possible settings for ``MACHINE``. | ||
4439 | |||
4440 | :term:`MACHINE_ARCH` | ||
4441 | Specifies the name of the machine-specific architecture. This | ||
4442 | variable is set automatically from :term:`MACHINE` or | ||
4443 | :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH`. You should not hand-edit | ||
4444 | the ``MACHINE_ARCH`` variable. | ||
4445 | |||
4446 | :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` | ||
4447 | A list of required machine-specific packages to install as part of | ||
4448 | the image being built. The build process depends on these packages | ||
4449 | being present. Furthermore, because this is a "machine-essential" | ||
4450 | variable, the list of packages are essential for the machine to boot. | ||
4451 | The impact of this variable affects images based on | ||
4452 | ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal`` | ||
4453 | image. | ||
4454 | |||
4455 | This variable is similar to the | ||
4456 | ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable with the exception | ||
4457 | that the image being built has a build dependency on the variable's | ||
4458 | list of packages. In other words, the image will not build if a file | ||
4459 | in this list is not found. | ||
4460 | |||
4461 | As an example, suppose the machine for which you are building | ||
4462 | requires ``example-init`` to be run during boot to initialize the | ||
4463 | hardware. In this case, you would use the following in the machine's | ||
4464 | ``.conf`` configuration file: | ||
4465 | :: | ||
4466 | |||
4467 | MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "example-init" | ||
4468 | |||
4469 | :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` | ||
4470 | A list of recommended machine-specific packages to install as part of | ||
4471 | the image being built. The build process does not depend on these | ||
4472 | packages being present. However, because this is a | ||
4473 | "machine-essential" variable, the list of packages are essential for | ||
4474 | the machine to boot. The impact of this variable affects images based | ||
4475 | on ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal`` | ||
4476 | image. | ||
4477 | |||
4478 | This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` | ||
4479 | variable with the exception that the image being built does not have | ||
4480 | a build dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other | ||
4481 | words, the image will still build if a package in this list is not | ||
4482 | found. Typically, this variable is used to handle essential kernel | ||
4483 | modules, whose functionality may be selected to be built into the | ||
4484 | kernel rather than as a module, in which case a package will not be | ||
4485 | produced. | ||
4486 | |||
4487 | Consider an example where you have a custom kernel where a specific | ||
4488 | touchscreen driver is required for the machine to be usable. However, | ||
4489 | the driver can be built as a module or into the kernel depending on | ||
4490 | the kernel configuration. If the driver is built as a module, you | ||
4491 | want it to be installed. But, when the driver is built into the | ||
4492 | kernel, you still want the build to succeed. This variable sets up a | ||
4493 | "recommends" relationship so that in the latter case, the build will | ||
4494 | not fail due to the missing package. To accomplish this, assuming the | ||
4495 | package for the module was called ``kernel-module-ab123``, you would | ||
4496 | use the following in the machine's ``.conf`` configuration file: | ||
4497 | :: | ||
4498 | |||
4499 | MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-ab123" | ||
4500 | |||
4501 | .. note:: | ||
4502 | |||
4503 | In this example, the ``kernel-module-ab123`` recipe needs to | ||
4504 | explicitly set its :term:`PACKAGES` variable to ensure that BitBake | ||
4505 | does not use the kernel recipe's :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variable to | ||
4506 | satisfy the dependency. | ||
4507 | |||
4508 | Some examples of these machine essentials are flash, screen, | ||
4509 | keyboard, mouse, or touchscreen drivers (depending on the machine). | ||
4510 | |||
4511 | :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS` | ||
4512 | A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image | ||
4513 | being built that are not essential for the machine to boot. However, | ||
4514 | the build process for more fully-featured images depends on the | ||
4515 | packages being present. | ||
4516 | |||
4517 | This variable affects all images based on ``packagegroup-base``, | ||
4518 | which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or | ||
4519 | ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images. | ||
4520 | |||
4521 | The variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable | ||
4522 | with the exception that the image being built has a build dependency | ||
4523 | on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the image will | ||
4524 | not build if a file in this list is not found. | ||
4525 | |||
4526 | An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential | ||
4527 | for the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a | ||
4528 | more fully-featured image, you want to enable the WiFi. The package | ||
4529 | containing the firmware for the WiFi hardware is always expected to | ||
4530 | exist, so it is acceptable for the build process to depend upon | ||
4531 | finding the package. In this case, assuming the package for the | ||
4532 | firmware was called ``wifidriver-firmware``, you would use the | ||
4533 | following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine: | ||
4534 | :: | ||
4535 | |||
4536 | MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "wifidriver-firmware" | ||
4537 | |||
4538 | :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS` | ||
4539 | A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image | ||
4540 | being built that are not essential for booting the machine. The image | ||
4541 | being built has no build dependency on this list of packages. | ||
4542 | |||
4543 | This variable affects only images based on ``packagegroup-base``, | ||
4544 | which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or | ||
4545 | ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images. | ||
4546 | |||
4547 | This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` variable | ||
4548 | with the exception that the image being built does not have a build | ||
4549 | dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the | ||
4550 | image will build if a file in this list is not found. | ||
4551 | |||
4552 | An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential | ||
4553 | For the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a | ||
4554 | more fully-featured image, you want to enable WiFi. In this case, the | ||
4555 | package containing the WiFi kernel module will not be produced if the | ||
4556 | WiFi driver is built into the kernel, in which case you still want | ||
4557 | the build to succeed instead of failing as a result of the package | ||
4558 | not being found. To accomplish this, assuming the package for the | ||
4559 | module was called ``kernel-module-examplewifi``, you would use the | ||
4560 | following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine: | ||
4561 | :: | ||
4562 | |||
4563 | MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-examplewifi" | ||
4564 | |||
4565 | :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` | ||
4566 | Specifies the list of hardware features the | ||
4567 | :term:`MACHINE` is capable of supporting. For related | ||
4568 | information on enabling features, see the | ||
4569 | :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`, | ||
4570 | :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES`, and | ||
4571 | :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variables. | ||
4572 | |||
4573 | For a list of hardware features supported by the Yocto Project as | ||
4574 | shipped, see the ":ref:`ref-features-machine`" section. | ||
4575 | |||
4576 | :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL` | ||
4577 | Features to be added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES`` if not also present in | ||
4578 | ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``. | ||
4579 | |||
4580 | This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is | ||
4581 | not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference | ||
4582 | the variable to see which machine features are being backfilled for | ||
4583 | all machine configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" | ||
4584 | section for more information. | ||
4585 | |||
4586 | :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED` | ||
4587 | Features from ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be | ||
4588 | backfilled (i.e. added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES``) during the build. See | ||
4589 | the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information. | ||
4590 | |||
4591 | :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES` | ||
4592 | A colon-separated list of overrides that apply to the current | ||
4593 | machine. By default, this list includes the value of | ||
4594 | :term:`MACHINE`. | ||
4595 | |||
4596 | You can extend ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that | ||
4597 | should apply to a machine. For example, all machines emulated in QEMU | ||
4598 | (e.g. ``qemuarm``, ``qemux86``, and so forth) include a file named | ||
4599 | ``meta/conf/machine/include/qemu.inc`` that prepends the following | ||
4600 | override to ``MACHINEOVERRIDES``: | ||
4601 | :: | ||
4602 | |||
4603 | MACHINEOVERRIDES =. "qemuall:" | ||
4604 | |||
4605 | This | ||
4606 | override allows variables to be overridden for all machines emulated | ||
4607 | in QEMU, like in the following example from the ``connman-conf`` | ||
4608 | recipe: | ||
4609 | :: | ||
4610 | |||
4611 | SRC_URI_append_qemuall = " file://wired.config \ | ||
4612 | file://wired-setup \ | ||
4613 | " | ||
4614 | |||
4615 | The underlying mechanism behind | ||
4616 | ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` is simply that it is included in the default | ||
4617 | value of :term:`OVERRIDES`. | ||
4618 | |||
4619 | :term:`MAINTAINER` | ||
4620 | The email address of the distribution maintainer. | ||
4621 | |||
4622 | :term:`MIRRORS` | ||
4623 | Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system | ||
4624 | gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it | ||
4625 | first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the | ||
4626 | build system tries locations defined by | ||
4627 | :term:`PREMIRRORS`, the upstream source, and then | ||
4628 | locations specified by ``MIRRORS`` in that order. | ||
4629 | |||
4630 | Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky", | ||
4631 | the default value for ``MIRRORS`` is defined in the | ||
4632 | ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository. | ||
4633 | |||
4634 | :term:`MLPREFIX` | ||
4635 | Specifies a prefix has been added to :term:`PN` to create a | ||
4636 | special version of a recipe or package (i.e. a Multilib version). The | ||
4637 | variable is used in places where the prefix needs to be added to or | ||
4638 | removed from a the name (e.g. the :term:`BPN` variable). | ||
4639 | ``MLPREFIX`` gets set when a prefix has been added to ``PN``. | ||
4640 | |||
4641 | .. note:: | ||
4642 | |||
4643 | The "ML" in ``MLPREFIX`` stands for "MultiLib". This representation is | ||
4644 | historical and comes from a time when ``nativesdk`` was a suffix | ||
4645 | rather than a prefix on the recipe name. When ``nativesdk`` was turned | ||
4646 | into a prefix, it made sense to set ``MLPREFIX`` for it as well. | ||
4647 | |||
4648 | To help understand when ``MLPREFIX`` might be needed, consider when | ||
4649 | :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` is used to provide a | ||
4650 | ``nativesdk`` version of a recipe in addition to the target version. | ||
4651 | If that recipe declares build-time dependencies on tasks in other | ||
4652 | recipes by using :term:`DEPENDS`, then a dependency on | ||
4653 | "foo" will automatically get rewritten to a dependency on | ||
4654 | "nativesdk-foo". However, dependencies like the following will not | ||
4655 | get rewritten automatically: | ||
4656 | :: | ||
4657 | |||
4658 | do_foo[depends] += "recipe:do_foo" | ||
4659 | |||
4660 | If you want such a dependency to also get transformed, you can do the | ||
4661 | following: | ||
4662 | :: | ||
4663 | |||
4664 | do_foo[depends] += "${MLPREFIX}recipe:do_foo" | ||
4665 | |||
4666 | module_autoload | ||
4667 | This variable has been replaced by the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` | ||
4668 | variable. You should replace all occurrences of ``module_autoload`` | ||
4669 | with additions to ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD``, for example: | ||
4670 | :: | ||
4671 | |||
4672 | module_autoload_rfcomm = "rfcomm" | ||
4673 | |||
4674 | should now be replaced with: | ||
4675 | :: | ||
4676 | |||
4677 | KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "rfcomm" | ||
4678 | |||
4679 | See the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable for more information. | ||
4680 | |||
4681 | module_conf | ||
4682 | Specifies `modprobe.d <http://linux.die.net/man/5/modprobe.d>`_ | ||
4683 | syntax lines for inclusion in the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf`` | ||
4684 | file. | ||
4685 | |||
4686 | You can use this variable anywhere that it can be recognized by the | ||
4687 | kernel recipe or out-of-tree kernel module recipe (e.g. a machine | ||
4688 | configuration file, a distribution configuration file, an append file | ||
4689 | for the recipe, or the recipe itself). If you use this variable, you | ||
4690 | must also be sure to list the module name in the | ||
4691 | :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` | ||
4692 | variable. | ||
4693 | |||
4694 | Here is the general syntax: | ||
4695 | :: | ||
4696 | |||
4697 | module_conf_module_name = "modprobe.d-syntax" | ||
4698 | |||
4699 | You must use the kernel module name override. | ||
4700 | |||
4701 | Run ``man modprobe.d`` in the shell to find out more information on | ||
4702 | the exact syntax you want to provide with ``module_conf``. | ||
4703 | |||
4704 | Including ``module_conf`` causes the OpenEmbedded build system to | ||
4705 | populate the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf`` file with | ||
4706 | ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines. Here is an example that adds the options | ||
4707 | ``arg1`` and ``arg2`` to a module named ``mymodule``: | ||
4708 | :: | ||
4709 | |||
4710 | module_conf_mymodule = "options mymodule arg1=val1 arg2=val2" | ||
4711 | |||
4712 | For information on how to specify kernel modules to auto-load on | ||
4713 | boot, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable. | ||
4714 | |||
4715 | :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_DEPLOY` | ||
4716 | Controls creation of the ``modules-*.tgz`` file. Set this variable to | ||
4717 | "0" to disable creation of this file, which contains all of the | ||
4718 | kernel modules resulting from a kernel build. | ||
4719 | |||
4720 | :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME` | ||
4721 | The link name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in | ||
4722 | the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: | ||
4723 | :: | ||
4724 | |||
4725 | MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}" | ||
4726 | |||
4727 | The value | ||
4728 | of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the | ||
4729 | same file, has the following value: | ||
4730 | :: | ||
4731 | |||
4732 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}" | ||
4733 | |||
4734 | See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional information. | ||
4735 | |||
4736 | :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_NAME` | ||
4737 | The base name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in | ||
4738 | the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows: | ||
4739 | :: | ||
4740 | |||
4741 | MODULE_TARBALL_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}" | ||
4742 | |||
4743 | The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable, | ||
4744 | which is set in the same file, has the following value: | ||
4745 | :: | ||
4746 | |||
4747 | KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}" | ||
4748 | |||
4749 | :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS` | ||
4750 | Uniquely identifies the type of the target system for which packages | ||
4751 | are being built. This variable allows output for different types of | ||
4752 | target systems to be put into different subdirectories of the same | ||
4753 | output directory. | ||
4754 | |||
4755 | The default value of this variable is: | ||
4756 | :: | ||
4757 | |||
4758 | ${PACKAGE_ARCH}${TARGET_VENDOR}-${TARGET_OS} | ||
4759 | |||
4760 | Some classes (e.g. | ||
4761 | :ref:`cross-canadian <ref-classes-cross-canadian>`) modify the | ||
4762 | ``MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`` value. | ||
4763 | |||
4764 | See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example. See the | ||
4765 | :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET` variable for more information. | ||
4766 | |||
4767 | :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` | ||
4768 | A string identifying the host distribution. Strings consist of the | ||
4769 | host distributor ID followed by the release, as reported by the | ||
4770 | ``lsb_release`` tool or as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. For | ||
4771 | example, when running a build on Ubuntu 12.10, the value is | ||
4772 | "Ubuntu-12.10". If this information is unable to be determined, the | ||
4773 | value resolves to "Unknown". | ||
4774 | |||
4775 | This variable is used by default to isolate native shared state | ||
4776 | packages for different distributions (e.g. to avoid problems with | ||
4777 | ``glibc`` version incompatibilities). Additionally, the variable is | ||
4778 | checked against | ||
4779 | :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS` if that | ||
4780 | variable is set. | ||
4781 | |||
4782 | :term:`NM` | ||
4783 | The minimal command and arguments to run ``nm``. | ||
4784 | |||
4785 | :term:`NO_GENERIC_LICENSE` | ||
4786 | Avoids QA errors when you use a non-common, non-CLOSED license in a | ||
4787 | recipe. Packages exist, such as the linux-firmware package, with many | ||
4788 | licenses that are not in any way common. Also, new licenses are added | ||
4789 | occasionally to avoid introducing a lot of common license files, | ||
4790 | which are only applicable to a specific package. | ||
4791 | ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` is used to allow copying a license that does | ||
4792 | not exist in common licenses. | ||
4793 | |||
4794 | The following example shows how to add ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` to a | ||
4795 | recipe: | ||
4796 | :: | ||
4797 | |||
4798 | NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[license_name] = "license_file_in_fetched_source" | ||
4799 | |||
4800 | The following is an example that | ||
4801 | uses the ``LICENSE.Abilis.txt`` file as the license from the fetched | ||
4802 | source: | ||
4803 | :: | ||
4804 | |||
4805 | NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[Firmware-Abilis] = "LICENSE.Abilis.txt" | ||
4806 | |||
4807 | :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` | ||
4808 | Prevents installation of all "recommended-only" packages. | ||
4809 | Recommended-only packages are packages installed only through the | ||
4810 | :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable). Setting the | ||
4811 | ``NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable to "1" turns this feature on: :: | ||
4812 | |||
4813 | NO_RECOMMENDATIONS = "1" | ||
4814 | |||
4815 | You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you | ||
4816 | can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name | ||
4817 | override: :: | ||
4818 | |||
4819 | NO_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "1" | ||
4820 | |||
4821 | It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages | ||
4822 | using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them | ||
4823 | (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS` | ||
4824 | variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and | ||
4825 | will install the packages to avoid dependency errors. | ||
4826 | |||
4827 | .. note:: | ||
4828 | |||
4829 | Some recommended packages might be required for certain system | ||
4830 | functionality, such as kernel modules. It is up to you to add | ||
4831 | packages with the :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable. | ||
4832 | |||
4833 | Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM | ||
4834 | packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. | ||
4835 | |||
4836 | See the :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` and | ||
4837 | the :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for | ||
4838 | related information. | ||
4839 | |||
4840 | :term:`NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG` | ||
4841 | Disables auto package from splitting ``.debug`` files. If a recipe | ||
4842 | requires ``FILES_${PN}-dbg`` to be set manually, the | ||
4843 | ``NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG`` can be defined allowing you to define the | ||
4844 | content of the debug package. For example: | ||
4845 | :: | ||
4846 | |||
4847 | NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG = "1" | ||
4848 | FILES_${PN}-dev = "${includedir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/Qt/*" | ||
4849 | FILES_${PN}-dbg = "/usr/src/debug/" | ||
4850 | FILES_${QT_BASE_NAME}-demos-doc = "${docdir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/qch/qt.qch" | ||
4851 | |||
4852 | :term:`OBJCOPY` | ||
4853 | The minimal command and arguments to run ``objcopy``. | ||
4854 | |||
4855 | :term:`OBJDUMP` | ||
4856 | The minimal command and arguments to run ``objdump``. | ||
4857 | |||
4858 | :term:`OE_BINCONFIG_EXTRA_MANGLE` | ||
4859 | When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class, | ||
4860 | this variable specifies additional arguments passed to the "sed" | ||
4861 | command. The sed command alters any paths in configuration scripts | ||
4862 | that have been set up during compilation. Inheriting this class | ||
4863 | results in all paths in these scripts being changed to point into the | ||
4864 | ``sysroots/`` directory so that all builds that use the script will | ||
4865 | use the correct directories for the cross compiling layout. | ||
4866 | |||
4867 | See the ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the | ||
4868 | :term:`Source Directory` for details on how this class | ||
4869 | applies these additional sed command arguments. For general | ||
4870 | information on the ``binconfig`` class, see the | ||
4871 | ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section. | ||
4872 | |||
4873 | :term:`OE_IMPORTS` | ||
4874 | An internal variable used to tell the OpenEmbedded build system what | ||
4875 | Python modules to import for every Python function run by the system. | ||
4876 | |||
4877 | .. note:: | ||
4878 | |||
4879 | Do not set this variable. It is for internal use only. | ||
4880 | |||
4881 | :term:`OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT` | ||
4882 | The name of the build environment setup script for the purposes of | ||
4883 | setting up the environment within the extensible SDK. The default | ||
4884 | value is "oe-init-build-env". | ||
4885 | |||
4886 | If you use a custom script to set up your build environment, set the | ||
4887 | ``OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT`` variable to its name. | ||
4888 | |||
4889 | :term:`OE_TERMINAL` | ||
4890 | Controls how the OpenEmbedded build system spawns interactive | ||
4891 | terminals on the host development system (e.g. using the BitBake | ||
4892 | command with the ``-c devshell`` command-line option). For more | ||
4893 | information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using a development shell`" section in | ||
4894 | the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
4895 | |||
4896 | You can use the following values for the ``OE_TERMINAL`` variable: | ||
4897 | |||
4898 | - auto | ||
4899 | - gnome | ||
4900 | - xfce | ||
4901 | - rxvt | ||
4902 | - screen | ||
4903 | - konsole | ||
4904 | - none | ||
4905 | |||
4906 | :term:`OEROOT` | ||
4907 | The directory from which the top-level build environment setup script | ||
4908 | is sourced. The Yocto Project provides a top-level build environment | ||
4909 | setup script: :ref:`structure-core-script`. When you run this | ||
4910 | script, the ``OEROOT`` variable resolves to the directory that | ||
4911 | contains the script. | ||
4912 | |||
4913 | For additional information on how this variable is used, see the | ||
4914 | initialization script. | ||
4915 | |||
4916 | :term:`OLDEST_KERNEL` | ||
4917 | Declares the oldest version of the Linux kernel that the produced | ||
4918 | binaries must support. This variable is passed into the build of the | ||
4919 | Embedded GNU C Library (``glibc``). | ||
4920 | |||
4921 | The default for this variable comes from the | ||
4922 | ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. You can override this | ||
4923 | default by setting the variable in a custom distribution | ||
4924 | configuration file. | ||
4925 | |||
4926 | :term:`OVERRIDES` | ||
4927 | A colon-separated list of overrides that currently apply. Overrides | ||
4928 | are a BitBake mechanism that allows variables to be selectively | ||
4929 | overridden at the end of parsing. The set of overrides in | ||
4930 | ``OVERRIDES`` represents the "state" during building, which includes | ||
4931 | the current recipe being built, the machine for which it is being | ||
4932 | built, and so forth. | ||
4933 | |||
4934 | As an example, if the string "an-override" appears as an element in | ||
4935 | the colon-separated list in ``OVERRIDES``, then the following | ||
4936 | assignment will override ``FOO`` with the value "overridden" at the | ||
4937 | end of parsing: | ||
4938 | :: | ||
4939 | |||
4940 | FOO_an-override = "overridden" | ||
4941 | |||
4942 | See the | ||
4943 | ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`" | ||
4944 | section in the BitBake User Manual for more information on the | ||
4945 | overrides mechanism. | ||
4946 | |||
4947 | The default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes the values of the | ||
4948 | :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE`, | ||
4949 | :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`, and | ||
4950 | :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES` variables. Another | ||
4951 | important override included by default is ``pn-${PN}``. This override | ||
4952 | allows variables to be set for a single recipe within configuration | ||
4953 | (``.conf``) files. Here is an example: | ||
4954 | :: | ||
4955 | |||
4956 | FOO_pn-myrecipe = "myrecipe-specific value" | ||
4957 | |||
4958 | .. note:: | ||
4959 | |||
4960 | An easy way to see what overrides apply is to search for ``OVERRIDES`` | ||
4961 | in the output of the ``bitbake -e`` command. See the | ||
4962 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing variable values`" section in the Yocto | ||
4963 | Project Development Tasks Manual for more information. | ||
4964 | |||
4965 | :term:`P` | ||
4966 | The recipe name and version. ``P`` is comprised of the following: | ||
4967 | :: | ||
4968 | |||
4969 | ${PN}-${PV} | ||
4970 | |||
4971 | :term:`PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA` | ||
4972 | This variable defines additional metdata to add to packages. | ||
4973 | |||
4974 | You may find you need to inject additional metadata into packages. | ||
4975 | This variable allows you to do that by setting the injected data as | ||
4976 | the value. Multiple fields can be added by splitting the content with | ||
4977 | the literal separator "\n". | ||
4978 | |||
4979 | The suffixes '_IPK', '_DEB', or '_RPM' can be applied to the variable | ||
4980 | to do package type specific settings. It can also be made package | ||
4981 | specific by using the package name as a suffix. | ||
4982 | |||
4983 | You can find out more about applying this variable in the | ||
4984 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding custom metadata to packages`" | ||
4985 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
4986 | |||
4987 | :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH` | ||
4988 | The architecture of the resulting package or packages. | ||
4989 | |||
4990 | By default, the value of this variable is set to | ||
4991 | :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` when building for the | ||
4992 | target, :term:`BUILD_ARCH` when building for the | ||
4993 | build host, and "${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}" when building for the | ||
4994 | SDK. | ||
4995 | |||
4996 | .. note:: | ||
4997 | |||
4998 | See :term:`SDK_ARCH` for more information. | ||
4999 | |||
5000 | However, if your recipe's output packages are built specific to the | ||
5001 | target machine rather than generally for the architecture of the | ||
5002 | machine, you should set ``PACKAGE_ARCH`` to the value of | ||
5003 | :term:`MACHINE_ARCH` in the recipe as follows: | ||
5004 | :: | ||
5005 | |||
5006 | PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}" | ||
5007 | |||
5008 | :term:`PACKAGE_ARCHS` | ||
5009 | Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the target machine. | ||
5010 | This variable is set automatically and should not normally be | ||
5011 | hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order | ||
5012 | of priority. The default value for ``PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any | ||
5013 | noarch ${PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS} ${MACHINE_ARCH}". | ||
5014 | |||
5015 | :term:`PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN` | ||
5016 | Enables easily adding packages to ``PACKAGES`` before ``${PN}`` so | ||
5017 | that those added packages can pick up files that would normally be | ||
5018 | included in the default package. | ||
5019 | |||
5020 | :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` | ||
5021 | This variable, which is set in the ``local.conf`` configuration file | ||
5022 | found in the ``conf`` folder of the | ||
5023 | :term:`Build Directory`, specifies the package manager the | ||
5024 | OpenEmbedded build system uses when packaging data. | ||
5025 | |||
5026 | You can provide one or more of the following arguments for the | ||
5027 | variable: PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_rpm package_deb package_ipk | ||
5028 | package_tar" | ||
5029 | |||
5030 | .. note:: | ||
5031 | |||
5032 | While it is a legal option, the ``package_tar`` | ||
5033 | class has limited functionality due to no support for package | ||
5034 | dependencies by that backend. Therefore, it is recommended that | ||
5035 | you do not use it. | ||
5036 | |||
5037 | The build system uses only the first argument in the list as the | ||
5038 | package manager when creating your image or SDK. However, packages | ||
5039 | will be created using any additional packaging classes you specify. | ||
5040 | For example, if you use the following in your ``local.conf`` file: | ||
5041 | :: | ||
5042 | |||
5043 | PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_ipk" | ||
5044 | |||
5045 | The OpenEmbedded build system uses | ||
5046 | the IPK package manager to create your image or SDK. | ||
5047 | |||
5048 | For information on packaging and build performance effects as a | ||
5049 | result of the package manager in use, see the | ||
5050 | ":ref:`package.bbclass <ref-classes-package>`" section. | ||
5051 | |||
5052 | :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE` | ||
5053 | Determines how to split up the binary and debug information when | ||
5054 | creating ``*-dbg`` packages to be used with the GNU Project Debugger | ||
5055 | (GDB). | ||
5056 | |||
5057 | With the ``PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE`` variable, you can control | ||
5058 | where debug information, which can include or exclude source files, | ||
5059 | is stored: | ||
5060 | |||
5061 | - ".debug": Debug symbol files are placed next to the binary in a | ||
5062 | ``.debug`` directory on the target. For example, if a binary is | ||
5063 | installed into ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbol files are | ||
5064 | installed in ``/bin/.debug``. Source files are placed in | ||
5065 | ``/usr/src/debug``. | ||
5066 | |||
5067 | - "debug-file-directory": Debug symbol files are placed under | ||
5068 | ``/usr/lib/debug`` on the target, and separated by the path from | ||
5069 | where the binary is installed. For example, if a binary is | ||
5070 | installed in ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbols are | ||
5071 | installed in ``/usr/lib/debug/bin``. Source files are placed in | ||
5072 | ``/usr/src/debug``. | ||
5073 | |||
5074 | - "debug-without-src": The same behavior as ".debug" previously | ||
5075 | described with the exception that no source files are installed. | ||
5076 | |||
5077 | - "debug-with-srcpkg": The same behavior as ".debug" previously | ||
5078 | described with the exception that all source files are placed in a | ||
5079 | separate ``*-src`` pkg. This is the default behavior. | ||
5080 | |||
5081 | You can find out more about debugging using GDB by reading the | ||
5082 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging with the gnu project debugger (gdb) remotely`" section | ||
5083 | in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
5084 | |||
5085 | :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY` | ||
5086 | Prevents specific packages from being installed when you are | ||
5087 | installing complementary packages. | ||
5088 | |||
5089 | You might find that you want to prevent installing certain packages | ||
5090 | when you are installing complementary packages. For example, if you | ||
5091 | are using :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` to install | ||
5092 | ``dev-pkgs``, you might not want to install all packages from a | ||
5093 | particular multilib. If you find yourself in this situation, you can | ||
5094 | use the ``PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY`` variable to specify regular | ||
5095 | expressions to match the packages you want to exclude. | ||
5096 | |||
5097 | :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` | ||
5098 | Lists packages that should not be installed into an image. For | ||
5099 | example: | ||
5100 | :: | ||
5101 | |||
5102 | PACKAGE_EXCLUDE = "package_name package_name package_name ..." | ||
5103 | |||
5104 | You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you | ||
5105 | can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name | ||
5106 | override: | ||
5107 | :: | ||
5108 | |||
5109 | PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_pn-target_image = "package_name" | ||
5110 | |||
5111 | If you choose to not install a package using this variable and some | ||
5112 | other package is dependent on it (i.e. listed in a recipe's | ||
5113 | :term:`RDEPENDS` variable), the OpenEmbedded build | ||
5114 | system generates a fatal installation error. Because the build system | ||
5115 | halts the process with a fatal error, you can use the variable with | ||
5116 | an iterative development process to remove specific components from a | ||
5117 | system. | ||
5118 | |||
5119 | Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM | ||
5120 | packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB. | ||
5121 | |||
5122 | See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the | ||
5123 | :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` variables for | ||
5124 | related information. | ||
5125 | |||
5126 | :term:`PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS` | ||
5127 | Specifies the list of architectures compatible with the device CPU. | ||
5128 | This variable is useful when you build for several different devices | ||
5129 | that use miscellaneous processors such as XScale and ARM926-EJS. | ||
5130 | |||
5131 | :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` | ||
5132 | Optionally specifies the package architectures used as part of the | ||
5133 | package feed URIs during the build. When used, the | ||
5134 | ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variable is appended to the final package feed | ||
5135 | URI, which is constructed using the | ||
5136 | :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` and | ||
5137 | :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS` | ||
5138 | variables. | ||
5139 | |||
5140 | .. note:: | ||
5141 | |||
5142 | You can use the ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` | ||
5143 | variable to whitelist specific package architectures. If you do | ||
5144 | not need to whitelist specific architectures, which is a common | ||
5145 | case, you can omit this variable. Omitting the variable results in | ||
5146 | all available architectures for the current machine being included | ||
5147 | into remote package feeds. | ||
5148 | |||
5149 | Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, | ||
5150 | ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are | ||
5151 | defined in your ``local.conf`` file: | ||
5152 | :: | ||
5153 | |||
5154 | PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ | ||
5155 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" | ||
5156 | PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" | ||
5157 | PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" | ||
5158 | |||
5159 | Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: | ||
5160 | |||
5161 | .. code-block:: none | ||
5162 | |||
5163 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all | ||
5164 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 | ||
5165 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all | ||
5166 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 | ||
5167 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all | ||
5168 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 | ||
5169 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all | ||
5170 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 | ||
5171 | |||
5172 | :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS` | ||
5173 | Specifies the base path used when constructing package feed URIs. The | ||
5174 | ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`` variable makes up the middle portion of a | ||
5175 | package feed URI used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The base path | ||
5176 | lies between the :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` | ||
5177 | and :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables. | ||
5178 | |||
5179 | Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, | ||
5180 | ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are | ||
5181 | defined in your ``local.conf`` file: | ||
5182 | :: | ||
5183 | |||
5184 | PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ | ||
5185 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" | ||
5186 | PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" | ||
5187 | PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" | ||
5188 | |||
5189 | Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: | ||
5190 | |||
5191 | .. code-block:: none | ||
5192 | |||
5193 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all | ||
5194 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 | ||
5195 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all | ||
5196 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 | ||
5197 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all | ||
5198 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 | ||
5199 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all | ||
5200 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 | ||
5201 | |||
5202 | :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` | ||
5203 | Specifies the front portion of the package feed URI used by the | ||
5204 | OpenEmbedded build system. Each final package feed URI is comprised | ||
5205 | of ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, | ||
5206 | :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`, and | ||
5207 | :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables. | ||
5208 | |||
5209 | Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``, | ||
5210 | ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are | ||
5211 | defined in your ``local.conf`` file: | ||
5212 | :: | ||
5213 | |||
5214 | PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \ | ||
5215 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates" | ||
5216 | PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev" | ||
5217 | PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64" | ||
5218 | |||
5219 | Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows: | ||
5220 | |||
5221 | .. code-block:: none | ||
5222 | |||
5223 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all | ||
5224 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64 | ||
5225 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all | ||
5226 | https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64 | ||
5227 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all | ||
5228 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64 | ||
5229 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all | ||
5230 | https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64 | ||
5231 | |||
5232 | :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` | ||
5233 | The final list of packages passed to the package manager for | ||
5234 | installation into the image. | ||
5235 | |||
5236 | Because the package manager controls actual installation of all | ||
5237 | packages, the list of packages passed using ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` is | ||
5238 | not the final list of packages that are actually installed. This | ||
5239 | variable is internal to the image construction code. Consequently, in | ||
5240 | general, you should use the | ||
5241 | :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable to specify | ||
5242 | packages for installation. The exception to this is when working with | ||
5243 | the :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/ref-images:images>` | ||
5244 | image. When working with an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) image, | ||
5245 | use the ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` variable. For information on creating an | ||
5246 | initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section | ||
5247 | in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
5248 | |||
5249 | :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL_ATTEMPTONLY` | ||
5250 | Specifies a list of packages the OpenEmbedded build system attempts | ||
5251 | to install when creating an image. If a listed package fails to | ||
5252 | install, the build system does not generate an error. This variable | ||
5253 | is generally not user-defined. | ||
5254 | |||
5255 | :term:`PACKAGE_PREPROCESS_FUNCS` | ||
5256 | Specifies a list of functions run to pre-process the | ||
5257 | :term:`PKGD` directory prior to splitting the files out | ||
5258 | to individual packages. | ||
5259 | |||
5260 | :term:`PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS` | ||
5261 | Specifies a list of dependencies for post-installation and | ||
5262 | pre-installation scripts on native/cross tools. If your | ||
5263 | post-installation or pre-installation script can execute at rootfs | ||
5264 | creation time rather than on the target but depends on a native tool | ||
5265 | in order to execute, you need to list the tools in | ||
5266 | ``PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS``. | ||
5267 | |||
5268 | For information on running post-installation scripts, see the | ||
5269 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:post-installation scripts`" | ||
5270 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
5271 | |||
5272 | :term:`PACKAGECONFIG` | ||
5273 | This variable provides a means of enabling or disabling features of a | ||
5274 | recipe on a per-recipe basis. ``PACKAGECONFIG`` blocks are defined in | ||
5275 | recipes when you specify features and then arguments that define | ||
5276 | feature behaviors. Here is the basic block structure (broken over | ||
5277 | multiple lines for readability): | ||
5278 | :: | ||
5279 | |||
5280 | PACKAGECONFIG ??= "f1 f2 f3 ..." | ||
5281 | PACKAGECONFIG[f1] = "\ | ||
5282 | --with-f1, \ | ||
5283 | --without-f1, \ | ||
5284 | build-deps-for-f1, \ | ||
5285 | runtime-deps-for-f1, \ | ||
5286 | runtime-recommends-for-f1, \ | ||
5287 | packageconfig-conflicts-for-f1" | ||
5288 | PACKAGECONFIG[f2] = "\ | ||
5289 | ... and so on and so on ... | ||
5290 | |||
5291 | The ``PACKAGECONFIG`` variable itself specifies a space-separated | ||
5292 | list of the features to enable. Following the features, you can | ||
5293 | determine the behavior of each feature by providing up to six | ||
5294 | order-dependent arguments, which are separated by commas. You can | ||
5295 | omit any argument you like but must retain the separating commas. The | ||
5296 | order is important and specifies the following: | ||
5297 | |||
5298 | 1. Extra arguments that should be added to the configure script | ||
5299 | argument list (:term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or | ||
5300 | :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`) if | ||
5301 | the feature is enabled. | ||
5302 | |||
5303 | 2. Extra arguments that should be added to ``EXTRA_OECONF`` or | ||
5304 | ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` if the feature is disabled. | ||
5305 | |||
5306 | 3. Additional build dependencies (:term:`DEPENDS`) | ||
5307 | that should be added if the feature is enabled. | ||
5308 | |||
5309 | 4. Additional runtime dependencies (:term:`RDEPENDS`) | ||
5310 | that should be added if the feature is enabled. | ||
5311 | |||
5312 | 5. Additional runtime recommendations | ||
5313 | (:term:`RRECOMMENDS`) that should be added if | ||
5314 | the feature is enabled. | ||
5315 | |||
5316 | 6. Any conflicting (that is, mutually exclusive) ``PACKAGECONFIG`` | ||
5317 | settings for this feature. | ||
5318 | |||
5319 | Consider the following ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block taken from the | ||
5320 | ``librsvg`` recipe. In this example the feature is ``gtk``, which has | ||
5321 | three arguments that determine the feature's behavior. | ||
5322 | :: | ||
5323 | |||
5324 | PACKAGECONFIG[gtk] = "--with-gtk3,--without-gtk3,gtk+3" | ||
5325 | |||
5326 | The | ||
5327 | ``--with-gtk3`` and ``gtk+3`` arguments apply only if the feature is | ||
5328 | enabled. In this case, ``--with-gtk3`` is added to the configure | ||
5329 | script argument list and ``gtk+3`` is added to ``DEPENDS``. On the | ||
5330 | other hand, if the feature is disabled say through a ``.bbappend`` | ||
5331 | file in another layer, then the second argument ``--without-gtk3`` is | ||
5332 | added to the configure script instead. | ||
5333 | |||
5334 | The basic ``PACKAGECONFIG`` structure previously described holds true | ||
5335 | regardless of whether you are creating a block or changing a block. | ||
5336 | When creating a block, use the structure inside your recipe. | ||
5337 | |||
5338 | If you want to change an existing ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block, you can do | ||
5339 | so one of two ways: | ||
5340 | |||
5341 | - *Append file:* Create an append file named | ||
5342 | recipename\ ``.bbappend`` in your layer and override the value of | ||
5343 | ``PACKAGECONFIG``. You can either completely override the | ||
5344 | variable: | ||
5345 | :: | ||
5346 | |||
5347 | PACKAGECONFIG = "f4 f5" | ||
5348 | |||
5349 | Or, you can just append the variable: | ||
5350 | :: | ||
5351 | |||
5352 | PACKAGECONFIG_append = " f4" | ||
5353 | |||
5354 | - *Configuration file:* This method is identical to changing the | ||
5355 | block through an append file except you edit your ``local.conf`` | ||
5356 | or ``mydistro.conf`` file. As with append files previously | ||
5357 | described, you can either completely override the variable: | ||
5358 | :: | ||
5359 | |||
5360 | PACKAGECONFIG_pn-recipename = "f4 f5" | ||
5361 | |||
5362 | Or, you can just amend the variable: | ||
5363 | :: | ||
5364 | |||
5365 | PACKAGECONFIG_append_pn-recipename = " f4" | ||
5366 | |||
5367 | :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` | ||
5368 | A space-separated list of configuration options generated from the | ||
5369 | :term:`PACKAGECONFIG` setting. | ||
5370 | |||
5371 | Classes such as :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` and | ||
5372 | :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` use ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` to | ||
5373 | pass ``PACKAGECONFIG`` options to ``configure`` and ``cmake``, | ||
5374 | respectively. If you are using ``PACKAGECONFIG`` but not a class that | ||
5375 | handles the ``do_configure`` task, then you need to use | ||
5376 | ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` appropriately. | ||
5377 | |||
5378 | :term:`PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY` | ||
5379 | For recipes inheriting the | ||
5380 | :ref:`packagegroup <ref-classes-packagegroup>` class, setting | ||
5381 | ``PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY`` to "1" specifies that the | ||
5382 | normal complementary packages (i.e. ``-dev``, ``-dbg``, and so forth) | ||
5383 | should not be automatically created by the ``packagegroup`` recipe, | ||
5384 | which is the default behavior. | ||
5385 | |||
5386 | :term:`PACKAGES` | ||
5387 | The list of packages the recipe creates. The default value is the | ||
5388 | following: | ||
5389 | :: | ||
5390 | |||
5391 | ${PN}-dbg ${PN}-staticdev ${PN}-dev ${PN}-doc ${PN}-locale ${PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN} ${PN} | ||
5392 | |||
5393 | During packaging, the :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task | ||
5394 | goes through ``PACKAGES`` and uses the :term:`FILES` | ||
5395 | variable corresponding to each package to assign files to the | ||
5396 | package. If a file matches the ``FILES`` variable for more than one | ||
5397 | package in ``PACKAGES``, it will be assigned to the earliest | ||
5398 | (leftmost) package. | ||
5399 | |||
5400 | Packages in the variable's list that are empty (i.e. where none of | ||
5401 | the patterns in ``FILES_``\ pkg match any files installed by the | ||
5402 | :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task) are not generated, | ||
5403 | unless generation is forced through the | ||
5404 | :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY` variable. | ||
5405 | |||
5406 | :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` | ||
5407 | A promise that your recipe satisfies runtime dependencies for | ||
5408 | optional modules that are found in other recipes. | ||
5409 | ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` does not actually satisfy the dependencies, it | ||
5410 | only states that they should be satisfied. For example, if a hard, | ||
5411 | runtime dependency (:term:`RDEPENDS`) of another | ||
5412 | package is satisfied at build time through the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` | ||
5413 | variable, but a package with the module name is never actually | ||
5414 | produced, then the other package will be broken. Thus, if you attempt | ||
5415 | to include that package in an image, you will get a dependency | ||
5416 | failure from the packaging system during the | ||
5417 | :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task. | ||
5418 | |||
5419 | Typically, if there is a chance that such a situation can occur and | ||
5420 | the package that is not created is valid without the dependency being | ||
5421 | satisfied, then you should use :term:`RRECOMMENDS` | ||
5422 | (a soft runtime dependency) instead of ``RDEPENDS``. | ||
5423 | |||
5424 | For an example of how to use the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` variable when | ||
5425 | you are splitting packages, see the | ||
5426 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:handling optional module packaging`" | ||
5427 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
5428 | |||
5429 | :term:`PACKAGESPLITFUNCS` | ||
5430 | Specifies a list of functions run to perform additional splitting of | ||
5431 | files into individual packages. Recipes can either prepend to this | ||
5432 | variable or prepend to the ``populate_packages`` function in order to | ||
5433 | perform additional package splitting. In either case, the function | ||
5434 | should set :term:`PACKAGES`, | ||
5435 | :term:`FILES`, :term:`RDEPENDS` and | ||
5436 | other packaging variables appropriately in order to perform the | ||
5437 | desired splitting. | ||
5438 | |||
5439 | :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` | ||
5440 | Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the | ||
5441 | :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task in order to specify | ||
5442 | parallel compilation on the local build host. This variable is | ||
5443 | usually in the form "-j x", where x represents the maximum number of | ||
5444 | parallel threads ``make`` can run. | ||
5445 | |||
5446 | .. note:: | ||
5447 | |||
5448 | In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` to be effective, ``make`` must be | ||
5449 | called with ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy way to ensure | ||
5450 | this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function. | ||
5451 | |||
5452 | By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this | ||
5453 | variable to be equal to the number of cores the build system uses. | ||
5454 | |||
5455 | .. note:: | ||
5456 | |||
5457 | If the software being built experiences dependency issues during | ||
5458 | the ``do_compile`` task that result in race conditions, you can clear | ||
5459 | the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable within the recipe as a workaround. For | ||
5460 | information on addressing race conditions, see the | ||
5461 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`" | ||
5462 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
5463 | |||
5464 | For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to | ||
5465 | override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds. | ||
5466 | However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical | ||
5467 | CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable is | ||
5468 | not set higher than "-j 20". | ||
5469 | |||
5470 | For more information on speeding up builds, see the | ||
5471 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`" | ||
5472 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
5473 | |||
5474 | :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` | ||
5475 | Extra options passed to the ``make install`` command during the | ||
5476 | :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task in order to specify | ||
5477 | parallel installation. This variable defaults to the value of | ||
5478 | :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`. | ||
5479 | |||
5480 | .. note:: | ||
5481 | |||
5482 | In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` to be effective, ``make`` must | ||
5483 | be called with | ||
5484 | ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy | ||
5485 | way to ensure this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function. | ||
5486 | |||
5487 | If the software being built experiences dependency issues during | ||
5488 | the ``do_install`` task that result in race conditions, you can | ||
5489 | clear the ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` variable within the recipe as a | ||
5490 | workaround. For information on addressing race conditions, see the | ||
5491 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`" | ||
5492 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
5493 | |||
5494 | :term:`PATCHRESOLVE` | ||
5495 | Determines the action to take when a patch fails. You can set this | ||
5496 | variable to one of two values: "noop" and "user". | ||
5497 | |||
5498 | The default value of "noop" causes the build to simply fail when the | ||
5499 | OpenEmbedded build system cannot successfully apply a patch. Setting | ||
5500 | the value to "user" causes the build system to launch a shell and | ||
5501 | places you in the right location so that you can manually resolve the | ||
5502 | conflicts. | ||
5503 | |||
5504 | Set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file. | ||
5505 | |||
5506 | :term:`PATCHTOOL` | ||
5507 | Specifies the utility used to apply patches for a recipe during the | ||
5508 | :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task. You can specify one of | ||
5509 | three utilities: "patch", "quilt", or "git". The default utility used | ||
5510 | is "quilt" except for the quilt-native recipe itself. Because the | ||
5511 | quilt tool is not available at the time quilt-native is being | ||
5512 | patched, it uses "patch". | ||
5513 | |||
5514 | If you wish to use an alternative patching tool, set the variable in | ||
5515 | the recipe using one of the following: | ||
5516 | :: | ||
5517 | |||
5518 | PATCHTOOL = "patch" | ||
5519 | PATCHTOOL = "quilt" | ||
5520 | PATCHTOOL = "git" | ||
5521 | |||
5522 | :term:`PE` | ||
5523 | The epoch of the recipe. By default, this variable is unset. The | ||
5524 | variable is used to make upgrades possible when the versioning scheme | ||
5525 | changes in some backwards incompatible way. | ||
5526 | |||
5527 | ``PE`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGE` variable. | ||
5528 | |||
5529 | :term:`PF` | ||
5530 | Specifies the recipe or package name and includes all version and | ||
5531 | revision numbers (i.e. ``glibc-2.13-r20+svnr15508/`` and | ||
5532 | ``bash-4.2-r1/``). This variable is comprised of the following: | ||
5533 | ${:term:`PN`}-${:term:`EXTENDPE`}${:term:`PV`}-${:term:`PR`} | ||
5534 | |||
5535 | :term:`PIXBUF_PACKAGES` | ||
5536 | When inheriting the :ref:`pixbufcache <ref-classes-pixbufcache>` | ||
5537 | class, this variable identifies packages that contain the pixbuf | ||
5538 | loaders used with ``gdk-pixbuf``. By default, the ``pixbufcache`` | ||
5539 | class assumes that the loaders are in the recipe's main package (i.e. | ||
5540 | ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if the | ||
5541 | loaders you need are in a package other than that main package. | ||
5542 | |||
5543 | :term:`PKG` | ||
5544 | The name of the resulting package created by the OpenEmbedded build | ||
5545 | system. | ||
5546 | |||
5547 | .. note:: | ||
5548 | |||
5549 | When using the ``PKG`` variable, you must use a package name override. | ||
5550 | |||
5551 | For example, when the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class | ||
5552 | renames the output package, it does so by setting | ||
5553 | ``PKG_packagename``. | ||
5554 | |||
5555 | :term:`PKG_CONFIG_PATH` | ||
5556 | The path to ``pkg-config`` files for the current build context. | ||
5557 | ``pkg-config`` reads this variable from the environment. | ||
5558 | |||
5559 | :term:`PKGD` | ||
5560 | Points to the destination directory for files to be packaged before | ||
5561 | they are split into individual packages. This directory defaults to | ||
5562 | the following: | ||
5563 | :: | ||
5564 | |||
5565 | ${WORKDIR}/package | ||
5566 | |||
5567 | Do not change this default. | ||
5568 | |||
5569 | :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` | ||
5570 | Points to a shared, global-state directory that holds data generated | ||
5571 | during the packaging process. During the packaging process, the | ||
5572 | :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task packages data | ||
5573 | for each recipe and installs it into this temporary, shared area. | ||
5574 | This directory defaults to the following, which you should not | ||
5575 | change: | ||
5576 | :: | ||
5577 | |||
5578 | ${STAGING_DIR_HOST}/pkgdata | ||
5579 | |||
5580 | For examples of how this data is used, see the | ||
5581 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" | ||
5582 | section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the | ||
5583 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing package information with \`\`oe-pkgdata-util\`\``" | ||
5584 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For more | ||
5585 | information on the shared, global-state directory, see | ||
5586 | :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`. | ||
5587 | |||
5588 | :term:`PKGDEST` | ||
5589 | Points to the parent directory for files to be packaged after they | ||
5590 | have been split into individual packages. This directory defaults to | ||
5591 | the following: | ||
5592 | :: | ||
5593 | |||
5594 | ${WORKDIR}/packages-split | ||
5595 | |||
5596 | Under this directory, the build system creates directories for each | ||
5597 | package specified in :term:`PACKAGES`. Do not change | ||
5598 | this default. | ||
5599 | |||
5600 | :term:`PKGDESTWORK` | ||
5601 | Points to a temporary work area where the | ||
5602 | :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task saves package metadata. | ||
5603 | The ``PKGDESTWORK`` location defaults to the following: | ||
5604 | :: | ||
5605 | |||
5606 | ${WORKDIR}/pkgdata | ||
5607 | |||
5608 | Do not change this default. | ||
5609 | |||
5610 | The :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task copies the | ||
5611 | package metadata from ``PKGDESTWORK`` to | ||
5612 | :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` to make it available globally. | ||
5613 | |||
5614 | :term:`PKGE` | ||
5615 | The epoch of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, ``PKGE`` | ||
5616 | is set to :term:`PE`. | ||
5617 | |||
5618 | :term:`PKGR` | ||
5619 | The revision of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, | ||
5620 | ``PKGR`` is set to :term:`PR`. | ||
5621 | |||
5622 | :term:`PKGV` | ||
5623 | The version of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, | ||
5624 | ``PKGV`` is set to :term:`PV`. | ||
5625 | |||
5626 | :term:`PN` | ||
5627 | This variable can have two separate functions depending on the | ||
5628 | context: a recipe name or a resulting package name. | ||
5629 | |||
5630 | ``PN`` refers to a recipe name in the context of a file used by the | ||
5631 | OpenEmbedded build system as input to create a package. The name is | ||
5632 | normally extracted from the recipe file name. For example, if the | ||
5633 | recipe is named ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PN`` | ||
5634 | will be "expat". | ||
5635 | |||
5636 | The variable refers to a package name in the context of a file | ||
5637 | created or produced by the OpenEmbedded build system. | ||
5638 | |||
5639 | If applicable, the ``PN`` variable also contains any special suffix | ||
5640 | or prefix. For example, using ``bash`` to build packages for the | ||
5641 | native machine, ``PN`` is ``bash-native``. Using ``bash`` to build | ||
5642 | packages for the target and for Multilib, ``PN`` would be ``bash`` | ||
5643 | and ``lib64-bash``, respectively. | ||
5644 | |||
5645 | :term:`PNBLACKLIST` | ||
5646 | Lists recipes you do not want the OpenEmbedded build system to build. | ||
5647 | This variable works in conjunction with the | ||
5648 | :ref:`blacklist <ref-classes-blacklist>` class, which is inherited | ||
5649 | globally. | ||
5650 | |||
5651 | To prevent a recipe from being built, use the ``PNBLACKLIST`` | ||
5652 | variable in your ``local.conf`` file. Here is an example that | ||
5653 | prevents ``myrecipe`` from being built: | ||
5654 | :: | ||
5655 | |||
5656 | PNBLACKLIST[myrecipe] = "Not supported by our organization." | ||
5657 | |||
5658 | :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND` | ||
5659 | Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build | ||
5660 | system has created the host part of the SDK. You can specify | ||
5661 | functions separated by semicolons: | ||
5662 | :: | ||
5663 | |||
5664 | POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND += "function; ... " | ||
5665 | |||
5666 | If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you | ||
5667 | can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by | ||
5668 | the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the | ||
5669 | :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. | ||
5670 | |||
5671 | :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND` | ||
5672 | Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build | ||
5673 | system has created the target part of the SDK. You can specify | ||
5674 | functions separated by semicolons: | ||
5675 | :: | ||
5676 | |||
5677 | POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND += "function; ... " | ||
5678 | |||
5679 | If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you | ||
5680 | can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by | ||
5681 | the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the | ||
5682 | :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. | ||
5683 | |||
5684 | :term:`PR` | ||
5685 | The revision of the recipe. The default value for this variable is | ||
5686 | "r0". Subsequent revisions of the recipe conventionally have the | ||
5687 | values "r1", "r2", and so forth. When :term:`PV` increases, | ||
5688 | ``PR`` is conventionally reset to "r0". | ||
5689 | |||
5690 | .. note:: | ||
5691 | |||
5692 | The OpenEmbedded build system does not need the aid of ``PR`` | ||
5693 | to know when to rebuild a recipe. The build system uses the task | ||
5694 | :ref:`input checksums <overview-manual/concepts:checksums (signatures)>` along with the | ||
5695 | :ref:`stamp <structure-build-tmp-stamps>` and | ||
5696 | :ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache` | ||
5697 | mechanisms. | ||
5698 | |||
5699 | The ``PR`` variable primarily becomes significant when a package | ||
5700 | manager dynamically installs packages on an already built image. In | ||
5701 | this case, ``PR``, which is the default value of | ||
5702 | :term:`PKGR`, helps the package manager distinguish which | ||
5703 | package is the most recent one in cases where many packages have the | ||
5704 | same ``PV`` (i.e. ``PKGV``). A component having many packages with | ||
5705 | the same ``PV`` usually means that the packages all install the same | ||
5706 | upstream version, but with later (``PR``) version packages including | ||
5707 | packaging fixes. | ||
5708 | |||
5709 | .. note:: | ||
5710 | |||
5711 | ``PR`` does not need to be increased for changes that do not change the | ||
5712 | package contents or metadata. | ||
5713 | |||
5714 | Because manually managing ``PR`` can be cumbersome and error-prone, | ||
5715 | an automated solution exists. See the | ||
5716 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service`" section | ||
5717 | in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more information. | ||
5718 | |||
5719 | :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` | ||
5720 | If multiple recipes provide the same item, this variable determines | ||
5721 | which recipe is preferred and thus provides the item (i.e. the | ||
5722 | preferred provider). You should always suffix this variable with the | ||
5723 | name of the provided item. And, you should define the variable using | ||
5724 | the preferred recipe's name (:term:`PN`). Here is a common | ||
5725 | example: | ||
5726 | :: | ||
5727 | |||
5728 | PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ?= "linux-yocto" | ||
5729 | |||
5730 | In the previous example, multiple recipes are providing "virtual/kernel". | ||
5731 | The ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` variable is set with the name (``PN``) of | ||
5732 | the recipe you prefer to provide "virtual/kernel". | ||
5733 | |||
5734 | Following are more examples: | ||
5735 | :: | ||
5736 | |||
5737 | PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/xserver = "xserver-xf86" | ||
5738 | PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/libgl ?= "mesa" | ||
5739 | |||
5740 | For more | ||
5741 | information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using virtual providers`" | ||
5742 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
5743 | |||
5744 | .. note:: | ||
5745 | |||
5746 | If you use a ``virtual/\*`` item with ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER``, then any | ||
5747 | recipe that :term:`PROVIDES` that item but is not selected (defined) | ||
5748 | by ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` is prevented from building, which is usually | ||
5749 | desirable since this mechanism is designed to select between mutually | ||
5750 | exclusive alternative providers. | ||
5751 | |||
5752 | :term:`PREFERRED_VERSION` | ||
5753 | If multiple versions of recipes exist, this variable determines which | ||
5754 | version is given preference. You must always suffix the variable with | ||
5755 | the :term:`PN` you want to select, and you should set the | ||
5756 | :term:`PV` accordingly for precedence. | ||
5757 | |||
5758 | The ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable supports limited wildcard use | ||
5759 | through the "``%``" character. You can use the character to match any | ||
5760 | number of characters, which can be useful when specifying versions | ||
5761 | that contain long revision numbers that potentially change. Here are | ||
5762 | two examples: | ||
5763 | :: | ||
5764 | |||
5765 | PREFERRED_VERSION_python = "3.4.0" | ||
5766 | PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto = "5.0%" | ||
5767 | |||
5768 | .. note:: | ||
5769 | |||
5770 | The use of the "%" character is limited in that it only works at the end of the | ||
5771 | string. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other | ||
5772 | location of the string. | ||
5773 | |||
5774 | The specified version is matched against :term:`PV`, which | ||
5775 | does not necessarily match the version part of the recipe's filename. | ||
5776 | For example, consider two recipes ``foo_1.2.bb`` and ``foo_git.bb`` | ||
5777 | where ``foo_git.bb`` contains the following assignment: | ||
5778 | :: | ||
5779 | |||
5780 | PV = "1.1+git${SRCPV}" | ||
5781 | |||
5782 | In this case, the correct way to select | ||
5783 | ``foo_git.bb`` is by using an assignment such as the following: | ||
5784 | :: | ||
5785 | |||
5786 | PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "1.1+git%" | ||
5787 | |||
5788 | Compare that previous example | ||
5789 | against the following incorrect example, which does not work: | ||
5790 | :: | ||
5791 | |||
5792 | PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "git" | ||
5793 | |||
5794 | Sometimes the ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable can be set by | ||
5795 | configuration files in a way that is hard to change. You can use | ||
5796 | :term:`OVERRIDES` to set a machine-specific | ||
5797 | override. Here is an example: | ||
5798 | :: | ||
5799 | |||
5800 | PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_qemux86 = "5.0%" | ||
5801 | |||
5802 | Although not recommended, worst case, you can also use the | ||
5803 | "forcevariable" override, which is the strongest override possible. | ||
5804 | Here is an example: | ||
5805 | :: | ||
5806 | |||
5807 | PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_forcevariable = "5.0%" | ||
5808 | |||
5809 | .. note:: | ||
5810 | |||
5811 | The ``\_forcevariable`` override is not handled specially. This override | ||
5812 | only works because the default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes "forcevariable". | ||
5813 | |||
5814 | :term:`PREMIRRORS` | ||
5815 | Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system | ||
5816 | gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it | ||
5817 | first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the | ||
5818 | build system tries locations defined by ``PREMIRRORS``, the upstream | ||
5819 | source, and then locations specified by | ||
5820 | :term:`MIRRORS` in that order. | ||
5821 | |||
5822 | Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky", | ||
5823 | the default value for ``PREMIRRORS`` is defined in the | ||
5824 | ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository. | ||
5825 | |||
5826 | Typically, you could add a specific server for the build system to | ||
5827 | attempt before any others by adding something like the following to | ||
5828 | the ``local.conf`` configuration file in the | ||
5829 | :term:`Build Directory`: | ||
5830 | :: | ||
5831 | |||
5832 | PREMIRRORS_prepend = "\ | ||
5833 | git://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ | ||
5834 | ftp://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ | ||
5835 | http://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \ | ||
5836 | https://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n" | ||
5837 | |||
5838 | These changes cause the | ||
5839 | build system to intercept Git, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS requests and | ||
5840 | direct them to the ``http://`` sources mirror. You can use | ||
5841 | ``file://`` URLs to point to local directories or network shares as | ||
5842 | well. | ||
5843 | |||
5844 | :term:`PRIORITY` | ||
5845 | Indicates the importance of a package. | ||
5846 | |||
5847 | ``PRIORITY`` is considered to be part of the distribution policy | ||
5848 | because the importance of any given recipe depends on the purpose for | ||
5849 | which the distribution is being produced. Thus, ``PRIORITY`` is not | ||
5850 | normally set within recipes. | ||
5851 | |||
5852 | You can set ``PRIORITY`` to "required", "standard", "extra", and | ||
5853 | "optional", which is the default. | ||
5854 | |||
5855 | :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS` | ||
5856 | Specifies libraries installed within a recipe that should be ignored | ||
5857 | by the OpenEmbedded build system's shared library resolver. This | ||
5858 | variable is typically used when software being built by a recipe has | ||
5859 | its own private versions of a library normally provided by another | ||
5860 | recipe. In this case, you would not want the package containing the | ||
5861 | private libraries to be set as a dependency on other unrelated | ||
5862 | packages that should instead depend on the package providing the | ||
5863 | standard version of the library. | ||
5864 | |||
5865 | Libraries specified in this variable should be specified by their | ||
5866 | file name. For example, from the Firefox recipe in meta-browser: | ||
5867 | :: | ||
5868 | |||
5869 | PRIVATE_LIBS = "libmozjs.so \ | ||
5870 | libxpcom.so \ | ||
5871 | libnspr4.so \ | ||
5872 | libxul.so \ | ||
5873 | libmozalloc.so \ | ||
5874 | libplc4.so \ | ||
5875 | libplds4.so" | ||
5876 | |||
5877 | For more information, see the | ||
5878 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" | ||
5879 | section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. | ||
5880 | |||
5881 | :term:`PROVIDES` | ||
5882 | A list of aliases by which a particular recipe can be known. By | ||
5883 | default, a recipe's own ``PN`` is implicitly already in its | ||
5884 | ``PROVIDES`` list and therefore does not need to mention that it | ||
5885 | provides itself. If a recipe uses ``PROVIDES``, the additional | ||
5886 | aliases are synonyms for the recipe and can be useful for satisfying | ||
5887 | dependencies of other recipes during the build as specified by | ||
5888 | ``DEPENDS``. | ||
5889 | |||
5890 | Consider the following example ``PROVIDES`` statement from the recipe | ||
5891 | file ``eudev_3.2.9.bb``: | ||
5892 | :: | ||
5893 | |||
5894 | PROVIDES = "udev" | ||
5895 | |||
5896 | The ``PROVIDES`` statement | ||
5897 | results in the "eudev" recipe also being available as simply "udev". | ||
5898 | |||
5899 | .. note:: | ||
5900 | |||
5901 | Given that a recipe's own recipe name is already implicitly in its | ||
5902 | own PROVIDES list, it is unnecessary to add aliases with the "+=" operator; | ||
5903 | using a simple assignment will be sufficient. In other words, | ||
5904 | while you could write: | ||
5905 | :: | ||
5906 | |||
5907 | PROVIDES += "udev" | ||
5908 | |||
5909 | |||
5910 | in the above, the "+=" is overkill and unnecessary. | ||
5911 | |||
5912 | In addition to providing recipes under alternate names, the | ||
5913 | ``PROVIDES`` mechanism is also used to implement virtual targets. A | ||
5914 | virtual target is a name that corresponds to some particular | ||
5915 | functionality (e.g. a Linux kernel). Recipes that provide the | ||
5916 | functionality in question list the virtual target in ``PROVIDES``. | ||
5917 | Recipes that depend on the functionality in question can include the | ||
5918 | virtual target in ``DEPENDS`` to leave the choice of provider open. | ||
5919 | |||
5920 | Conventionally, virtual targets have names on the form | ||
5921 | "virtual/function" (e.g. "virtual/kernel"). The slash is simply part | ||
5922 | of the name and has no syntactical significance. | ||
5923 | |||
5924 | The :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` variable is | ||
5925 | used to select which particular recipe provides a virtual target. | ||
5926 | |||
5927 | .. note:: | ||
5928 | |||
5929 | A corresponding mechanism for virtual runtime dependencies | ||
5930 | (packages) exists. However, the mechanism does not depend on any | ||
5931 | special functionality beyond ordinary variable assignments. For | ||
5932 | example, ``VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager`` refers to the package of | ||
5933 | the component that manages the ``/dev`` directory. | ||
5934 | |||
5935 | Setting the "preferred provider" for runtime dependencies is as | ||
5936 | simple as using the following assignment in a configuration file: | ||
5937 | :: | ||
5938 | |||
5939 | VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "udev" | ||
5940 | |||
5941 | |||
5942 | :term:`PRSERV_HOST` | ||
5943 | The network based :term:`PR` service host and port. | ||
5944 | |||
5945 | The ``conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in the | ||
5946 | :term:`Source Directory` shows how the | ||
5947 | ``PRSERV_HOST`` variable is set: | ||
5948 | :: | ||
5949 | |||
5950 | PRSERV_HOST = "localhost:0" | ||
5951 | |||
5952 | You must | ||
5953 | set the variable if you want to automatically start a local :ref:`PR | ||
5954 | service <dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service>`. You can | ||
5955 | set ``PRSERV_HOST`` to other values to use a remote PR service. | ||
5956 | |||
5957 | |||
5958 | :term:`PSEUDO_IGNORE_PATHS` | ||
5959 | A comma-separated (without spaces) list of path prefixes that should be ignored | ||
5960 | by pseudo when monitoring and recording file operations, in order to avoid | ||
5961 | problems with files being written to outside of the pseudo context and | ||
5962 | reduce pseudo's overhead. A path is ignored if it matches any prefix in the list | ||
5963 | and can include partial directory (or file) names. | ||
5964 | |||
5965 | |||
5966 | :term:`PTEST_ENABLED` | ||
5967 | Specifies whether or not :ref:`Package | ||
5968 | Test <dev-manual/common-tasks:testing packages with ptest>` (ptest) | ||
5969 | functionality is enabled when building a recipe. You should not set | ||
5970 | this variable directly. Enabling and disabling building Package Tests | ||
5971 | at build time should be done by adding "ptest" to (or removing it | ||
5972 | from) :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`. | ||
5973 | |||
5974 | :term:`PV` | ||
5975 | The version of the recipe. The version is normally extracted from the | ||
5976 | recipe filename. For example, if the recipe is named | ||
5977 | ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PV`` will be "2.0.1". | ||
5978 | ``PV`` is generally not overridden within a recipe unless it is | ||
5979 | building an unstable (i.e. development) version from a source code | ||
5980 | repository (e.g. Git or Subversion). | ||
5981 | |||
5982 | ``PV`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGV` variable. | ||
5983 | |||
5984 | :term:`PYTHON_ABI` | ||
5985 | When used by recipes that inherit the | ||
5986 | :ref:`distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`, | ||
5987 | :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>`, | ||
5988 | :ref:`distutils <ref-classes-distutils>`, or | ||
5989 | :ref:`setuptools <ref-classes-setuptools>` classes, denotes the | ||
5990 | Application Binary Interface (ABI) currently in use for Python. By | ||
5991 | default, the ABI is "m". You do not have to set this variable as the | ||
5992 | OpenEmbedded build system sets it for you. | ||
5993 | |||
5994 | The OpenEmbedded build system uses the ABI to construct directory | ||
5995 | names used when installing the Python headers and libraries in | ||
5996 | sysroot (e.g. ``.../python3.3m/...``). | ||
5997 | |||
5998 | Recipes that inherit the ``distutils`` class during cross-builds also | ||
5999 | use this variable to locate the headers and libraries of the | ||
6000 | appropriate Python that the extension is targeting. | ||
6001 | |||
6002 | :term:`PYTHON_PN` | ||
6003 | When used by recipes that inherit the | ||
6004 | `distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`, | ||
6005 | :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>`, | ||
6006 | :ref:`distutils <ref-classes-distutils>`, or | ||
6007 | :ref:`setuptools <ref-classes-setuptools>` classes, specifies the | ||
6008 | major Python version being built. For Python 3.x, ``PYTHON_PN`` would | ||
6009 | be "python3". You do not have to set this variable as the | ||
6010 | OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets it for you. | ||
6011 | |||
6012 | The variable allows recipes to use common infrastructure such as the | ||
6013 | following: | ||
6014 | :: | ||
6015 | |||
6016 | DEPENDS += "${PYTHON_PN}-native" | ||
6017 | |||
6018 | In the previous example, | ||
6019 | the version of the dependency is ``PYTHON_PN``. | ||
6020 | |||
6021 | :term:`RANLIB` | ||
6022 | The minimal command and arguments to run ``ranlib``. | ||
6023 | |||
6024 | :term:`RCONFLICTS` | ||
6025 | The list of packages that conflict with packages. Note that packages | ||
6026 | will not be installed if conflicting packages are not first removed. | ||
6027 | |||
6028 | Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in | ||
6029 | conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example: | ||
6030 | :: | ||
6031 | |||
6032 | RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "another_conflicting_package_name" | ||
6033 | |||
6034 | BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports | ||
6035 | specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies | ||
6036 | depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences | ||
6037 | from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the | ||
6038 | ``RCONFLICTS`` variable: | ||
6039 | :: | ||
6040 | |||
6041 | RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" | ||
6042 | |||
6043 | For ``operator``, you can specify the following: | ||
6044 | |||
6045 | - = | ||
6046 | - < | ||
6047 | - > | ||
6048 | - <= | ||
6049 | - >= | ||
6050 | |||
6051 | For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or | ||
6052 | greater of the package ``foo``: | ||
6053 | :: | ||
6054 | |||
6055 | RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" | ||
6056 | |||
6057 | :term:`RDEPENDS` | ||
6058 | Lists runtime dependencies of a package. These dependencies are other | ||
6059 | packages that must be installed in order for the package to function | ||
6060 | correctly. As an example, the following assignment declares that the | ||
6061 | package ``foo`` needs the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` to be | ||
6062 | installed: | ||
6063 | :: | ||
6064 | |||
6065 | RDEPENDS_foo = "bar baz" | ||
6066 | |||
6067 | The most common types of package | ||
6068 | runtime dependencies are automatically detected and added. Therefore, | ||
6069 | most recipes do not need to set ``RDEPENDS``. For more information, | ||
6070 | see the | ||
6071 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`" | ||
6072 | section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. | ||
6073 | |||
6074 | The practical effect of the above ``RDEPENDS`` assignment is that | ||
6075 | ``bar`` and ``baz`` will be declared as dependencies inside the | ||
6076 | package ``foo`` when it is written out by one of the | ||
6077 | :ref:`do_package_write_\* <ref-tasks-package_write_deb>` tasks. | ||
6078 | Exactly how this is done depends on which package format is used, | ||
6079 | which is determined by | ||
6080 | :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`. When the | ||
6081 | corresponding package manager installs the package, it will know to | ||
6082 | also install the packages on which it depends. | ||
6083 | |||
6084 | To ensure that the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` get built, the | ||
6085 | previous ``RDEPENDS`` assignment also causes a task dependency to be | ||
6086 | added. This dependency is from the recipe's | ||
6087 | :ref:`ref-tasks-build` (not to be confused with | ||
6088 | :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`) task to the | ||
6089 | ``do_package_write_*`` task of the recipes that build ``bar`` and | ||
6090 | ``baz``. | ||
6091 | |||
6092 | The names of the packages you list within ``RDEPENDS`` must be the | ||
6093 | names of other packages - they cannot be recipe names. Although | ||
6094 | package names and recipe names usually match, the important point | ||
6095 | here is that you are providing package names within the ``RDEPENDS`` | ||
6096 | variable. For an example of the default list of packages created from | ||
6097 | a recipe, see the :term:`PACKAGES` variable. | ||
6098 | |||
6099 | Because the ``RDEPENDS`` variable applies to packages being built, | ||
6100 | you should always use the variable in a form with an attached package | ||
6101 | name (remember that a single recipe can build multiple packages). For | ||
6102 | example, suppose you are building a development package that depends | ||
6103 | on the ``perl`` package. In this case, you would use the following | ||
6104 | ``RDEPENDS`` statement: | ||
6105 | :: | ||
6106 | |||
6107 | RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev += "perl" | ||
6108 | |||
6109 | In the example, | ||
6110 | the development package depends on the ``perl`` package. Thus, the | ||
6111 | ``RDEPENDS`` variable has the ``${PN}-dev`` package name as part of | ||
6112 | the variable. | ||
6113 | |||
6114 | .. note:: | ||
6115 | |||
6116 | ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev`` includes ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}`` | ||
6117 | by default. This default is set in the BitBake configuration file | ||
6118 | (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``). Be careful not to accidentally remove | ||
6119 | ``${PN}`` when modifying ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev``. Use the "+=" operator | ||
6120 | rather than the "=" operator. | ||
6121 | |||
6122 | The package names you use with ``RDEPENDS`` must appear as they would | ||
6123 | in the ``PACKAGES`` variable. The :term:`PKG` variable | ||
6124 | allows a different name to be used for the final package (e.g. the | ||
6125 | :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class uses this to rename | ||
6126 | packages), but this final package name cannot be used with | ||
6127 | ``RDEPENDS``, which makes sense as ``RDEPENDS`` is meant to be | ||
6128 | independent of the package format used. | ||
6129 | |||
6130 | BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports | ||
6131 | specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies | ||
6132 | depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences | ||
6133 | from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the | ||
6134 | ``RDEPENDS`` variable: | ||
6135 | :: | ||
6136 | |||
6137 | RDEPENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" | ||
6138 | |||
6139 | For ``operator``, you can specify the following: | ||
6140 | |||
6141 | - = | ||
6142 | - < | ||
6143 | - > | ||
6144 | - <= | ||
6145 | - >= | ||
6146 | |||
6147 | For version, provide the version number. | ||
6148 | |||
6149 | .. note:: | ||
6150 | |||
6151 | You can use ``EXTENDPKGV`` to provide a full package version | ||
6152 | specification. | ||
6153 | |||
6154 | For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or | ||
6155 | greater of the package ``foo``: | ||
6156 | :: | ||
6157 | |||
6158 | RDEPENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" | ||
6159 | |||
6160 | For information on build-time dependencies, see the | ||
6161 | :term:`DEPENDS` variable. You can also see the | ||
6162 | ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and | ||
6163 | ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the | ||
6164 | BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and | ||
6165 | dependencies. | ||
6166 | |||
6167 | :term:`REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES` | ||
6168 | When inheriting the | ||
6169 | :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>` | ||
6170 | class, this variable identifies distribution features that must exist | ||
6171 | in the current configuration in order for the OpenEmbedded build | ||
6172 | system to build the recipe. In other words, if the | ||
6173 | ``REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that does not | ||
6174 | appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then | ||
6175 | the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build | ||
6176 | the recipe then an error will be triggered. | ||
6177 | |||
6178 | :term:`RM_WORK_EXCLUDE` | ||
6179 | With ``rm_work`` enabled, this variable specifies a list of recipes | ||
6180 | whose work directories should not be removed. See the | ||
6181 | ":ref:`rm_work.bbclass <ref-classes-rm-work>`" section for more | ||
6182 | details. | ||
6183 | |||
6184 | :term:`ROOT_HOME` | ||
6185 | Defines the root home directory. By default, this directory is set as | ||
6186 | follows in the BitBake configuration file: | ||
6187 | :: | ||
6188 | |||
6189 | ROOT_HOME ??= "/home/root" | ||
6190 | |||
6191 | .. note:: | ||
6192 | |||
6193 | This default value is likely used because some embedded solutions | ||
6194 | prefer to have a read-only root filesystem and prefer to keep | ||
6195 | writeable data in one place. | ||
6196 | |||
6197 | You can override the default by setting the variable in any layer or | ||
6198 | in the ``local.conf`` file. Because the default is set using a "weak" | ||
6199 | assignment (i.e. "??="), you can use either of the following forms to | ||
6200 | define your override: | ||
6201 | :: | ||
6202 | |||
6203 | ROOT_HOME = "/root" | ||
6204 | ROOT_HOME ?= "/root" | ||
6205 | |||
6206 | These | ||
6207 | override examples use ``/root``, which is probably the most commonly | ||
6208 | used override. | ||
6209 | |||
6210 | :term:`ROOTFS` | ||
6211 | Indicates a filesystem image to include as the root filesystem. | ||
6212 | |||
6213 | The ``ROOTFS`` variable is an optional variable used with the | ||
6214 | :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class. | ||
6215 | |||
6216 | :term:`ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND` | ||
6217 | Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build | ||
6218 | system has installed packages. You can specify functions separated by | ||
6219 | semicolons: | ||
6220 | :: | ||
6221 | |||
6222 | ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... " | ||
6223 | |||
6224 | If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a | ||
6225 | function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the | ||
6226 | directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the | ||
6227 | :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more | ||
6228 | information. | ||
6229 | |||
6230 | :term:`ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` | ||
6231 | Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build | ||
6232 | system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions | ||
6233 | separated by semicolons: | ||
6234 | :: | ||
6235 | |||
6236 | ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " | ||
6237 | |||
6238 | If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a | ||
6239 | function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the | ||
6240 | directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the | ||
6241 | :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more | ||
6242 | information. | ||
6243 | |||
6244 | :term:`ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND` | ||
6245 | Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build | ||
6246 | system has removed unnecessary packages. When runtime package | ||
6247 | management is disabled in the image, several packages are removed | ||
6248 | including ``base-passwd``, ``shadow``, and ``update-alternatives``. | ||
6249 | You can specify functions separated by semicolons: | ||
6250 | :: | ||
6251 | |||
6252 | ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... " | ||
6253 | |||
6254 | If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a | ||
6255 | function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the | ||
6256 | directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the | ||
6257 | :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more | ||
6258 | information. | ||
6259 | |||
6260 | :term:`ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND` | ||
6261 | Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build | ||
6262 | system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions | ||
6263 | separated by semicolons: | ||
6264 | :: | ||
6265 | |||
6266 | ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " | ||
6267 | |||
6268 | If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a | ||
6269 | function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the | ||
6270 | directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the | ||
6271 | :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more | ||
6272 | information. | ||
6273 | |||
6274 | :term:`RPROVIDES` | ||
6275 | A list of package name aliases that a package also provides. These | ||
6276 | aliases are useful for satisfying runtime dependencies of other | ||
6277 | packages both during the build and on the target (as specified by | ||
6278 | ``RDEPENDS``). | ||
6279 | |||
6280 | .. note:: | ||
6281 | |||
6282 | A package's own name is implicitly already in its ``RPROVIDES`` list. | ||
6283 | |||
6284 | As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use the | ||
6285 | variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an | ||
6286 | example: | ||
6287 | :: | ||
6288 | |||
6289 | RPROVIDES_${PN} = "widget-abi-2" | ||
6290 | |||
6291 | :term:`RRECOMMENDS` | ||
6292 | A list of packages that extends the usability of a package being | ||
6293 | built. The package being built does not depend on this list of | ||
6294 | packages in order to successfully build, but rather uses them for | ||
6295 | extended usability. To specify runtime dependencies for packages, see | ||
6296 | the ``RDEPENDS`` variable. | ||
6297 | |||
6298 | The package manager will automatically install the ``RRECOMMENDS`` | ||
6299 | list of packages when installing the built package. However, you can | ||
6300 | prevent listed packages from being installed by using the | ||
6301 | :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`, | ||
6302 | :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`, and | ||
6303 | :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables. | ||
6304 | |||
6305 | Packages specified in ``RRECOMMENDS`` need not actually be produced. | ||
6306 | However, a recipe must exist that provides each package, either | ||
6307 | through the :term:`PACKAGES` or | ||
6308 | :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variables or the | ||
6309 | :term:`RPROVIDES` variable, or an error will occur | ||
6310 | during the build. If such a recipe does exist and the package is not | ||
6311 | produced, the build continues without error. | ||
6312 | |||
6313 | Because the ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable applies to packages being built, | ||
6314 | you should always attach an override to the variable to specify the | ||
6315 | particular package whose usability is being extended. For example, | ||
6316 | suppose you are building a development package that is extended to | ||
6317 | support wireless functionality. In this case, you would use the | ||
6318 | following: | ||
6319 | :: | ||
6320 | |||
6321 | RRECOMMENDS_${PN}-dev += "wireless_package_name" | ||
6322 | |||
6323 | In the | ||
6324 | example, the package name (``${PN}-dev``) must appear as it would in | ||
6325 | the ``PACKAGES`` namespace before any renaming of the output package | ||
6326 | by classes such as ``debian.bbclass``. | ||
6327 | |||
6328 | BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports | ||
6329 | specifying versioned recommends. Although the syntax varies depending | ||
6330 | on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences from you. | ||
6331 | Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the | ||
6332 | ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable: | ||
6333 | :: | ||
6334 | |||
6335 | RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)" | ||
6336 | |||
6337 | For ``operator``, you can specify the following: | ||
6338 | |||
6339 | - = | ||
6340 | - < | ||
6341 | - > | ||
6342 | - <= | ||
6343 | - >= | ||
6344 | |||
6345 | For example, the following sets up a recommend on version 1.2 or | ||
6346 | greater of the package ``foo``: | ||
6347 | :: | ||
6348 | |||
6349 | RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" | ||
6350 | |||
6351 | :term:`RREPLACES` | ||
6352 | A list of packages replaced by a package. The package manager uses | ||
6353 | this variable to determine which package should be installed to | ||
6354 | replace other package(s) during an upgrade. In order to also have the | ||
6355 | other package(s) removed at the same time, you must add the name of | ||
6356 | the other package to the ``RCONFLICTS`` variable. | ||
6357 | |||
6358 | As with all package-controlling variables, you must use this variable | ||
6359 | in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example: | ||
6360 | :: | ||
6361 | |||
6362 | RREPLACES_${PN} = "other_package_being_replaced" | ||
6363 | |||
6364 | BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports | ||
6365 | specifying versioned replacements. Although the syntax varies | ||
6366 | depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences | ||
6367 | from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the | ||
6368 | ``RREPLACES`` variable: | ||
6369 | :: | ||
6370 | |||
6371 | RREPLACES_${PN} = "package (operator version)" | ||
6372 | |||
6373 | For ``operator``, you can specify the following: | ||
6374 | |||
6375 | - = | ||
6376 | - < | ||
6377 | - > | ||
6378 | - <= | ||
6379 | - >= | ||
6380 | |||
6381 | For example, the following sets up a replacement using version 1.2 | ||
6382 | or greater of the package ``foo``: | ||
6383 | :: | ||
6384 | |||
6385 | RREPLACES_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)" | ||
6386 | |||
6387 | :term:`RSUGGESTS` | ||
6388 | A list of additional packages that you can suggest for installation | ||
6389 | by the package manager at the time a package is installed. Not all | ||
6390 | package managers support this functionality. | ||
6391 | |||
6392 | As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use this | ||
6393 | variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an | ||
6394 | example: | ||
6395 | :: | ||
6396 | |||
6397 | RSUGGESTS_${PN} = "useful_package another_package" | ||
6398 | |||
6399 | :term:`S` | ||
6400 | The location in the :term:`Build Directory` where | ||
6401 | unpacked recipe source code resides. By default, this directory is | ||
6402 | ``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/${``\ :term:`BPN`\ ``}-${``\ :term:`PV`\ ``}``, | ||
6403 | where ``${BPN}`` is the base recipe name and ``${PV}`` is the recipe | ||
6404 | version. If the source tarball extracts the code to a directory named | ||
6405 | anything other than ``${BPN}-${PV}``, or if the source code is | ||
6406 | fetched from an SCM such as Git or Subversion, then you must set | ||
6407 | ``S`` in the recipe so that the OpenEmbedded build system knows where | ||
6408 | to find the unpacked source. | ||
6409 | |||
6410 | As an example, assume a :term:`Source Directory` | ||
6411 | top-level folder named ``poky`` and a default Build Directory at | ||
6412 | ``poky/build``. In this case, the work directory the build system | ||
6413 | uses to keep the unpacked recipe for ``db`` is the following: | ||
6414 | :: | ||
6415 | |||
6416 | poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/db/5.1.19-r3/db-5.1.19 | ||
6417 | |||
6418 | The unpacked source code resides in the ``db-5.1.19`` folder. | ||
6419 | |||
6420 | This next example assumes a Git repository. By default, Git | ||
6421 | repositories are cloned to ``${WORKDIR}/git`` during | ||
6422 | :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch`. Since this path is different | ||
6423 | from the default value of ``S``, you must set it specifically so the | ||
6424 | source can be located: | ||
6425 | :: | ||
6426 | |||
6427 | SRC_URI = "git://path/to/repo.git" | ||
6428 | S = "${WORKDIR}/git" | ||
6429 | |||
6430 | :term:`SANITY_REQUIRED_UTILITIES` | ||
6431 | Specifies a list of command-line utilities that should be checked for | ||
6432 | during the initial sanity checking process when running BitBake. If | ||
6433 | any of the utilities are not installed on the build host, then | ||
6434 | BitBake immediately exits with an error. | ||
6435 | |||
6436 | :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS` | ||
6437 | A list of the host distribution identifiers that the build system has | ||
6438 | been tested against. Identifiers consist of the host distributor ID | ||
6439 | followed by the release, as reported by the ``lsb_release`` tool or | ||
6440 | as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. Separate the list items with | ||
6441 | explicit newline characters (``\n``). If ``SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS`` is | ||
6442 | not empty and the current value of | ||
6443 | :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` does not appear in the | ||
6444 | list, then the build system reports a warning that indicates the | ||
6445 | current host distribution has not been tested as a build host. | ||
6446 | |||
6447 | :term:`SDK_ARCH` | ||
6448 | The target architecture for the SDK. Typically, you do not directly | ||
6449 | set this variable. Instead, use :term:`SDKMACHINE`. | ||
6450 | |||
6451 | :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` | ||
6452 | The directory set up and used by the | ||
6453 | :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk>` class to which | ||
6454 | the SDK is deployed. The ``populate_sdk_base`` class defines | ||
6455 | ``SDK_DEPLOY`` as follows: | ||
6456 | :: | ||
6457 | |||
6458 | SDK_DEPLOY = "${TMPDIR}/deploy/sdk" | ||
6459 | |||
6460 | :term:`SDK_DIR` | ||
6461 | The parent directory used by the OpenEmbedded build system when | ||
6462 | creating SDK output. The | ||
6463 | :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class defines | ||
6464 | the variable as follows: | ||
6465 | :: | ||
6466 | |||
6467 | SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk" | ||
6468 | |||
6469 | .. note:: | ||
6470 | |||
6471 | The ``SDK_DIR`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of | ||
6472 | ``WORKDIR``. The final output directory is :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`. | ||
6473 | |||
6474 | :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE` | ||
6475 | Controls whether or not shared state artifacts are copied into the | ||
6476 | extensible SDK. The default value of "full" copies all of the | ||
6477 | required shared state artifacts into the extensible SDK. The value | ||
6478 | "minimal" leaves these artifacts out of the SDK. | ||
6479 | |||
6480 | .. note:: | ||
6481 | |||
6482 | If you set the variable to "minimal", you need to ensure | ||
6483 | :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` is set in the SDK's configuration to enable the | ||
6484 | artifacts to be fetched as needed. | ||
6485 | |||
6486 | :term:`SDK_HOST_MANIFEST` | ||
6487 | The manifest file for the host part of the SDK. This file lists all | ||
6488 | the installed packages that make up the host part of the SDK. The | ||
6489 | file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as | ||
6490 | follows: | ||
6491 | :: | ||
6492 | |||
6493 | packagename packagearch version | ||
6494 | |||
6495 | The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class | ||
6496 | defines the manifest file as follows: | ||
6497 | :: | ||
6498 | |||
6499 | SDK_HOST_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.host.manifest" | ||
6500 | |||
6501 | The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and | ||
6502 | :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables. | ||
6503 | |||
6504 | :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA` | ||
6505 | When set to "1", specifies to include the packagedata for all recipes | ||
6506 | in the "world" target in the extensible SDK. Including this data | ||
6507 | allows the ``devtool search`` command to find these recipes in search | ||
6508 | results, as well as allows the ``devtool add`` command to map | ||
6509 | dependencies more effectively. | ||
6510 | |||
6511 | .. note:: | ||
6512 | |||
6513 | Enabling the ``SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA`` | ||
6514 | variable significantly increases build time because all of world | ||
6515 | needs to be built. Enabling the variable also slightly increases | ||
6516 | the size of the extensible SDK. | ||
6517 | |||
6518 | :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN` | ||
6519 | When set to "1", specifies to include the toolchain in the extensible | ||
6520 | SDK. Including the toolchain is useful particularly when | ||
6521 | :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE` is set to "minimal" to keep | ||
6522 | the SDK reasonably small but you still want to provide a usable | ||
6523 | toolchain. For example, suppose you want to use the toolchain from an | ||
6524 | IDE or from other tools and you do not want to perform additional | ||
6525 | steps to install the toolchain. | ||
6526 | |||
6527 | The ``SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN`` variable defaults to "0" if | ||
6528 | ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "minimal", and defaults to "1" if | ||
6529 | ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "full". | ||
6530 | |||
6531 | :term:`SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST` | ||
6532 | A list of classes to remove from the :term:`INHERIT` | ||
6533 | value globally within the extensible SDK configuration. The | ||
6534 | :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets the | ||
6535 | default value: | ||
6536 | :: | ||
6537 | |||
6538 | SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST ?= "buildhistory icecc" | ||
6539 | |||
6540 | Some classes are not generally applicable within the extensible SDK | ||
6541 | context. You can use this variable to disable those classes. | ||
6542 | |||
6543 | For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's | ||
6544 | configuration, see the | ||
6545 | ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" | ||
6546 | section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the | ||
6547 | Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. | ||
6548 | |||
6549 | :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST` | ||
6550 | A list of variables not allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build | ||
6551 | system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. Usually, | ||
6552 | these are variables that are specific to the machine on which the | ||
6553 | build system is running and thus would be potentially problematic | ||
6554 | within the extensible SDK. | ||
6555 | |||
6556 | By default, ``SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST`` is set in the | ||
6557 | :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class and | ||
6558 | excludes the following variables: | ||
6559 | |||
6560 | - :term:`CONF_VERSION` | ||
6561 | - :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS` | ||
6562 | - :term:`bitbake:BB_NUMBER_PARSE_THREADS` | ||
6563 | - :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` | ||
6564 | - :term:`PRSERV_HOST` | ||
6565 | - :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` :term:`DL_DIR` | ||
6566 | - :term:`SSTATE_DIR` :term:`TMPDIR` | ||
6567 | - :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT` | ||
6568 | |||
6569 | For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's | ||
6570 | configuration, see the | ||
6571 | ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" | ||
6572 | section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the | ||
6573 | Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. | ||
6574 | |||
6575 | :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_WHITELIST` | ||
6576 | A list of variables allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build | ||
6577 | system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. By | ||
6578 | default, the list of variables is empty and is set in the | ||
6579 | :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class. | ||
6580 | |||
6581 | This list overrides the variables specified using the | ||
6582 | :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST` | ||
6583 | variable as well as any variables identified by automatic | ||
6584 | blacklisting due to the "/" character being found at the start of the | ||
6585 | value, which is usually indicative of being a path and thus might not | ||
6586 | be valid on the system where the SDK is installed. | ||
6587 | |||
6588 | For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's | ||
6589 | configuration, see the | ||
6590 | ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`" | ||
6591 | section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the | ||
6592 | Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. | ||
6593 | |||
6594 | :term:`SDK_NAME` | ||
6595 | The base name for SDK output files. The name is derived from the | ||
6596 | :term:`DISTRO`, :term:`TCLIBC`, | ||
6597 | :term:`SDK_ARCH`, | ||
6598 | :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`, and | ||
6599 | :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` variables: | ||
6600 | :: | ||
6601 | |||
6602 | SDK_NAME = "${DISTRO}-${TCLIBC}-${SDK_ARCH}-${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${TUNE_PKGARCH}" | ||
6603 | |||
6604 | :term:`SDK_OS` | ||
6605 | Specifies the operating system for which the SDK will be built. The | ||
6606 | default value is the value of :term:`BUILD_OS`. | ||
6607 | |||
6608 | :term:`SDK_OUTPUT` | ||
6609 | The location used by the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK | ||
6610 | output. The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` | ||
6611 | class defines the variable as follows: | ||
6612 | :: | ||
6613 | |||
6614 | SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk" | ||
6615 | SDK_OUTPUT = "${SDK_DIR}/image" | ||
6616 | SDK_DEPLOY = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/sdk" | ||
6617 | |||
6618 | .. note:: | ||
6619 | |||
6620 | The ``SDK_OUTPUT`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of | ||
6621 | :term:`WORKDIR` by way of :term:`SDK_DIR`. The final output directory is | ||
6622 | :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`. | ||
6623 | |||
6624 | :term:`SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS` | ||
6625 | Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the SDK machine. | ||
6626 | This variable is set automatically and should not normally be | ||
6627 | hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order | ||
6628 | of priority. The default value for ``SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any | ||
6629 | noarch ${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}". | ||
6630 | |||
6631 | :term:`SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND` | ||
6632 | Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build | ||
6633 | system creates the SDK. You can specify functions separated by | ||
6634 | semicolons: SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... " | ||
6635 | |||
6636 | If you need to pass an SDK path to a command within a function, you | ||
6637 | can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by | ||
6638 | the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the | ||
6639 | :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information. | ||
6640 | |||
6641 | :term:`SDK_PREFIX` | ||
6642 | The toolchain binary prefix used for ``nativesdk`` recipes. The | ||
6643 | OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``SDK_PREFIX`` value to set the | ||
6644 | :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building | ||
6645 | ``nativesdk`` recipes. The default value is "${SDK_SYS}-". | ||
6646 | |||
6647 | :term:`SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS` | ||
6648 | A list of shared state tasks added to the extensible SDK. By default, | ||
6649 | the following tasks are added: | ||
6650 | |||
6651 | - do_populate_lic | ||
6652 | - do_package_qa | ||
6653 | - do_populate_sysroot | ||
6654 | - do_deploy | ||
6655 | |||
6656 | Despite the default value of "" for the | ||
6657 | ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable, the above four tasks are always added | ||
6658 | to the SDK. To specify tasks beyond these four, you need to use the | ||
6659 | ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable (e.g. you are defining additional | ||
6660 | tasks that are needed in order to build | ||
6661 | :term:`SDK_TARGETS`). | ||
6662 | |||
6663 | :term:`SDK_SYS` | ||
6664 | Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating | ||
6665 | system, for which the SDK will be built. | ||
6666 | |||
6667 | The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based | ||
6668 | on :term:`SDK_ARCH`, | ||
6669 | :term:`SDK_VENDOR`, and | ||
6670 | :term:`SDK_OS`. You do not need to set the ``SDK_SYS`` | ||
6671 | variable yourself. | ||
6672 | |||
6673 | :term:`SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST` | ||
6674 | The manifest file for the target part of the SDK. This file lists all | ||
6675 | the installed packages that make up the target part of the SDK. The | ||
6676 | file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as | ||
6677 | follows: | ||
6678 | :: | ||
6679 | |||
6680 | packagename packagearch version | ||
6681 | |||
6682 | The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class | ||
6683 | defines the manifest file as follows: | ||
6684 | :: | ||
6685 | |||
6686 | SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.target.manifest" | ||
6687 | |||
6688 | The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and | ||
6689 | :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables. | ||
6690 | |||
6691 | :term:`SDK_TARGETS` | ||
6692 | A list of targets to install from shared state as part of the | ||
6693 | standard or extensible SDK installation. The default value is "${PN}" | ||
6694 | (i.e. the image from which the SDK is built). | ||
6695 | |||
6696 | The ``SDK_TARGETS`` variable is an internal variable and typically | ||
6697 | would not be changed. | ||
6698 | |||
6699 | :term:`SDK_TITLE` | ||
6700 | The title to be printed when running the SDK installer. By default, | ||
6701 | this title is based on the :term:`DISTRO_NAME` or | ||
6702 | :term:`DISTRO` variable and is set in the | ||
6703 | :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as | ||
6704 | follows: | ||
6705 | :: | ||
6706 | |||
6707 | SDK_TITLE ??= "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_NAME') or d.getVar('DISTRO')} SDK" | ||
6708 | |||
6709 | For the default distribution "poky", | ||
6710 | ``SDK_TITLE`` is set to "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)". | ||
6711 | |||
6712 | For information on how to change this default title, see the | ||
6713 | ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the extensible sdk installer title`" | ||
6714 | section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the | ||
6715 | Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. | ||
6716 | |||
6717 | :term:`SDK_UPDATE_URL` | ||
6718 | An optional URL for an update server for the extensible SDK. If set, | ||
6719 | the value is used as the default update server when running | ||
6720 | ``devtool sdk-update`` within the extensible SDK. | ||
6721 | |||
6722 | :term:`SDK_VENDOR` | ||
6723 | Specifies the name of the SDK vendor. | ||
6724 | |||
6725 | :term:`SDK_VERSION` | ||
6726 | Specifies the version of the SDK. The distribution configuration file | ||
6727 | (e.g. ``/meta-poky/conf/distro/poky.conf``) defines the | ||
6728 | ``SDK_VERSION`` as follows: | ||
6729 | :: | ||
6730 | |||
6731 | SDK_VERSION = "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_VERSION').replace('snapshot-${DATE}','snapshot')}" | ||
6732 | |||
6733 | For additional information, see the | ||
6734 | :term:`DISTRO_VERSION` and | ||
6735 | :term:`DATE` variables. | ||
6736 | |||
6737 | :term:`SDKEXTPATH` | ||
6738 | The default installation directory for the Extensible SDK. By | ||
6739 | default, this directory is based on the :term:`DISTRO` | ||
6740 | variable and is set in the | ||
6741 | :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as | ||
6742 | follows: | ||
6743 | :: | ||
6744 | |||
6745 | SDKEXTPATH ??= "~/${@d.getVar('DISTRO')}_sdk" | ||
6746 | |||
6747 | For the | ||
6748 | default distribution "poky", the ``SDKEXTPATH`` is set to "poky_sdk". | ||
6749 | |||
6750 | For information on how to change this default directory, see the | ||
6751 | ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the default sdk installation directory`" | ||
6752 | section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the | ||
6753 | Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual. | ||
6754 | |||
6755 | :term:`SDKIMAGE_FEATURES` | ||
6756 | Equivalent to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``. However, this variable applies to | ||
6757 | the SDK generated from an image using the following command: | ||
6758 | :: | ||
6759 | |||
6760 | $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename | ||
6761 | |||
6762 | :term:`SDKMACHINE` | ||
6763 | The machine for which the SDK is built. In other words, the SDK is | ||
6764 | built such that it runs on the target you specify with the | ||
6765 | ``SDKMACHINE`` value. The value points to a corresponding ``.conf`` | ||
6766 | file under ``conf/machine-sdk/``. | ||
6767 | |||
6768 | You can use "i686" and "x86_64" as possible values for this variable. | ||
6769 | The variable defaults to "i686" and is set in the local.conf file in | ||
6770 | the Build Directory. | ||
6771 | :: | ||
6772 | |||
6773 | SDKMACHINE ?= "i686" | ||
6774 | |||
6775 | .. note:: | ||
6776 | |||
6777 | You cannot set the ``SDKMACHINE`` | ||
6778 | variable in your distribution configuration file. If you do, the | ||
6779 | configuration will not take affect. | ||
6780 | |||
6781 | :term:`SDKPATH` | ||
6782 | Defines the path offered to the user for installation of the SDK that | ||
6783 | is generated by the OpenEmbedded build system. The path appears as | ||
6784 | the default location for installing the SDK when you run the SDK's | ||
6785 | installation script. You can override the offered path when you run | ||
6786 | the script. | ||
6787 | |||
6788 | :term:`SDKTARGETSYSROOT` | ||
6789 | The full path to the sysroot used for cross-compilation within an SDK | ||
6790 | as it will be when installed into the default | ||
6791 | :term:`SDKPATH`. | ||
6792 | |||
6793 | :term:`SECTION` | ||
6794 | The section in which packages should be categorized. Package | ||
6795 | management utilities can make use of this variable. | ||
6796 | |||
6797 | :term:`SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION` | ||
6798 | Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when | ||
6799 | building for the target. The flags are passed through the default | ||
6800 | value of the :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` variable. | ||
6801 | |||
6802 | The ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable takes the value of | ||
6803 | ``FULL_OPTIMIZATION`` unless ``DEBUG_BUILD`` = "1". If that is the | ||
6804 | case, the value of ``DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION`` is used. | ||
6805 | |||
6806 | :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLE` | ||
6807 | Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using | ||
6808 | `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a | ||
6809 | value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name | ||
6810 | separated by a space. You cannot specify more than one TTY device: | ||
6811 | :: | ||
6812 | |||
6813 | SERIAL_CONSOLE = "115200 ttyS0" | ||
6814 | |||
6815 | .. note:: | ||
6816 | |||
6817 | The ``SERIAL_CONSOLE`` variable is deprecated. Please use the | ||
6818 | :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` variable. | ||
6819 | |||
6820 | :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` | ||
6821 | Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using | ||
6822 | `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a | ||
6823 | value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name | ||
6824 | separated by a semicolon. Use spaces to separate multiple devices: | ||
6825 | :: | ||
6826 | |||
6827 | SERIAL_CONSOLES = "115200;ttyS0 115200;ttyS1" | ||
6828 | |||
6829 | :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK` | ||
6830 | Specifies serial consoles, which must be listed in | ||
6831 | :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES`, to check against | ||
6832 | ``/proc/console`` before enabling them using getty. This variable | ||
6833 | allows aliasing in the format: <device>:<alias>. If a device was | ||
6834 | listed as "sclp_line0" in ``/dev/`` and "ttyS0" was listed in | ||
6835 | ``/proc/console``, you would do the following: :: | ||
6836 | |||
6837 | SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK = "slcp_line0:ttyS0" | ||
6838 | |||
6839 | This variable is currently only supported with SysVinit (i.e. not | ||
6840 | with systemd). | ||
6841 | |||
6842 | :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS` | ||
6843 | A list of recipe dependencies that should not be used to determine | ||
6844 | signatures of tasks from one recipe when they depend on tasks from | ||
6845 | another recipe. For example: :: | ||
6846 | |||
6847 | SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "intone->mplayer2" | ||
6848 | |||
6849 | In the previous example, ``intone`` depends on ``mplayer2``. | ||
6850 | |||
6851 | You can use the special token ``"*"`` on the left-hand side of the | ||
6852 | dependency to match all recipes except the one on the right-hand | ||
6853 | side. Here is an example: :: | ||
6854 | |||
6855 | SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "*->quilt-native" | ||
6856 | |||
6857 | In the previous example, all recipes except ``quilt-native`` ignore | ||
6858 | task signatures from the ``quilt-native`` recipe when determining | ||
6859 | their task signatures. | ||
6860 | |||
6861 | Use of this variable is one mechanism to remove dependencies that | ||
6862 | affect task signatures and thus force rebuilds when a recipe changes. | ||
6863 | |||
6864 | .. note:: | ||
6865 | |||
6866 | If you add an inappropriate dependency for a recipe relationship, | ||
6867 | the software might break during runtime if the interface of the | ||
6868 | second recipe was changed after the first recipe had been built. | ||
6869 | |||
6870 | :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDERECIPES_ABISAFE` | ||
6871 | A list of recipes that are completely stable and will never change. | ||
6872 | The ABI for the recipes in the list are presented by output from the | ||
6873 | tasks run to build the recipe. Use of this variable is one way to | ||
6874 | remove dependencies from one recipe on another that affect task | ||
6875 | signatures and thus force rebuilds when the recipe changes. | ||
6876 | |||
6877 | .. note:: | ||
6878 | |||
6879 | If you add an inappropriate variable to this list, the software | ||
6880 | might break at runtime if the interface of the recipe was changed | ||
6881 | after the other had been built. | ||
6882 | |||
6883 | :term:`SITEINFO_BITS` | ||
6884 | Specifies the number of bits for the target system CPU. The value | ||
6885 | should be either "32" or "64". | ||
6886 | |||
6887 | :term:`SITEINFO_ENDIANNESS` | ||
6888 | Specifies the endian byte order of the target system. The value | ||
6889 | should be either "le" for little-endian or "be" for big-endian. | ||
6890 | |||
6891 | :term:`SKIP_FILEDEPS` | ||
6892 | Enables removal of all files from the "Provides" section of an RPM | ||
6893 | package. Removal of these files is required for packages containing | ||
6894 | prebuilt binaries and libraries such as ``libstdc++`` and ``glibc``. | ||
6895 | |||
6896 | To enable file removal, set the variable to "1" in your | ||
6897 | ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file in your: | ||
6898 | :term:`Build Directory`. | ||
6899 | :: | ||
6900 | |||
6901 | SKIP_FILEDEPS = "1" | ||
6902 | |||
6903 | :term:`SOC_FAMILY` | ||
6904 | Groups together machines based upon the same family of SOC (System On | ||
6905 | Chip). You typically set this variable in a common ``.inc`` file that | ||
6906 | you include in the configuration files of all the machines. | ||
6907 | |||
6908 | .. note:: | ||
6909 | |||
6910 | You must include ``conf/machine/include/soc-family.inc`` for this | ||
6911 | variable to appear in :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`. | ||
6912 | |||
6913 | :term:`SOLIBS` | ||
6914 | Defines the suffix for shared libraries used on the target platform. | ||
6915 | By default, this suffix is ".so.*" for all Linux-based systems and is | ||
6916 | defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. | ||
6917 | |||
6918 | You will see this variable referenced in the default values of | ||
6919 | ``FILES_${PN}``. | ||
6920 | |||
6921 | :term:`SOLIBSDEV` | ||
6922 | Defines the suffix for the development symbolic link (symlink) for | ||
6923 | shared libraries on the target platform. By default, this suffix is | ||
6924 | ".so" for Linux-based systems and is defined in the | ||
6925 | ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. | ||
6926 | |||
6927 | You will see this variable referenced in the default values of | ||
6928 | ``FILES_${PN}-dev``. | ||
6929 | |||
6930 | :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH` | ||
6931 | When you are fetching files to create a mirror of sources (i.e. | ||
6932 | creating a source mirror), setting ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`` to "1" in | ||
6933 | your ``local.conf`` configuration file ensures the source for all | ||
6934 | recipes are fetched regardless of whether or not a recipe is | ||
6935 | compatible with the configuration. A recipe is considered | ||
6936 | incompatible with the currently configured machine when either or | ||
6937 | both the :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE` | ||
6938 | variable and :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` variables | ||
6939 | specify compatibility with a machine other than that of the current | ||
6940 | machine or host. | ||
6941 | |||
6942 | .. note:: | ||
6943 | |||
6944 | Do not set the ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`` | ||
6945 | variable unless you are creating a source mirror. In other words, | ||
6946 | do not set the variable during a normal build. | ||
6947 | |||
6948 | :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_URL` | ||
6949 | Defines your own :term:`PREMIRRORS` from which to | ||
6950 | first fetch source before attempting to fetch from the upstream | ||
6951 | specified in :term:`SRC_URI`. | ||
6952 | |||
6953 | To use this variable, you must globally inherit the | ||
6954 | :ref:`own-mirrors <ref-classes-own-mirrors>` class and then provide | ||
6955 | the URL to your mirrors. Here is the general syntax: | ||
6956 | :: | ||
6957 | |||
6958 | INHERIT += "own-mirrors" | ||
6959 | SOURCE_MIRROR_URL = "http://example.com/my_source_mirror" | ||
6960 | |||
6961 | .. note:: | ||
6962 | |||
6963 | You can specify only a single URL in ``SOURCE_MIRROR_URL``. | ||
6964 | |||
6965 | :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP` | ||
6966 | Maps commonly used license names to their SPDX counterparts found in | ||
6967 | ``meta/files/common-licenses/``. For the default ``SPDXLICENSEMAP`` | ||
6968 | mappings, see the ``meta/conf/licenses.conf`` file. | ||
6969 | |||
6970 | For additional information, see the :term:`LICENSE` | ||
6971 | variable. | ||
6972 | |||
6973 | :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX` | ||
6974 | A list of prefixes for :term:`PN` used by the OpenEmbedded | ||
6975 | build system to create variants of recipes or packages. The list | ||
6976 | specifies the prefixes to strip off during certain circumstances such | ||
6977 | as the generation of the :term:`BPN` variable. | ||
6978 | |||
6979 | :term:`SPL_BINARY` | ||
6980 | The file type for the Secondary Program Loader (SPL). Some devices | ||
6981 | use an SPL from which to boot (e.g. the BeagleBone development | ||
6982 | board). For such cases, you can declare the file type of the SPL | ||
6983 | binary in the ``u-boot.inc`` include file, which is used in the | ||
6984 | U-Boot recipe. | ||
6985 | |||
6986 | The SPL file type is set to "null" by default in the ``u-boot.inc`` | ||
6987 | file as follows: | ||
6988 | :: | ||
6989 | |||
6990 | # Some versions of u-boot build an SPL (Second Program Loader) image that | ||
6991 | # should be packaged along with the u-boot binary as well as placed in the | ||
6992 | # deploy directory. For those versions they can set the following variables | ||
6993 | # to allow packaging the SPL. | ||
6994 | SPL_BINARY ?= "" | ||
6995 | SPL_BINARYNAME ?= "${@os.path.basename(d.getVar("SPL_BINARY"))}" | ||
6996 | SPL_IMAGE ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}-${PV}-${PR}" | ||
6997 | SPL_SYMLINK ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}" | ||
6998 | |||
6999 | The ``SPL_BINARY`` variable helps form | ||
7000 | various ``SPL_*`` variables used by the OpenEmbedded build system. | ||
7001 | |||
7002 | See the BeagleBone machine configuration example in the | ||
7003 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding a layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`" | ||
7004 | section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package Developer's Guide | ||
7005 | for additional information. | ||
7006 | |||
7007 | :term:`SRC_URI` | ||
7008 | The list of source files - local or remote. This variable tells the | ||
7009 | OpenEmbedded build system which bits to pull in for the build and how | ||
7010 | to pull them in. For example, if the recipe or append file only needs | ||
7011 | to fetch a tarball from the Internet, the recipe or append file uses | ||
7012 | a single ``SRC_URI`` entry. On the other hand, if the recipe or | ||
7013 | append file needs to fetch a tarball, apply two patches, and include | ||
7014 | a custom file, the recipe or append file would include four instances | ||
7015 | of the variable. | ||
7016 | |||
7017 | The following list explains the available URI protocols. URI | ||
7018 | protocols are highly dependent on particular BitBake Fetcher | ||
7019 | submodules. Depending on the fetcher BitBake uses, various URL | ||
7020 | parameters are employed. For specifics on the supported Fetchers, see | ||
7021 | the ":ref:`Fetchers <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>`" section in the | ||
7022 | BitBake User Manual. | ||
7023 | |||
7024 | - ``file://`` - Fetches files, which are usually files shipped | ||
7025 | with the :term:`Metadata`, from the local machine (e.g. | ||
7026 | :ref:`patch <overview-manual/concepts:patching>` files). | ||
7027 | The path is relative to the :term:`FILESPATH` | ||
7028 | variable. Thus, the build system searches, in order, from the | ||
7029 | following directories, which are assumed to be a subdirectories of | ||
7030 | the directory in which the recipe file (``.bb``) or append file | ||
7031 | (``.bbappend``) resides: | ||
7032 | |||
7033 | - ``${BPN}`` - The base recipe name without any special suffix | ||
7034 | or version numbers. | ||
7035 | |||
7036 | - ``${BP}`` - ``${BPN}-${PV}``. The base recipe name and | ||
7037 | version but without any special package name suffix. | ||
7038 | |||
7039 | - *files -* Files within a directory, which is named ``files`` | ||
7040 | and is also alongside the recipe or append file. | ||
7041 | |||
7042 | .. note:: | ||
7043 | |||
7044 | If you want the build system to pick up files specified through | ||
7045 | a | ||
7046 | SRC_URI | ||
7047 | statement from your append file, you need to be sure to extend | ||
7048 | the | ||
7049 | FILESPATH | ||
7050 | variable by also using the | ||
7051 | FILESEXTRAPATHS | ||
7052 | variable from within your append file. | ||
7053 | |||
7054 | - ``bzr://`` - Fetches files from a Bazaar revision control | ||
7055 | repository. | ||
7056 | |||
7057 | - ``git://`` - Fetches files from a Git revision control | ||
7058 | repository. | ||
7059 | |||
7060 | - ``osc://`` - Fetches files from an OSC (OpenSUSE Build service) | ||
7061 | revision control repository. | ||
7062 | |||
7063 | - ``repo://`` - Fetches files from a repo (Git) repository. | ||
7064 | |||
7065 | - ``ccrc://`` - Fetches files from a ClearCase repository. | ||
7066 | |||
7067 | - ``http://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``http``. | ||
7068 | |||
7069 | - ``https://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``https``. | ||
7070 | |||
7071 | - ``ftp://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``ftp``. | ||
7072 | |||
7073 | - ``cvs://`` - Fetches files from a CVS revision control | ||
7074 | repository. | ||
7075 | |||
7076 | - ``hg://`` - Fetches files from a Mercurial (``hg``) revision | ||
7077 | control repository. | ||
7078 | |||
7079 | - ``p4://`` - Fetches files from a Perforce (``p4``) revision | ||
7080 | control repository. | ||
7081 | |||
7082 | - ``ssh://`` - Fetches files from a secure shell. | ||
7083 | |||
7084 | - ``svn://`` - Fetches files from a Subversion (``svn``) revision | ||
7085 | control repository. | ||
7086 | |||
7087 | - ``npm://`` - Fetches JavaScript modules from a registry. | ||
7088 | |||
7089 | Standard and recipe-specific options for ``SRC_URI`` exist. Here are | ||
7090 | standard options: | ||
7091 | |||
7092 | - ``apply`` - Whether to apply the patch or not. The default | ||
7093 | action is to apply the patch. | ||
7094 | |||
7095 | - ``striplevel`` - Which striplevel to use when applying the | ||
7096 | patch. The default level is 1. | ||
7097 | |||
7098 | - ``patchdir`` - Specifies the directory in which the patch should | ||
7099 | be applied. The default is ``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``. | ||
7100 | |||
7101 | Here are options specific to recipes building code from a revision | ||
7102 | control system: | ||
7103 | |||
7104 | - ``mindate`` - Apply the patch only if | ||
7105 | :term:`SRCDATE` is equal to or greater than | ||
7106 | ``mindate``. | ||
7107 | |||
7108 | - ``maxdate`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCDATE`` is not later | ||
7109 | than ``maxdate``. | ||
7110 | |||
7111 | - ``minrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to or | ||
7112 | greater than ``minrev``. | ||
7113 | |||
7114 | - ``maxrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not later | ||
7115 | than ``maxrev``. | ||
7116 | |||
7117 | - ``rev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to | ||
7118 | ``rev``. | ||
7119 | |||
7120 | - ``notrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not equal to | ||
7121 | ``rev``. | ||
7122 | |||
7123 | Here are some additional options worth mentioning: | ||
7124 | |||
7125 | - ``unpack`` - Controls whether or not to unpack the file if it is | ||
7126 | an archive. The default action is to unpack the file. | ||
7127 | |||
7128 | - ``destsuffix`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into | ||
7129 | the specified subdirectory of :term:`WORKDIR` when | ||
7130 | the Git fetcher is used. | ||
7131 | |||
7132 | - ``subdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into the | ||
7133 | specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the local (``file://``) | ||
7134 | fetcher is used. | ||
7135 | |||
7136 | - ``localdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into | ||
7137 | the specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the CVS fetcher is | ||
7138 | used. | ||
7139 | |||
7140 | - ``subpath`` - Limits the checkout to a specific subpath of the | ||
7141 | tree when using the Git fetcher is used. | ||
7142 | |||
7143 | - ``name`` - Specifies a name to be used for association with | ||
7144 | ``SRC_URI`` checksums or :term:`SRCREV` when you have more than one | ||
7145 | file or git repository specified in ``SRC_URI``. For example: | ||
7146 | :: | ||
7147 | |||
7148 | SRC_URI = "git://example.com/foo.git;name=first \ | ||
7149 | git://example.com/bar.git;name=second \ | ||
7150 | http://example.com/file.tar.gz;name=third" | ||
7151 | |||
7152 | SRCREV_first = "f1d2d2f924e986ac86fdf7b36c94bcdf32beec15" | ||
7153 | SRCREV_second = "e242ed3bffccdf271b7fbaf34ed72d089537b42f" | ||
7154 | SRC_URI[third.sha256sum] = "13550350a8681c84c861aac2e5b440161c2b33a3e4f302ac680ca5b686de48de" | ||
7155 | |||
7156 | |||
7157 | - ``downloadfilename`` - Specifies the filename used when storing | ||
7158 | the downloaded file. | ||
7159 | |||
7160 | :term:`SRC_URI_OVERRIDES_PACKAGE_ARCH` | ||
7161 | By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically detects | ||
7162 | whether ``SRC_URI`` contains files that are machine-specific. If so, | ||
7163 | the build system automatically changes ``PACKAGE_ARCH``. Setting this | ||
7164 | variable to "0" disables this behavior. | ||
7165 | |||
7166 | :term:`SRCDATE` | ||
7167 | The date of the source code used to build the package. This variable | ||
7168 | applies only if the source was fetched from a Source Code Manager | ||
7169 | (SCM). | ||
7170 | |||
7171 | :term:`SRCPV` | ||
7172 | Returns the version string of the current package. This string is | ||
7173 | used to help define the value of :term:`PV`. | ||
7174 | |||
7175 | The ``SRCPV`` variable is defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` | ||
7176 | configuration file in the :term:`Source Directory` as | ||
7177 | follows: | ||
7178 | :: | ||
7179 | |||
7180 | SRCPV = "${@bb.fetch2.get_srcrev(d)}" | ||
7181 | |||
7182 | Recipes that need to define ``PV`` do so with the help of the | ||
7183 | ``SRCPV``. For example, the ``ofono`` recipe (``ofono_git.bb``) | ||
7184 | located in ``meta/recipes-connectivity`` in the Source Directory | ||
7185 | defines ``PV`` as follows: | ||
7186 | :: | ||
7187 | |||
7188 | PV = "0.12-git${SRCPV}" | ||
7189 | |||
7190 | :term:`SRCREV` | ||
7191 | The revision of the source code used to build the package. This | ||
7192 | variable applies to Subversion, Git, Mercurial, and Bazaar only. Note | ||
7193 | that if you want to build a fixed revision and you want to avoid | ||
7194 | performing a query on the remote repository every time BitBake parses | ||
7195 | your recipe, you should specify a ``SRCREV`` that is a full revision | ||
7196 | identifier and not just a tag. | ||
7197 | |||
7198 | .. note:: | ||
7199 | |||
7200 | For information on limitations when inheriting the latest revision | ||
7201 | of software using ``SRCREV``, see the :term:`AUTOREV` variable | ||
7202 | description and the | ||
7203 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`" | ||
7204 | section, which is in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
7205 | |||
7206 | :term:`SSTATE_DIR` | ||
7207 | The directory for the shared state cache. | ||
7208 | |||
7209 | :term:`SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK` | ||
7210 | If set to "1", allows fetches from mirrors that are specified in | ||
7211 | :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` to work even when | ||
7212 | fetching from the network is disabled by setting ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` to | ||
7213 | "1". Using the ``SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK`` variable is useful if | ||
7214 | you have set ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` to point to an internal server for | ||
7215 | your shared state cache, but you want to disable any other fetching | ||
7216 | from the network. | ||
7217 | |||
7218 | :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` | ||
7219 | Configures the OpenEmbedded build system to search other mirror | ||
7220 | locations for prebuilt cache data objects before building out the | ||
7221 | data. This variable works like fetcher :term:`MIRRORS` | ||
7222 | and :term:`PREMIRRORS` and points to the cache | ||
7223 | locations to check for the shared state (sstate) objects. | ||
7224 | |||
7225 | You can specify a filesystem directory or a remote URL such as HTTP | ||
7226 | or FTP. The locations you specify need to contain the shared state | ||
7227 | cache (sstate-cache) results from previous builds. The sstate-cache | ||
7228 | you point to can also be from builds on other machines. | ||
7229 | |||
7230 | When pointing to sstate build artifacts on another machine that uses | ||
7231 | a different GCC version for native builds, you must configure | ||
7232 | ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` with a regular expression that maps local search | ||
7233 | paths to server paths. The paths need to take into account | ||
7234 | :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` set by the | ||
7235 | :ref:`uninative <ref-classes-uninative>` class. For example, the | ||
7236 | following maps the local search path ``universal-4.9`` to the | ||
7237 | server-provided path server_url_sstate_path: | ||
7238 | :: | ||
7239 | |||
7240 | SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "file://universal-4.9/(.*) http://server_url_sstate_path/universal-4.8/\1 \n" | ||
7241 | |||
7242 | If a mirror uses the same structure as | ||
7243 | :term:`SSTATE_DIR`, you need to add "PATH" at the | ||
7244 | end as shown in the examples below. The build system substitutes the | ||
7245 | correct path within the directory structure. | ||
7246 | :: | ||
7247 | |||
7248 | SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "\ | ||
7249 | file://.* http://someserver.tld/share/sstate/PATH;downloadfilename=PATH \n \ | ||
7250 | file://.* file:///some-local-dir/sstate/PATH" | ||
7251 | |||
7252 | :term:`SSTATE_SCAN_FILES` | ||
7253 | Controls the list of files the OpenEmbedded build system scans for | ||
7254 | hardcoded installation paths. The variable uses a space-separated | ||
7255 | list of filenames (not paths) with standard wildcard characters | ||
7256 | allowed. | ||
7257 | |||
7258 | During a build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates a shared state | ||
7259 | (sstate) object during the first stage of preparing the sysroots. | ||
7260 | That object is scanned for hardcoded paths for original installation | ||
7261 | locations. The list of files that are scanned for paths is controlled | ||
7262 | by the ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` variable. Typically, recipes add files | ||
7263 | they want to be scanned to the value of ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` rather | ||
7264 | than the variable being comprehensively set. The | ||
7265 | :ref:`sstate <ref-classes-sstate>` class specifies the default list | ||
7266 | of files. | ||
7267 | |||
7268 | For details on the process, see the | ||
7269 | :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class. | ||
7270 | |||
7271 | :term:`STAGING_BASE_LIBDIR_NATIVE` | ||
7272 | Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot | ||
7273 | directory for the build host. | ||
7274 | |||
7275 | :term:`STAGING_BASELIBDIR` | ||
7276 | Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot | ||
7277 | directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built | ||
7278 | (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). | ||
7279 | |||
7280 | :term:`STAGING_BINDIR` | ||
7281 | Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot | ||
7282 | directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built | ||
7283 | (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). | ||
7284 | |||
7285 | :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_CROSS` | ||
7286 | Specifies the path to the directory containing binary configuration | ||
7287 | scripts. These scripts provide configuration information for other | ||
7288 | software that wants to make use of libraries or include files | ||
7289 | provided by the software associated with the script. | ||
7290 | |||
7291 | .. note:: | ||
7292 | |||
7293 | This style of build configuration has been largely replaced by | ||
7294 | ``pkg-config``. Consequently, if ``pkg-config`` is supported by the | ||
7295 | library to which you are linking, it is recommended you use | ||
7296 | ``pkg-config`` instead of a provided configuration script. | ||
7297 | |||
7298 | :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE` | ||
7299 | Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot | ||
7300 | directory for the build host. | ||
7301 | |||
7302 | :term:`STAGING_DATADIR` | ||
7303 | Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot | ||
7304 | directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built | ||
7305 | (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). | ||
7306 | |||
7307 | :term:`STAGING_DATADIR_NATIVE` | ||
7308 | Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot | ||
7309 | directory for the build host. | ||
7310 | |||
7311 | :term:`STAGING_DIR` | ||
7312 | Helps construct the ``recipe-sysroots`` directory, which is used | ||
7313 | during packaging. | ||
7314 | |||
7315 | For information on how staging for recipe-specific sysroots occurs, | ||
7316 | see the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` | ||
7317 | task, the ":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:sharing files between recipes`" | ||
7318 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual, the | ||
7319 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:configuration, compilation, and staging`" | ||
7320 | section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, and the | ||
7321 | :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` variable. | ||
7322 | |||
7323 | .. note:: | ||
7324 | |||
7325 | Recipes should never write files directly under the ``STAGING_DIR`` | ||
7326 | directory because the OpenEmbedded build system manages the | ||
7327 | directory automatically. Instead, files should be installed to | ||
7328 | ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}`` within your recipe's :ref:`ref-tasks-install` | ||
7329 | task and then the OpenEmbedded build system will stage a subset of | ||
7330 | those files into the sysroot. | ||
7331 | |||
7332 | :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST` | ||
7333 | Specifies the path to the sysroot directory for the system on which | ||
7334 | the component is built to run (the system that hosts the component). | ||
7335 | For most recipes, this sysroot is the one in which that recipe's | ||
7336 | :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task copies | ||
7337 | files. Exceptions include ``-native`` recipes, where the | ||
7338 | ``do_populate_sysroot`` task instead uses | ||
7339 | :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`. Depending on | ||
7340 | the type of recipe and the build target, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` can | ||
7341 | have the following values: | ||
7342 | |||
7343 | - For recipes building for the target machine, the value is | ||
7344 | "${:term:`STAGING_DIR`}/${:term:`MACHINE`}". | ||
7345 | |||
7346 | - For native recipes building for the build host, the value is empty | ||
7347 | given the assumption that when building for the build host, the | ||
7348 | build host's own directories should be used. | ||
7349 | |||
7350 | .. note:: | ||
7351 | |||
7352 | ``-native`` recipes are not installed into host paths like such | ||
7353 | as ``/usr``. Rather, these recipes are installed into | ||
7354 | ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE``. When compiling ``-native`` recipes, | ||
7355 | standard build environment variables such as | ||
7356 | :term:`CPPFLAGS` and | ||
7357 | :term:`CFLAGS` are set up so that both host paths | ||
7358 | and ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`` are searched for libraries and | ||
7359 | headers using, for example, GCC's ``-isystem`` option. | ||
7360 | |||
7361 | Thus, the emphasis is that the ``STAGING_DIR*`` variables | ||
7362 | should be viewed as input variables by tasks such as | ||
7363 | :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`, | ||
7364 | :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`, and | ||
7365 | :ref:`ref-tasks-install`. Having the real system | ||
7366 | root correspond to ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` makes conceptual sense | ||
7367 | for ``-native`` recipes, as they make use of host headers and | ||
7368 | libraries. | ||
7369 | |||
7370 | :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE` | ||
7371 | Specifies the path to the sysroot directory used when building | ||
7372 | components that run on the build host itself. | ||
7373 | |||
7374 | :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET` | ||
7375 | Specifies the path to the sysroot used for the system for which the | ||
7376 | component generates code. For components that do not generate code, | ||
7377 | which is the majority, ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` is set to match | ||
7378 | :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`. | ||
7379 | |||
7380 | Some recipes build binaries that can run on the target system but | ||
7381 | those binaries in turn generate code for another different system | ||
7382 | (e.g. cross-canadian recipes). Using terminology from GNU, the | ||
7383 | primary system is referred to as the "HOST" and the secondary, or | ||
7384 | different, system is referred to as the "TARGET". Thus, the binaries | ||
7385 | run on the "HOST" system and generate binaries for the "TARGET" | ||
7386 | system. The ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` variable points to the sysroot used | ||
7387 | for the "HOST" system, while ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` points to the | ||
7388 | sysroot used for the "TARGET" system. | ||
7389 | |||
7390 | :term:`STAGING_ETCDIR_NATIVE` | ||
7391 | Specifies the path to the ``/etc`` subdirectory of the sysroot | ||
7392 | directory for the build host. | ||
7393 | |||
7394 | :term:`STAGING_EXECPREFIXDIR` | ||
7395 | Specifies the path to the ``/usr`` subdirectory of the sysroot | ||
7396 | directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built | ||
7397 | (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). | ||
7398 | |||
7399 | :term:`STAGING_INCDIR` | ||
7400 | Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the | ||
7401 | sysroot directory for the target for which the current recipe being | ||
7402 | built (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). | ||
7403 | |||
7404 | :term:`STAGING_INCDIR_NATIVE` | ||
7405 | Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the | ||
7406 | sysroot directory for the build host. | ||
7407 | |||
7408 | :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR` | ||
7409 | Points to the directory containing the kernel build artifacts. | ||
7410 | Recipes building software that needs to access kernel build artifacts | ||
7411 | (e.g. ``systemtap-uprobes``) can look in the directory specified with | ||
7412 | the ``STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR`` variable to find these artifacts | ||
7413 | after the kernel has been built. | ||
7414 | |||
7415 | :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` | ||
7416 | The directory with kernel headers that are required to build | ||
7417 | out-of-tree modules. | ||
7418 | |||
7419 | :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR` | ||
7420 | Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot | ||
7421 | directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built | ||
7422 | (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`). | ||
7423 | |||
7424 | :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR_NATIVE` | ||
7425 | Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot | ||
7426 | directory for the build host. | ||
7427 | |||
7428 | :term:`STAMP` | ||
7429 | Specifies the base path used to create recipe stamp files. The path | ||
7430 | to an actual stamp file is constructed by evaluating this string and | ||
7431 | then appending additional information. Currently, the default | ||
7432 | assignment for ``STAMP`` as set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` | ||
7433 | file is: | ||
7434 | :: | ||
7435 | |||
7436 | STAMP = "${STAMPS_DIR}/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}" | ||
7437 | |||
7438 | For information on how BitBake uses stamp files to determine if a | ||
7439 | task should be rerun, see the | ||
7440 | ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:stamp files and the rerunning of tasks`" | ||
7441 | section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. | ||
7442 | |||
7443 | See :term:`STAMPS_DIR`, | ||
7444 | :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`, | ||
7445 | :term:`PN`, :term:`EXTENDPE`, | ||
7446 | :term:`PV`, and :term:`PR` for related variable | ||
7447 | information. | ||
7448 | |||
7449 | :term:`STAMPS_DIR` | ||
7450 | Specifies the base directory in which the OpenEmbedded build system | ||
7451 | places stamps. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/stamps``. | ||
7452 | |||
7453 | :term:`STRIP` | ||
7454 | The minimal command and arguments to run ``strip``, which is used to | ||
7455 | strip symbols. | ||
7456 | |||
7457 | :term:`SUMMARY` | ||
7458 | The short (72 characters or less) summary of the binary package for | ||
7459 | packaging systems such as ``opkg``, ``rpm``, or ``dpkg``. By default, | ||
7460 | ``SUMMARY`` is used to define the | ||
7461 | :term:`DESCRIPTION` variable if ``DESCRIPTION`` is | ||
7462 | not set in the recipe. | ||
7463 | |||
7464 | :term:`SVNDIR` | ||
7465 | The directory in which files checked out of a Subversion system are | ||
7466 | stored. | ||
7467 | |||
7468 | :term:`SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE` | ||
7469 | Specifies the kernel boot default console. If you want to use a | ||
7470 | console other than the default, set this variable in your recipe as | ||
7471 | follows where "X" is the console number you want to use: | ||
7472 | :: | ||
7473 | |||
7474 | SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE = "console=ttyX" | ||
7475 | |||
7476 | The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class initially sets | ||
7477 | this variable to null but then checks for a value later. | ||
7478 | |||
7479 | :term:`SYSLINUX_OPTS` | ||
7480 | Lists additional options to add to the syslinux file. You need to set | ||
7481 | this variable in your recipe. If you want to list multiple options, | ||
7482 | separate the options with a semicolon character (``;``). | ||
7483 | |||
7484 | The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class uses this variable | ||
7485 | to create a set of options. | ||
7486 | |||
7487 | :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL` | ||
7488 | Specifies the alternate serial port or turns it off. To turn off | ||
7489 | serial, set this variable to an empty string in your recipe. The | ||
7490 | variable's default value is set in the | ||
7491 | :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows: | ||
7492 | :: | ||
7493 | |||
7494 | SYSLINUX_SERIAL ?= "0 115200" | ||
7495 | |||
7496 | The class checks for and uses the variable as needed. | ||
7497 | |||
7498 | :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY` | ||
7499 | Specifies the alternate console=tty... kernel boot argument. The | ||
7500 | variable's default value is set in the | ||
7501 | :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows: | ||
7502 | :: | ||
7503 | |||
7504 | SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY ?= "console=ttyS0,115200" | ||
7505 | |||
7506 | The class checks for and uses the variable as needed. | ||
7507 | |||
7508 | :term:`SYSLINUX_SPLASH` | ||
7509 | An ``.LSS`` file used as the background for the VGA boot menu when | ||
7510 | you use the boot menu. You need to set this variable in your recipe. | ||
7511 | |||
7512 | The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks for this | ||
7513 | variable and if found, the OpenEmbedded build system installs the | ||
7514 | splash screen. | ||
7515 | |||
7516 | :term:`SYSROOT_DESTDIR` | ||
7517 | Points to the temporary directory under the work directory (default | ||
7518 | "``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/sysroot-destdir``") | ||
7519 | where the files populated into the sysroot are assembled during the | ||
7520 | :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. | ||
7521 | |||
7522 | :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` | ||
7523 | Directories that are staged into the sysroot by the | ||
7524 | :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. By | ||
7525 | default, the following directories are staged: | ||
7526 | :: | ||
7527 | |||
7528 | SYSROOT_DIRS = " \ | ||
7529 | ${includedir} \ | ||
7530 | ${libdir} \ | ||
7531 | ${base_libdir} \ | ||
7532 | ${nonarch_base_libdir} \ | ||
7533 | ${datadir} \ | ||
7534 | " | ||
7535 | |||
7536 | :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST` | ||
7537 | Directories that are not staged into the sysroot by the | ||
7538 | :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. You | ||
7539 | can use this variable to exclude certain subdirectories of | ||
7540 | directories listed in :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` from | ||
7541 | staging. By default, the following directories are not staged: | ||
7542 | :: | ||
7543 | |||
7544 | SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST = " \ | ||
7545 | ${mandir} \ | ||
7546 | ${docdir} \ | ||
7547 | ${infodir} \ | ||
7548 | ${datadir}/locale \ | ||
7549 | ${datadir}/applications \ | ||
7550 | ${datadir}/fonts \ | ||
7551 | ${datadir}/pixmaps \ | ||
7552 | " | ||
7553 | |||
7554 | :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE` | ||
7555 | Extra directories staged into the sysroot by the | ||
7556 | :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task for | ||
7557 | ``-native`` recipes, in addition to those specified in | ||
7558 | :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS`. By default, the following | ||
7559 | extra directories are staged: | ||
7560 | :: | ||
7561 | |||
7562 | SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE = " \ | ||
7563 | ${bindir} \ | ||
7564 | ${sbindir} \ | ||
7565 | ${base_bindir} \ | ||
7566 | ${base_sbindir} \ | ||
7567 | ${libexecdir} \ | ||
7568 | ${sysconfdir} \ | ||
7569 | ${localstatedir} \ | ||
7570 | " | ||
7571 | |||
7572 | .. note:: | ||
7573 | |||
7574 | Programs built by ``-native`` recipes run directly from the sysroot | ||
7575 | (:term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`), which is why additional directories | ||
7576 | containing program executables and supporting files need to be staged. | ||
7577 | |||
7578 | :term:`SYSROOT_PREPROCESS_FUNCS` | ||
7579 | A list of functions to execute after files are staged into the | ||
7580 | sysroot. These functions are usually used to apply additional | ||
7581 | processing on the staged files, or to stage additional files. | ||
7582 | |||
7583 | :term:`SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE` | ||
7584 | When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, | ||
7585 | this variable specifies whether the specified service in | ||
7586 | :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE` should start | ||
7587 | automatically or not. By default, the service is enabled to | ||
7588 | automatically start at boot time. The default setting is in the | ||
7589 | :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class as follows: | ||
7590 | :: | ||
7591 | |||
7592 | SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE ??= "enable" | ||
7593 | |||
7594 | You can disable the service by setting the variable to "disable". | ||
7595 | |||
7596 | :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG` | ||
7597 | When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to | ||
7598 | "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` variable specifies the | ||
7599 | configuration file that should be used. By default, the | ||
7600 | :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the | ||
7601 | ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` as follows: | ||
7602 | :: | ||
7603 | |||
7604 | SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG ?= "${:term:`S`}/loader.conf" | ||
7605 | |||
7606 | For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot | ||
7607 | documentation <http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. | ||
7608 | |||
7609 | :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES` | ||
7610 | When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to | ||
7611 | "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` variable specifies a | ||
7612 | list of entry files (``*.conf``) to install that contain one boot | ||
7613 | entry per file. By default, the | ||
7614 | :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the | ||
7615 | ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` as follows: | ||
7616 | :: | ||
7617 | |||
7618 | SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES ?= "" | ||
7619 | |||
7620 | For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot | ||
7621 | documentation <http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. | ||
7622 | |||
7623 | :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT` | ||
7624 | When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to | ||
7625 | "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` variable specifies the | ||
7626 | boot menu timeout in seconds. By default, the | ||
7627 | :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the | ||
7628 | ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` as follows: | ||
7629 | :: | ||
7630 | |||
7631 | SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT ?= "10" | ||
7632 | |||
7633 | For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot | ||
7634 | documentation <http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__. | ||
7635 | |||
7636 | :term:`SYSTEMD_PACKAGES` | ||
7637 | When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, | ||
7638 | this variable locates the systemd unit files when they are not found | ||
7639 | in the main recipe's package. By default, the ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`` | ||
7640 | variable is set such that the systemd unit files are assumed to | ||
7641 | reside in the recipes main package: | ||
7642 | :: | ||
7643 | |||
7644 | SYSTEMD_PACKAGES ?= "${PN}" | ||
7645 | |||
7646 | If these unit files are not in this recipe's main package, you need | ||
7647 | to use ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`` to list the package or packages in which | ||
7648 | the build system can find the systemd unit files. | ||
7649 | |||
7650 | :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE` | ||
7651 | When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class, | ||
7652 | this variable specifies the systemd service name for a package. | ||
7653 | |||
7654 | When you specify this file in your recipe, use a package name | ||
7655 | override to indicate the package to which the value applies. Here is | ||
7656 | an example from the connman recipe: | ||
7657 | :: | ||
7658 | |||
7659 | SYSTEMD_SERVICE_${PN} = "connman.service" | ||
7660 | |||
7661 | :term:`SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS` | ||
7662 | When using | ||
7663 | :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`, | ||
7664 | specifies a space-separated list of the virtual terminals that should | ||
7665 | run a `getty <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__ | ||
7666 | (allowing login), assuming :term:`USE_VT` is not set to | ||
7667 | "0". | ||
7668 | |||
7669 | The default value for ``SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS`` is "1" (i.e. only | ||
7670 | run a getty on the first virtual terminal). | ||
7671 | |||
7672 | :term:`T` | ||
7673 | This variable points to a directory were BitBake places temporary | ||
7674 | files, which consist mostly of task logs and scripts, when building a | ||
7675 | particular recipe. The variable is typically set as follows: | ||
7676 | :: | ||
7677 | |||
7678 | T = "${WORKDIR}/temp" | ||
7679 | |||
7680 | The :term:`WORKDIR` is the directory into which | ||
7681 | BitBake unpacks and builds the recipe. The default ``bitbake.conf`` | ||
7682 | file sets this variable. | ||
7683 | |||
7684 | The ``T`` variable is not to be confused with the | ||
7685 | :term:`TMPDIR` variable, which points to the root of | ||
7686 | the directory tree where BitBake places the output of an entire | ||
7687 | build. | ||
7688 | |||
7689 | :term:`TARGET_ARCH` | ||
7690 | The target machine's architecture. The OpenEmbedded build system | ||
7691 | supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures | ||
7692 | supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is | ||
7693 | configurable: | ||
7694 | |||
7695 | - arm | ||
7696 | - i586 | ||
7697 | - x86_64 | ||
7698 | - powerpc | ||
7699 | - powerpc64 | ||
7700 | - mips | ||
7701 | - mipsel | ||
7702 | |||
7703 | For additional information on machine architectures, see the | ||
7704 | :term:`TUNE_ARCH` variable. | ||
7705 | |||
7706 | :term:`TARGET_AS_ARCH` | ||
7707 | Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target | ||
7708 | system. ``TARGET_AS_ARCH`` is initialized from | ||
7709 | :term:`TUNE_ASARGS` by default in the BitBake | ||
7710 | configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``): | ||
7711 | :: | ||
7712 | |||
7713 | TARGET_AS_ARCH = "${TUNE_ASARGS}" | ||
7714 | |||
7715 | :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH` | ||
7716 | Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target | ||
7717 | system. ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` is initialized from | ||
7718 | :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` by default. | ||
7719 | |||
7720 | .. note:: | ||
7721 | |||
7722 | It is a common workaround to append :term:`LDFLAGS` to | ||
7723 | ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` in recipes that build software for the target that | ||
7724 | would not otherwise respect the exported ``LDFLAGS`` variable. | ||
7725 | |||
7726 | :term:`TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH` | ||
7727 | This is a specific kernel compiler flag for a CPU or Application | ||
7728 | Binary Interface (ABI) tune. The flag is used rarely and only for | ||
7729 | cases where a userspace :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` is not | ||
7730 | compatible with the kernel compilation. The ``TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH`` | ||
7731 | variable allows the kernel (and associated modules) to use a | ||
7732 | different configuration. See the | ||
7733 | ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/feature-arm-thumb.inc`` file in the | ||
7734 | :term:`Source Directory` for an example. | ||
7735 | |||
7736 | :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` | ||
7737 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the | ||
7738 | target. When building in the target context, | ||
7739 | :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by | ||
7740 | default. | ||
7741 | |||
7742 | Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the ``CFLAGS`` | ||
7743 | variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` value so that | ||
7744 | executables built using the SDK also have the flags applied. | ||
7745 | |||
7746 | :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS` | ||
7747 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the | ||
7748 | C and the C++ compilers) when building for the target. When building | ||
7749 | in the target context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set to the | ||
7750 | value of this variable by default. | ||
7751 | |||
7752 | Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the | ||
7753 | ``CPPFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CPPFLAGS`` | ||
7754 | value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags | ||
7755 | applied. | ||
7756 | |||
7757 | :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS` | ||
7758 | Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the | ||
7759 | target. When building in the target context, | ||
7760 | :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable | ||
7761 | by default. | ||
7762 | |||
7763 | Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the | ||
7764 | ``CXXFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CXXFLAGS`` | ||
7765 | value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags | ||
7766 | applied. | ||
7767 | |||
7768 | :term:`TARGET_FPU` | ||
7769 | Specifies the method for handling FPU code. For FPU-less targets, | ||
7770 | which include most ARM CPUs, the variable must be set to "soft". If | ||
7771 | not, the kernel emulation gets used, which results in a performance | ||
7772 | penalty. | ||
7773 | |||
7774 | :term:`TARGET_LD_ARCH` | ||
7775 | Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system. | ||
7776 | ``TARGET_LD_ARCH`` is initialized from | ||
7777 | :term:`TUNE_LDARGS` by default in the BitBake | ||
7778 | configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``): | ||
7779 | :: | ||
7780 | |||
7781 | TARGET_LD_ARCH = "${TUNE_LDARGS}" | ||
7782 | |||
7783 | :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS` | ||
7784 | Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the | ||
7785 | target. When building in the target context, | ||
7786 | :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable | ||
7787 | by default. | ||
7788 | |||
7789 | Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the | ||
7790 | :term:`LDFLAGS` variable in the environment to the | ||
7791 | ``TARGET_LDFLAGS`` value so that executables built using the SDK also | ||
7792 | have the flags applied. | ||
7793 | |||
7794 | :term:`TARGET_OS` | ||
7795 | Specifies the target's operating system. The variable can be set to | ||
7796 | "linux" for glibc-based systems (GNU C Library) and to "linux-musl" | ||
7797 | for musl libc. For ARM/EABI targets, "linux-gnueabi" and | ||
7798 | "linux-musleabi" possible values exist. | ||
7799 | |||
7800 | :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` | ||
7801 | Specifies the prefix used for the toolchain binary target tools. | ||
7802 | |||
7803 | Depending on the type of recipe and the build target, | ||
7804 | ``TARGET_PREFIX`` is set as follows: | ||
7805 | |||
7806 | - For recipes building for the target machine, the value is | ||
7807 | "${:term:`TARGET_SYS`}-". | ||
7808 | |||
7809 | - For native recipes, the build system sets the variable to the | ||
7810 | value of ``BUILD_PREFIX``. | ||
7811 | |||
7812 | - For native SDK recipes (``nativesdk``), the build system sets the | ||
7813 | variable to the value of ``SDK_PREFIX``. | ||
7814 | |||
7815 | :term:`TARGET_SYS` | ||
7816 | Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating | ||
7817 | system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the | ||
7818 | current recipe. | ||
7819 | |||
7820 | The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based | ||
7821 | on :term:`TARGET_ARCH`, | ||
7822 | :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`, and | ||
7823 | :term:`TARGET_OS` variables. | ||
7824 | |||
7825 | .. note:: | ||
7826 | |||
7827 | You do not need to set the ``TARGET_SYS`` variable yourself. | ||
7828 | |||
7829 | Consider these two examples: | ||
7830 | |||
7831 | - Given a native recipe on a 32-bit, x86 machine running Linux, the | ||
7832 | value is "i686-linux". | ||
7833 | |||
7834 | - Given a recipe being built for a little-endian, MIPS target | ||
7835 | running Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux". | ||
7836 | |||
7837 | :term:`TARGET_VENDOR` | ||
7838 | Specifies the name of the target vendor. | ||
7839 | |||
7840 | :term:`TCLIBC` | ||
7841 | Specifies the GNU standard C library (``libc``) variant to use during | ||
7842 | the build process. This variable replaces ``POKYLIBC``, which is no | ||
7843 | longer supported. | ||
7844 | |||
7845 | You can select "glibc", "musl", "newlib", or "baremetal" | ||
7846 | |||
7847 | :term:`TCLIBCAPPEND` | ||
7848 | Specifies a suffix to be appended onto the | ||
7849 | :term:`TMPDIR` value. The suffix identifies the | ||
7850 | ``libc`` variant for building. When you are building for multiple | ||
7851 | variants with the same :term:`Build Directory`, this | ||
7852 | mechanism ensures that output for different ``libc`` variants is kept | ||
7853 | separate to avoid potential conflicts. | ||
7854 | |||
7855 | In the ``defaultsetup.conf`` file, the default value of | ||
7856 | ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` is "-${TCLIBC}". However, distros such as poky, | ||
7857 | which normally only support one ``libc`` variant, set | ||
7858 | ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` to "" in their distro configuration file resulting | ||
7859 | in no suffix being applied. | ||
7860 | |||
7861 | :term:`TCMODE` | ||
7862 | Specifies the toolchain selector. ``TCMODE`` controls the | ||
7863 | characteristics of the generated packages and images by telling the | ||
7864 | OpenEmbedded build system which toolchain profile to use. By default, | ||
7865 | the OpenEmbedded build system builds its own internal toolchain. The | ||
7866 | variable's default value is "default", which uses that internal | ||
7867 | toolchain. | ||
7868 | |||
7869 | .. note:: | ||
7870 | |||
7871 | If ``TCMODE`` is set to a value other than "default", then it is your | ||
7872 | responsibility to ensure that the toolchain is compatible with the | ||
7873 | default toolchain. Using older or newer versions of these | ||
7874 | components might cause build problems. See the Release Notes for | ||
7875 | the Yocto Project release for the specific components with which | ||
7876 | the toolchain must be compatible. To access the Release Notes, go | ||
7877 | to the :yocto_home:`Downloads </software-overview/downloads>` | ||
7878 | page on the Yocto Project website and click on the "RELEASE | ||
7879 | INFORMATION" link for the appropriate release. | ||
7880 | |||
7881 | The ``TCMODE`` variable is similar to :term:`TCLIBC`, | ||
7882 | which controls the variant of the GNU standard C library (``libc``) | ||
7883 | used during the build process: ``glibc`` or ``musl``. | ||
7884 | |||
7885 | With additional layers, it is possible to use a pre-compiled external | ||
7886 | toolchain. One example is the Sourcery G++ Toolchain. The support for | ||
7887 | this toolchain resides in the separate Mentor Graphics | ||
7888 | ``meta-sourcery`` layer at | ||
7889 | http://github.com/MentorEmbedded/meta-sourcery/. | ||
7890 | |||
7891 | The layer's ``README`` file contains information on how to use the | ||
7892 | Sourcery G++ Toolchain as an external toolchain. In summary, you must | ||
7893 | be sure to add the layer to your ``bblayers.conf`` file in front of | ||
7894 | the ``meta`` layer and then set the ``EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN`` variable | ||
7895 | in your ``local.conf`` file to the location in which you installed | ||
7896 | the toolchain. | ||
7897 | |||
7898 | The fundamentals used for this example apply to any external | ||
7899 | toolchain. You can use ``meta-sourcery`` as a template for adding | ||
7900 | support for other external toolchains. | ||
7901 | |||
7902 | :term:`TEST_EXPORT_DIR` | ||
7903 | The location the OpenEmbedded build system uses to export tests when | ||
7904 | the :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY` variable is set | ||
7905 | to "1". | ||
7906 | |||
7907 | The ``TEST_EXPORT_DIR`` variable defaults to | ||
7908 | ``"${TMPDIR}/testimage/${PN}"``. | ||
7909 | |||
7910 | :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY` | ||
7911 | Specifies to export the tests only. Set this variable to "1" if you | ||
7912 | do not want to run the tests but you want them to be exported in a | ||
7913 | manner that you to run them outside of the build system. | ||
7914 | |||
7915 | :term:`TEST_LOG_DIR` | ||
7916 | Holds the SSH log and the boot log for QEMU machines. The | ||
7917 | ``TEST_LOG_DIR`` variable defaults to ``"${WORKDIR}/testimage"``. | ||
7918 | |||
7919 | .. note:: | ||
7920 | |||
7921 | Actual test results reside in the task log (``log.do_testimage``), | ||
7922 | which is in the ``${WORKDIR}/temp/`` directory. | ||
7923 | |||
7924 | :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD` | ||
7925 | For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to | ||
7926 | control the power of the target machine under test. Typically, this | ||
7927 | command would point to a script that performs the appropriate action | ||
7928 | (e.g. interacting with a web-enabled power strip). The specified | ||
7929 | command should expect to receive as the last argument "off", "on" or | ||
7930 | "cycle" specifying to power off, on, or cycle (power off and then | ||
7931 | power on) the device, respectively. | ||
7932 | |||
7933 | :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS` | ||
7934 | For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to | ||
7935 | pass through to the command specified in | ||
7936 | :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`. Setting | ||
7937 | ``TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you | ||
7938 | wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and | ||
7939 | non-machine-specific parts of the arguments. | ||
7940 | |||
7941 | :term:`TEST_QEMUBOOT_TIMEOUT` | ||
7942 | The time in seconds allowed for an image to boot before automated | ||
7943 | runtime tests begin to run against an image. The default timeout | ||
7944 | period to allow the boot process to reach the login prompt is 500 | ||
7945 | seconds. You can specify a different value in the ``local.conf`` | ||
7946 | file. | ||
7947 | |||
7948 | For more information on testing images, see the | ||
7949 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" | ||
7950 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
7951 | |||
7952 | :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD` | ||
7953 | For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to | ||
7954 | connect to the serial console of the target machine under test. This | ||
7955 | command simply needs to connect to the serial console and forward | ||
7956 | that connection to standard input and output as any normal terminal | ||
7957 | program does. | ||
7958 | |||
7959 | For example, to use the Picocom terminal program on serial device | ||
7960 | ``/dev/ttyUSB0`` at 115200bps, you would set the variable as follows: | ||
7961 | :: | ||
7962 | |||
7963 | TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "picocom /dev/ttyUSB0 -b 115200" | ||
7964 | |||
7965 | :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS` | ||
7966 | For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to | ||
7967 | pass through to the command specified in | ||
7968 | :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD`. Setting | ||
7969 | ``TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you | ||
7970 | wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and | ||
7971 | non-machine-specific parts of the command. | ||
7972 | |||
7973 | :term:`TEST_SERVER_IP` | ||
7974 | The IP address of the build machine (host machine). This IP address | ||
7975 | is usually automatically detected. However, if detection fails, this | ||
7976 | variable needs to be set to the IP address of the build machine (i.e. | ||
7977 | where the build is taking place). | ||
7978 | |||
7979 | .. note:: | ||
7980 | |||
7981 | The ``TEST_SERVER_IP`` variable is only used for a small number of | ||
7982 | tests such as the "dnf" test suite, which needs to download packages | ||
7983 | from ``WORKDIR/oe-rootfs-repo``. | ||
7984 | |||
7985 | :term:`TEST_SUITES` | ||
7986 | An ordered list of tests (modules) to run against an image when | ||
7987 | performing automated runtime testing. | ||
7988 | |||
7989 | The OpenEmbedded build system provides a core set of tests that can | ||
7990 | be used against images. | ||
7991 | |||
7992 | .. note:: | ||
7993 | |||
7994 | Currently, there is only support for running these tests under | ||
7995 | QEMU. | ||
7996 | |||
7997 | Tests include ``ping``, ``ssh``, ``df`` among others. You can add | ||
7998 | your own tests to the list of tests by appending ``TEST_SUITES`` as | ||
7999 | follows: | ||
8000 | :: | ||
8001 | |||
8002 | TEST_SUITES_append = " mytest" | ||
8003 | |||
8004 | Alternatively, you can | ||
8005 | provide the "auto" option to have all applicable tests run against | ||
8006 | the image. | ||
8007 | :: | ||
8008 | |||
8009 | TEST_SUITES_append = " auto" | ||
8010 | |||
8011 | Using this option causes the | ||
8012 | build system to automatically run tests that are applicable to the | ||
8013 | image. Tests that are not applicable are skipped. | ||
8014 | |||
8015 | The order in which tests are run is important. Tests that depend on | ||
8016 | another test must appear later in the list than the test on which | ||
8017 | they depend. For example, if you append the list of tests with two | ||
8018 | tests (``test_A`` and ``test_B``) where ``test_B`` is dependent on | ||
8019 | ``test_A``, then you must order the tests as follows: | ||
8020 | :: | ||
8021 | |||
8022 | TEST_SUITES = "test_A test_B" | ||
8023 | |||
8024 | For more information on testing images, see the | ||
8025 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" | ||
8026 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
8027 | |||
8028 | :term:`TEST_TARGET` | ||
8029 | Specifies the target controller to use when running tests against a | ||
8030 | test image. The default controller to use is "qemu": | ||
8031 | :: | ||
8032 | |||
8033 | TEST_TARGET = "qemu" | ||
8034 | |||
8035 | A target controller is a class that defines how an image gets | ||
8036 | deployed on a target and how a target is started. A layer can extend | ||
8037 | the controllers by adding a module in the layer's | ||
8038 | ``/lib/oeqa/controllers`` directory and by inheriting the | ||
8039 | ``BaseTarget`` class, which is an abstract class that cannot be used | ||
8040 | as a value of ``TEST_TARGET``. | ||
8041 | |||
8042 | You can provide the following arguments with ``TEST_TARGET``: | ||
8043 | |||
8044 | - *"qemu":* Boots a QEMU image and runs the tests. See the | ||
8045 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on qemu`" section | ||
8046 | in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more | ||
8047 | information. | ||
8048 | |||
8049 | - *"simpleremote":* Runs the tests on target hardware that is | ||
8050 | already up and running. The hardware can be on the network or it | ||
8051 | can be a device running an image on QEMU. You must also set | ||
8052 | :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP` when you use | ||
8053 | "simpleremote". | ||
8054 | |||
8055 | .. note:: | ||
8056 | |||
8057 | This argument is defined in | ||
8058 | ``meta/lib/oeqa/controllers/simpleremote.py``. | ||
8059 | |||
8060 | For information on running tests on hardware, see the | ||
8061 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on hardware`" | ||
8062 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. | ||
8063 | |||
8064 | :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP` | ||
8065 | The IP address of your hardware under test. The ``TEST_TARGET_IP`` | ||
8066 | variable has no effect when :term:`TEST_TARGET` is | ||
8067 | set to "qemu". | ||
8068 | |||
8069 | When you specify the IP address, you can also include a port. Here is | ||
8070 | an example: | ||
8071 | :: | ||
8072 | |||
8073 | TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.1.4:2201" | ||
8074 | |||
8075 | Specifying a port is | ||
8076 | useful when SSH is started on a non-standard port or in cases when | ||
8077 | your hardware under test is behind a firewall or network that is not | ||
8078 | directly accessible from your host and you need to do port address | ||
8079 | translation. | ||
8080 | |||
8081 | :term:`TESTIMAGE_AUTO` | ||
8082 | Automatically runs the series of automated tests for images when an | ||
8083 | image is successfully built. Setting ``TESTIMAGE_AUTO`` to "1" causes | ||
8084 | any image that successfully builds to automatically boot under QEMU. | ||
8085 | Using the variable also adds in dependencies so that any SDK for | ||
8086 | which testing is requested is automatically built first. | ||
8087 | |||
8088 | These tests are written in Python making use of the ``unittest`` | ||
8089 | module, and the majority of them run commands on the target system | ||
8090 | over ``ssh``. You can set this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` | ||
8091 | file in the :term:`Build Directory` to have the | ||
8092 | OpenEmbedded build system automatically run these tests after an | ||
8093 | image successfully builds: | ||
8094 | |||
8095 | TESTIMAGE_AUTO = "1" | ||
8096 | |||
8097 | For more information | ||
8098 | on enabling, running, and writing these tests, see the | ||
8099 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`" | ||
8100 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual and the | ||
8101 | ":ref:`testimage*.bbclass <ref-classes-testimage*>`" section. | ||
8102 | |||
8103 | :term:`THISDIR` | ||
8104 | The directory in which the file BitBake is currently parsing is | ||
8105 | located. Do not manually set this variable. | ||
8106 | |||
8107 | :term:`TIME` | ||
8108 | The time the build was started. Times appear using the hour, minute, | ||
8109 | and second (HMS) format (e.g. "140159" for one minute and fifty-nine | ||
8110 | seconds past 1400 hours). | ||
8111 | |||
8112 | :term:`TMPDIR` | ||
8113 | This variable is the base directory the OpenEmbedded build system | ||
8114 | uses for all build output and intermediate files (other than the | ||
8115 | shared state cache). By default, the ``TMPDIR`` variable points to | ||
8116 | ``tmp`` within the :term:`Build Directory`. | ||
8117 | |||
8118 | If you want to establish this directory in a location other than the | ||
8119 | default, you can uncomment and edit the following statement in the | ||
8120 | ``conf/local.conf`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`: | ||
8121 | :: | ||
8122 | |||
8123 | #TMPDIR = "${TOPDIR}/tmp" | ||
8124 | |||
8125 | An example use for this scenario is to set ``TMPDIR`` to a local disk, | ||
8126 | which does not use NFS, while having the Build Directory use NFS. | ||
8127 | |||
8128 | The filesystem used by ``TMPDIR`` must have standard filesystem | ||
8129 | semantics (i.e. mixed-case files are unique, POSIX file locking, and | ||
8130 | persistent inodes). Due to various issues with NFS and bugs in some | ||
8131 | implementations, NFS does not meet this minimum requirement. | ||
8132 | Consequently, ``TMPDIR`` cannot be on NFS. | ||
8133 | |||
8134 | :term:`TOOLCHAIN_HOST_TASK` | ||
8135 | This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when | ||
8136 | building an SDK, which contains a cross-development environment. The | ||
8137 | packages specified by this variable are part of the toolchain set | ||
8138 | that runs on the :term:`SDKMACHINE`, and each | ||
8139 | package should usually have the prefix ``nativesdk-``. For example, | ||
8140 | consider the following command when building an SDK: | ||
8141 | :: | ||
8142 | |||
8143 | $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename | ||
8144 | |||
8145 | In this case, a default list of packages is | ||
8146 | set in this variable, but you can add additional packages to the | ||
8147 | list. See the | ||
8148 | ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section | ||
8149 | in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible | ||
8150 | Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information. | ||
8151 | |||
8152 | For background information on cross-development toolchains in the | ||
8153 | Yocto Project development environment, see the | ||
8154 | ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`" | ||
8155 | section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For | ||
8156 | information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the | ||
8157 | :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual. | ||
8158 | |||
8159 | :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` | ||
8160 | This variable defines the name used for the toolchain output. The | ||
8161 | :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets | ||
8162 | the ``TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME`` variable as follows: | ||
8163 | :: | ||
8164 | |||
8165 | TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME ?= "${SDK_NAME}-toolchain-${SDK_VERSION}" | ||
8166 | |||
8167 | See | ||
8168 | the :term:`SDK_NAME` and | ||
8169 | :term:`SDK_VERSION` variables for additional | ||
8170 | information. | ||
8171 | |||
8172 | :term:`TOOLCHAIN_TARGET_TASK` | ||
8173 | This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when | ||
8174 | it creates the target part of an SDK (i.e. the part built for the | ||
8175 | target hardware), which includes libraries and headers. Use this | ||
8176 | variable to add individual packages to the part of the SDK that runs | ||
8177 | on the target. See the | ||
8178 | ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section | ||
8179 | in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible | ||
8180 | Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information. | ||
8181 | |||
8182 | For background information on cross-development toolchains in the | ||
8183 | Yocto Project development environment, see the | ||
8184 | ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`" | ||
8185 | section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For | ||
8186 | information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the | ||
8187 | :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual. | ||
8188 | |||
8189 | :term:`TOPDIR` | ||
8190 | The top-level :term:`Build Directory`. BitBake | ||
8191 | automatically sets this variable when you initialize your build | ||
8192 | environment using :ref:`structure-core-script`. | ||
8193 | |||
8194 | :term:`TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH` | ||
8195 | A sanitized version of :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. This | ||
8196 | variable is used where the architecture is needed in a value where | ||
8197 | underscores are not allowed, for example within package filenames. In | ||
8198 | this case, dash characters replace any underscore characters used in | ||
8199 | ``TARGET_ARCH``. | ||
8200 | |||
8201 | Do not edit this variable. | ||
8202 | |||
8203 | :term:`TUNE_ARCH` | ||
8204 | The GNU canonical architecture for a specific architecture (i.e. | ||
8205 | ``arm``, ``armeb``, ``mips``, ``mips64``, and so forth). BitBake uses | ||
8206 | this value to setup configuration. | ||
8207 | |||
8208 | ``TUNE_ARCH`` definitions are specific to a given architecture. The | ||
8209 | definitions can be a single static definition, or can be dynamically | ||
8210 | adjusted. You can see details for a given CPU family by looking at | ||
8211 | the architecture's ``README`` file. For example, the | ||
8212 | ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/README`` file in the | ||
8213 | :term:`Source Directory` provides information for | ||
8214 | ``TUNE_ARCH`` specific to the ``mips`` architecture. | ||
8215 | |||
8216 | ``TUNE_ARCH`` is tied closely to | ||
8217 | :term:`TARGET_ARCH`, which defines the target | ||
8218 | machine's architecture. The BitBake configuration file | ||
8219 | (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) sets ``TARGET_ARCH`` as follows: | ||
8220 | :: | ||
8221 | |||
8222 | TARGET_ARCH = "${TUNE_ARCH}" | ||
8223 | |||
8224 | The following list, which is by no means complete since architectures | ||
8225 | are configurable, shows supported machine architectures: | ||
8226 | |||
8227 | - arm | ||
8228 | - i586 | ||
8229 | - x86_64 | ||
8230 | - powerpc | ||
8231 | - powerpc64 | ||
8232 | - mips | ||
8233 | - mipsel | ||
8234 | |||
8235 | :term:`TUNE_ASARGS` | ||
8236 | Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target | ||
8237 | system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. | ||
8238 | ``TUNE_ASARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are | ||
8239 | typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced | ||
8240 | through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the | ||
8241 | ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags | ||
8242 | for the x86 architecture as follows: | ||
8243 | :: | ||
8244 | |||
8245 | TUNE_ASARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-x32", "", d)}" | ||
8246 | |||
8247 | .. note:: | ||
8248 | |||
8249 | Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, | ||
8250 | in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can | ||
8251 | supply its own set of flags). | ||
8252 | |||
8253 | :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` | ||
8254 | Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target | ||
8255 | system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. | ||
8256 | ``TUNE_CCARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are | ||
8257 | typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced | ||
8258 | through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. | ||
8259 | |||
8260 | .. note:: | ||
8261 | |||
8262 | Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, | ||
8263 | in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can | ||
8264 | supply its own set of flags). | ||
8265 | |||
8266 | :term:`TUNE_FEATURES` | ||
8267 | Features used to "tune" a compiler for optimal use given a specific | ||
8268 | processor. The features are defined within the tune files and allow | ||
8269 | arguments (i.e. ``TUNE_*ARGS``) to be dynamically generated based on | ||
8270 | the features. | ||
8271 | |||
8272 | The OpenEmbedded build system verifies the features to be sure they | ||
8273 | are not conflicting and that they are supported. | ||
8274 | |||
8275 | The BitBake configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) defines | ||
8276 | ``TUNE_FEATURES`` as follows: | ||
8277 | :: | ||
8278 | |||
8279 | TUNE_FEATURES ??= "${TUNE_FEATURES_tune-${DEFAULTTUNE}}" | ||
8280 | |||
8281 | See the :term:`DEFAULTTUNE` variable for more information. | ||
8282 | |||
8283 | :term:`TUNE_LDARGS` | ||
8284 | Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system. | ||
8285 | The set of flags is based on the selected tune features. | ||
8286 | ``TUNE_LDARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are | ||
8287 | typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced | ||
8288 | through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the | ||
8289 | ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags | ||
8290 | for the x86 architecture as follows: | ||
8291 | :: | ||
8292 | |||
8293 | TUNE_LDARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-m elf32_x86_64", "", d)}" | ||
8294 | |||
8295 | .. note:: | ||
8296 | |||
8297 | Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune, | ||
8298 | in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can | ||
8299 | supply its own set of flags). | ||
8300 | |||
8301 | :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` | ||
8302 | The package architecture understood by the packaging system to define | ||
8303 | the architecture, ABI, and tuning of output packages. The specific | ||
8304 | tune is defined using the "_tune" override as follows: | ||
8305 | :: | ||
8306 | |||
8307 | TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-tune = "tune" | ||
8308 | |||
8309 | These tune-specific package architectures are defined in the machine | ||
8310 | include files. Here is an example of the "core2-32" tuning as used in | ||
8311 | the ``meta/conf/machine/include/tune-core2.inc`` file: | ||
8312 | :: | ||
8313 | |||
8314 | TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-core2-32 = "core2-32" | ||
8315 | |||
8316 | :term:`TUNEABI` | ||
8317 | An underlying Application Binary Interface (ABI) used by a particular | ||
8318 | tuning in a given toolchain layer. Providers that use prebuilt | ||
8319 | libraries can use the ``TUNEABI``, | ||
8320 | :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and | ||
8321 | :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variables to check | ||
8322 | compatibility of tunings against their selection of libraries. | ||
8323 | |||
8324 | If ``TUNEABI`` is undefined, then every tuning is allowed. See the | ||
8325 | :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the variable is | ||
8326 | used. | ||
8327 | |||
8328 | :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE` | ||
8329 | If set, the OpenEmbedded system ignores the | ||
8330 | :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variable. | ||
8331 | Providers that use prebuilt libraries can use the | ||
8332 | ``TUNEABI_OVERRIDE``, ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``, and | ||
8333 | :term:`TUNEABI` variables to check compatibility of a | ||
8334 | tuning against their selection of libraries. | ||
8335 | |||
8336 | See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the | ||
8337 | variable is used. | ||
8338 | |||
8339 | :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` | ||
8340 | A whitelist of permissible :term:`TUNEABI` values. If | ||
8341 | ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST`` is not set, all tunes are allowed. Providers | ||
8342 | that use prebuilt libraries can use the ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``, | ||
8343 | :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and ``TUNEABI`` | ||
8344 | variables to check compatibility of a tuning against their selection | ||
8345 | of libraries. | ||
8346 | |||
8347 | See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the | ||
8348 | variable is used. | ||
8349 | |||
8350 | :term:`TUNECONFLICTS[feature]` | ||
8351 | Specifies CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning features | ||
8352 | that conflict with feature. | ||
8353 | |||
8354 | Known tuning conflicts are specified in the machine include files in | ||
8355 | the :term:`Source Directory`. Here is an example from | ||
8356 | the ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/arch-mips.inc`` include file | ||
8357 | that lists the "o32" and "n64" features as conflicting with the "n32" | ||
8358 | feature: | ||
8359 | :: | ||
8360 | |||
8361 | TUNECONFLICTS[n32] = "o32 n64" | ||
8362 | |||
8363 | :term:`TUNEVALID[feature]` | ||
8364 | Specifies a valid CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning | ||
8365 | feature. The specified feature is stored as a flag. Valid features | ||
8366 | are specified in the machine include files (e.g. | ||
8367 | ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc``). Here is an example | ||
8368 | from that file: | ||
8369 | :: | ||
8370 | |||
8371 | TUNEVALID[bigendian] = "Enable big-endian mode." | ||
8372 | |||
8373 | See the machine include files in the :term:`Source Directory` | ||
8374 | for these features. | ||
8375 | |||
8376 | :term:`UBOOT_CONFIG` | ||
8377 | Configures the :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE` and can | ||
8378 | also define :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` for individual | ||
8379 | cases. | ||
8380 | |||
8381 | Following is an example from the ``meta-fsl-arm`` layer. :: | ||
8382 | |||
8383 | UBOOT_CONFIG ??= "sd" | ||
8384 | UBOOT_CONFIG[sd] = "mx6qsabreauto_config,sdcard" | ||
8385 | UBOOT_CONFIG[eimnor] = "mx6qsabreauto_eimnor_config" | ||
8386 | UBOOT_CONFIG[nand] = "mx6qsabreauto_nand_config,ubifs" | ||
8387 | UBOOT_CONFIG[spinor] = "mx6qsabreauto_spinor_config" | ||
8388 | |||
8389 | In this example, "sd" is selected as the configuration of the possible four for the | ||
8390 | ``UBOOT_MACHINE``. The "sd" configuration defines | ||
8391 | "mx6qsabreauto_config" as the value for ``UBOOT_MACHINE``, while the | ||
8392 | "sdcard" specifies the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` to use for the U-boot image. | ||
8393 | |||
8394 | For more information on how the ``UBOOT_CONFIG`` is handled, see the | ||
8395 | :ref:`uboot-config <ref-classes-uboot-config>` | ||
8396 | class. | ||
8397 | |||
8398 | :term:`UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS` | ||
8399 | Specifies the load address for the dtb image used by U-boot. During FIT | ||
8400 | image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in | ||
8401 | :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify | ||
8402 | the load address to be used in | ||
8403 | creating the dtb sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image. | ||
8404 | |||
8405 | :term:`UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS` | ||
8406 | Specifies the load address for the dtbo image used by U-boot. During FIT | ||
8407 | image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in | ||
8408 | :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the load address to be used in | ||
8409 | creating the dtbo sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image. | ||
8410 | |||
8411 | :term:`UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT` | ||
8412 | Specifies the entry point for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image | ||
8413 | creation, the ``UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is passed as a | ||
8414 | command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility. | ||
8415 | |||
8416 | :term:`UBOOT_LOADADDRESS` | ||
8417 | Specifies the load address for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image | ||
8418 | creation, the ``UBOOT_LOADADDRESS`` variable is passed as a | ||
8419 | command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility. | ||
8420 | |||
8421 | :term:`UBOOT_LOCALVERSION` | ||
8422 | Appends a string to the name of the local version of the U-Boot | ||
8423 | image. For example, assuming the version of the U-Boot image built | ||
8424 | was "2013.10", the full version string reported by U-Boot would be | ||
8425 | "2013.10-yocto" given the following statement: | ||
8426 | :: | ||
8427 | |||
8428 | UBOOT_LOCALVERSION = "-yocto" | ||
8429 | |||
8430 | :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE` | ||
8431 | Specifies the value passed on the ``make`` command line when building | ||
8432 | a U-Boot image. The value indicates the target platform | ||
8433 | configuration. You typically set this variable from the machine | ||
8434 | configuration file (i.e. ``conf/machine/machine_name.conf``). | ||
8435 | |||
8436 | Please see the "Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type" | ||
8437 | section in the U-Boot README for valid values for this variable. | ||
8438 | |||
8439 | :term:`UBOOT_MAKE_TARGET` | ||
8440 | Specifies the target called in the ``Makefile``. The default target | ||
8441 | is "all". | ||
8442 | |||
8443 | :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_DTCOPTS` | ||
8444 | Options for the device tree compiler passed to mkimage '-D' | ||
8445 | feature while creating FIT image in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class. | ||
8446 | |||
8447 | :term:`UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT` | ||
8448 | Specifies the entrypoint for the RAM disk image. | ||
8449 | During FIT image creation, the | ||
8450 | ``UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is used | ||
8451 | in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the | ||
8452 | entrypoint to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for | ||
8453 | the FIT image. | ||
8454 | |||
8455 | :term:`UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS` | ||
8456 | Specifies the load address for the RAM disk image. | ||
8457 | During FIT image creation, the | ||
8458 | ``UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used | ||
8459 | in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the | ||
8460 | load address to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for | ||
8461 | the FIT image. | ||
8462 | |||
8463 | :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_ENABLE` | ||
8464 | Enable signing of FIT image. The default value is "0". | ||
8465 | |||
8466 | :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` | ||
8467 | Location of the directory containing the RSA key and | ||
8468 | certificate used for signing FIT image. | ||
8469 | |||
8470 | :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME` | ||
8471 | The name of keys used for signing U-boot FIT image stored in | ||
8472 | :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory. For e.g. dev.key key and dev.crt | ||
8473 | certificate stored in :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory will have | ||
8474 | :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME` set to "dev". | ||
8475 | |||
8476 | :term:`UBOOT_SUFFIX` | ||
8477 | Points to the generated U-Boot extension. For example, ``u-boot.sb`` | ||
8478 | has a ``.sb`` extension. | ||
8479 | |||
8480 | The default U-Boot extension is ``.bin`` | ||
8481 | |||
8482 | :term:`UBOOT_TARGET` | ||
8483 | Specifies the target used for building U-Boot. The target is passed | ||
8484 | directly as part of the "make" command (e.g. SPL and AIS). If you do | ||
8485 | not specifically set this variable, the OpenEmbedded build process | ||
8486 | passes and uses "all" for the target during the U-Boot building | ||
8487 | process. | ||
8488 | |||
8489 | :term:`UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST` | ||
8490 | Specifies a list of options that, if reported by the configure script | ||
8491 | as being invalid, should not generate a warning during the | ||
8492 | :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. Normally, invalid | ||
8493 | configure options are simply not passed to the configure script (e.g. | ||
8494 | should be removed from :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or | ||
8495 | :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`). | ||
8496 | However, common options, for example, exist that are passed to all | ||
8497 | configure scripts at a class level that might not be valid for some | ||
8498 | configure scripts. It follows that no benefit exists in seeing a | ||
8499 | warning about these options. For these cases, the options are added | ||
8500 | to ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST``. | ||
8501 | |||
8502 | The configure arguments check that uses | ||
8503 | ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST`` is part of the | ||
8504 | :ref:`insane <ref-classes-insane>` class and is only enabled if the | ||
8505 | recipe inherits the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` class. | ||
8506 | |||
8507 | :term:`UPDATERCPN` | ||
8508 | For recipes inheriting the | ||
8509 | :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class, ``UPDATERCPN`` | ||
8510 | specifies the package that contains the initscript that is enabled. | ||
8511 | |||
8512 | The default value is "${PN}". Given that almost all recipes that | ||
8513 | install initscripts package them in the main package for the recipe, | ||
8514 | you rarely need to set this variable in individual recipes. | ||
8515 | |||
8516 | :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX` | ||
8517 | You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream | ||
8518 | source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If | ||
8519 | the recipe source code is provided from Git repositories, the | ||
8520 | OpenEmbedded build system determines the latest upstream version by | ||
8521 | picking the latest tag from the list of all repository tags. | ||
8522 | |||
8523 | You can use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX`` variable to provide a | ||
8524 | regular expression to filter only the relevant tags should the | ||
8525 | default filter not work correctly. | ||
8526 | :: | ||
8527 | |||
8528 | UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX = "git_tag_regex" | ||
8529 | |||
8530 | :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX` | ||
8531 | Use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX`` variable to specify a different | ||
8532 | regular expression instead of the default one when the package | ||
8533 | checking system is parsing the page found using | ||
8534 | :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`. | ||
8535 | :: | ||
8536 | |||
8537 | UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX = "package_regex" | ||
8538 | |||
8539 | :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI` | ||
8540 | You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream | ||
8541 | source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If | ||
8542 | the source code is provided from tarballs, the latest version is | ||
8543 | determined by fetching the directory listing where the tarball is and | ||
8544 | attempting to find a later tarball. When this approach does not work, | ||
8545 | you can use ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`` to provide a different URI that | ||
8546 | contains the link to the latest tarball. | ||
8547 | :: | ||
8548 | |||
8549 | UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI = "recipe_url" | ||
8550 | |||
8551 | :term:`USE_DEVFS` | ||
8552 | Determines if ``devtmpfs`` is used for ``/dev`` population. The | ||
8553 | default value used for ``USE_DEVFS`` is "1" when no value is | ||
8554 | specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_DEVFS`` to "0" for a | ||
8555 | statically populated ``/dev`` directory. | ||
8556 | |||
8557 | See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:selecting a device manager`" section in | ||
8558 | the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information on how to | ||
8559 | use this variable. | ||
8560 | |||
8561 | :term:`USE_VT` | ||
8562 | When using | ||
8563 | :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`, | ||
8564 | determines whether or not to run a | ||
8565 | `getty <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__ on any | ||
8566 | virtual terminals in order to enable logging in through those | ||
8567 | terminals. | ||
8568 | |||
8569 | The default value used for ``USE_VT`` is "1" when no default value is | ||
8570 | specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_VT`` to "0" in the | ||
8571 | machine configuration file for machines that do not have a graphical | ||
8572 | display attached and therefore do not need virtual terminal | ||
8573 | functionality. | ||
8574 | |||
8575 | :term:`USER_CLASSES` | ||
8576 | A list of classes to globally inherit. These classes are used by the | ||
8577 | OpenEmbedded build system to enable extra features (e.g. | ||
8578 | ``buildstats``, ``image-mklibs``, and so forth). | ||
8579 | |||
8580 | The default list is set in your ``local.conf`` file: | ||
8581 | :: | ||
8582 | |||
8583 | USER_CLASSES ?= "buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink" | ||
8584 | |||
8585 | For more information, see | ||
8586 | ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample`` in the :term:`Source Directory`. | ||
8587 | |||
8588 | :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC` | ||
8589 | If set to ``error``, forces the OpenEmbedded build system to produce | ||
8590 | an error if the user identification (``uid``) and group | ||
8591 | identification (``gid``) values are not defined in any of the files | ||
8592 | listed in :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and | ||
8593 | :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES`. If set to | ||
8594 | ``warn``, a warning will be issued instead. | ||
8595 | |||
8596 | The default behavior for the build system is to dynamically apply | ||
8597 | ``uid`` and ``gid`` values. Consequently, the | ||
8598 | ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable is by default not set. If you plan | ||
8599 | on using statically assigned ``gid`` and ``uid`` values, you should | ||
8600 | set the ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable in your ``local.conf`` | ||
8601 | file as follows: | ||
8602 | :: | ||
8603 | |||
8604 | USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC = "error" | ||
8605 | |||
8606 | Overriding the | ||
8607 | default behavior implies you are going to also take steps to set | ||
8608 | static ``uid`` and ``gid`` values through use of the | ||
8609 | :term:`USERADDEXTENSION`, | ||
8610 | :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES`, and | ||
8611 | :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables. | ||
8612 | |||
8613 | .. note:: | ||
8614 | |||
8615 | There is a difference in behavior between setting | ||
8616 | ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` to ``error`` and setting it to ``warn``. | ||
8617 | When it is set to ``warn``, the build system will report a warning for | ||
8618 | every undefined ``uid`` and ``gid`` in any recipe. But when it is set | ||
8619 | to ``error``, it will only report errors for recipes that are actually | ||
8620 | built. | ||
8621 | This saves you from having to add static IDs for recipes that you | ||
8622 | know will never be built. | ||
8623 | |||
8624 | :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` | ||
8625 | Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static group | ||
8626 | identification (``gid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system | ||
8627 | adds a group to the system during package installation. | ||
8628 | |||
8629 | When applying static group identification (``gid``) values, the | ||
8630 | OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a | ||
8631 | ``files/group`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the | ||
8632 | variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file: | ||
8633 | :: | ||
8634 | |||
8635 | |||
8636 | USERADD_GID_TABLES = "files/group" | ||
8637 | |||
8638 | .. note:: | ||
8639 | |||
8640 | Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids" | ||
8641 | causes the build system to use static ``gid`` values. | ||
8642 | |||
8643 | :term:`USERADD_PACKAGES` | ||
8644 | When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, | ||
8645 | this variable specifies the individual packages within the recipe | ||
8646 | that require users and/or groups to be added. | ||
8647 | |||
8648 | You must set this variable if the recipe inherits the class. For | ||
8649 | example, the following enables adding a user for the main package in | ||
8650 | a recipe: | ||
8651 | :: | ||
8652 | |||
8653 | USERADD_PACKAGES = "${PN}" | ||
8654 | |||
8655 | .. note:: | ||
8656 | |||
8657 | It follows that if you are going to use the ``USERADD_PACKAGES`` | ||
8658 | variable, you need to set one or more of the :term:`USERADD_PARAM`, | ||
8659 | :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM`, or :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM` variables. | ||
8660 | |||
8661 | :term:`USERADD_PARAM` | ||
8662 | When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, | ||
8663 | this variable specifies for a package what parameters should pass to | ||
8664 | the ``useradd`` command if you add a user to the system when the | ||
8665 | package is installed. | ||
8666 | |||
8667 | Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe: | ||
8668 | :: | ||
8669 | |||
8670 | USERADD_PARAM_${PN} = "--system --home ${localstatedir}/lib/dbus \ | ||
8671 | --no-create-home --shell /bin/false \ | ||
8672 | --user-group messagebus" | ||
8673 | |||
8674 | For information on the | ||
8675 | standard Linux shell command ``useradd``, see | ||
8676 | http://linux.die.net/man/8/useradd. | ||
8677 | |||
8678 | :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` | ||
8679 | Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static user | ||
8680 | identification (``uid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system | ||
8681 | adds a user to the system during package installation. | ||
8682 | |||
8683 | When applying static user identification (``uid``) values, the | ||
8684 | OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a | ||
8685 | ``files/passwd`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the | ||
8686 | variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file: | ||
8687 | :: | ||
8688 | |||
8689 | USERADD_UID_TABLES = "files/passwd" | ||
8690 | |||
8691 | .. note:: | ||
8692 | |||
8693 | Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids" | ||
8694 | causes the build system to use static ``uid`` values. | ||
8695 | |||
8696 | :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` | ||
8697 | When set to "useradd-staticids", causes the OpenEmbedded build system | ||
8698 | to base all user and group additions on a static ``passwd`` and | ||
8699 | ``group`` files found in :term:`BBPATH`. | ||
8700 | |||
8701 | To use static user identification (``uid``) and group identification | ||
8702 | (``gid``) values, set the variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` | ||
8703 | file: USERADDEXTENSION = "useradd-staticids" | ||
8704 | |||
8705 | .. note:: | ||
8706 | |||
8707 | Setting this variable to use static ``uid`` and ``gid`` | ||
8708 | values causes the OpenEmbedded build system to employ the | ||
8709 | :ref:`ref-classes-useradd` class. | ||
8710 | |||
8711 | If you use static ``uid`` and ``gid`` information, you must also | ||
8712 | specify the ``files/passwd`` and ``files/group`` files by setting the | ||
8713 | :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and | ||
8714 | :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables. | ||
8715 | Additionally, you should also set the | ||
8716 | :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC` variable. | ||
8717 | |||
8718 | :term:`VOLATILE_LOG_DIR` | ||
8719 | Specifies the persistence of the target's ``/var/log`` directory, | ||
8720 | which is used to house postinstall target log files. | ||
8721 | |||
8722 | By default, ``VOLATILE_LOG_DIR`` is set to "yes", which means the | ||
8723 | file is not persistent. You can override this setting by setting the | ||
8724 | variable to "no" to make the log directory persistent. | ||
8725 | |||
8726 | :term:`WARN_QA` | ||
8727 | Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as | ||
8728 | warnings by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in | ||
8729 | your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you | ||
8730 | can control with this variable, see the | ||
8731 | ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section. | ||
8732 | |||
8733 | :term:`WKS_FILE` | ||
8734 | Specifies the location of the Wic kickstart file that is used by the | ||
8735 | OpenEmbedded build system to create a partitioned image | ||
8736 | (image\ ``.wic``). For information on how to create a partitioned | ||
8737 | image, see the | ||
8738 | ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`" | ||
8739 | section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For details on | ||
8740 | the kickstart file format, see the ":doc:`/ref-manual/ref-kickstart`" Chapter. | ||
8741 | |||
8742 | :term:`WKS_FILE_DEPENDS` | ||
8743 | When placed in the recipe that builds your image, this variable lists | ||
8744 | build-time dependencies. The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is only | ||
8745 | applicable when Wic images are active (i.e. when | ||
8746 | :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains entries related | ||
8747 | to Wic). If your recipe does not create Wic images, the variable has | ||
8748 | no effect. | ||
8749 | |||
8750 | The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is similar to the | ||
8751 | :term:`DEPENDS` variable. When you use the variable in | ||
8752 | your recipe that builds the Wic image, dependencies you list in the | ||
8753 | ``WIC_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable are added to the ``DEPENDS`` variable. | ||
8754 | |||
8755 | With the ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable, you have the possibility to | ||
8756 | specify a list of additional dependencies (e.g. native tools, | ||
8757 | bootloaders, and so forth), that are required to build Wic images. | ||
8758 | Following is an example: | ||
8759 | :: | ||
8760 | |||
8761 | WKS_FILE_DEPENDS = "some-native-tool" | ||
8762 | |||
8763 | In the | ||
8764 | previous example, some-native-tool would be replaced with an actual | ||
8765 | native tool on which the build would depend. | ||
8766 | |||
8767 | :term:`WORKDIR` | ||
8768 | The pathname of the work directory in which the OpenEmbedded build | ||
8769 | system builds a recipe. This directory is located within the | ||
8770 | :term:`TMPDIR` directory structure and is specific to | ||
8771 | the recipe being built and the system for which it is being built. | ||
8772 | |||
8773 | The ``WORKDIR`` directory is defined as follows: | ||
8774 | :: | ||
8775 | |||
8776 | ${TMPDIR}/work/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR} | ||
8777 | |||
8778 | The actual directory depends on several things: | ||
8779 | |||
8780 | - :term:`TMPDIR`: The top-level build output directory | ||
8781 | - :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`: The target system identifier | ||
8782 | - :term:`PN`: The recipe name | ||
8783 | - :term:`EXTENDPE`: The epoch - (if :term:`PE` is not specified, which | ||
8784 | is usually the case for most recipes, then `EXTENDPE` is blank) | ||
8785 | - :term:`PV`: The recipe version | ||
8786 | - :term:`PR`: The recipe revision | ||
8787 | |||
8788 | As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder name | ||
8789 | ``poky``, a default Build Directory at ``poky/build``, and a | ||
8790 | ``qemux86-poky-linux`` machine target system. Furthermore, suppose | ||
8791 | your recipe is named ``foo_1.3.0-r0.bb``. In this case, the work | ||
8792 | directory the build system uses to build the package would be as | ||
8793 | follows: | ||
8794 | :: | ||
8795 | |||
8796 | poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0 | ||
8797 | |||
8798 | :term:`XSERVER` | ||
8799 | Specifies the packages that should be installed to provide an X | ||
8800 | server and drivers for the current machine, assuming your image | ||
8801 | directly includes ``packagegroup-core-x11-xserver`` or, perhaps | ||
8802 | indirectly, includes "x11-base" in | ||
8803 | :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. | ||
8804 | |||
8805 | The default value of ``XSERVER``, if not specified in the machine | ||
8806 | configuration, is "xserver-xorg xf86-video-fbdev xf86-input-evdev". | ||
8807 | |||